Cisco Logo Network Registrar CLI Reference Guide

Table of Contents

Overview

CLI Commands

Reference

nrcmd
 
    nrcmd - run the Network Registrar command line interface

  Synopsis
 
    nrcmd [flags] [<command>]

  Description
 
    Flags are:
      -C <cluster>    Specify the cluster to connect to.
      -N <name>       Specify the administrator name.
      -P <password>   Specify the administrator password.
      -V <visibility> Specify the visibility level (default 5)
      -b              Run in batch mode
      -R              Connect to a regional cluster


    The visibility level controls which properties and features are
    visible to the session.  A lower visibility level makes more properties
    visible.  The default visibility level is 5, and should not be 
    changed without guidance from Cisco technical support.

    In batch mode, input is performed a line at a time rather than
    a character at a time, and the prompt is terminated with a newline
    character rather than a space.

  Examples
 
    % nrcmd -N admin -P changeme -C <local>
    nrcmd> 

intro
 
    intro - Introduction to nrcmd commands

  Synopsis
 

  Description
 
    The nrcmd commands fall into two basic groups: regular and
    irregular.  The regular commands manipulate configuration objects such
    as DHCP Scopes and DNS Zones in a standard fashion.  The irregular
    commands do everything else that is useful.  This man page will
    describe the general pattern of the regular commands.  The
    behavior of the irregular commands will be described in their 
    individual man pages.

  Regular Command form
    Regular commands provide common functions for creating, deleting,
    viewing and editing objects of a given class.

    Create 
      <cmd> <name> create [<required args>] [<prop>=<val>]

    Delete
      <cmd> <name> delete 

    List
      <cmd> list  

    Modify
      <cmd> <name> set <prop>=<value> [<prop>=<value> ...]
        The set command takes two forms: 'set <prop> <value>' for setting
        a single properties's value, and 'set <prop>=<value> ...' for
        setting multiple values in a single command.

        Errors include:
          unknown property 
            - if <prop> is not an property name for the object
          invalid format
            - if <value> is not in a valid format
          invalid value
            - if <value> is not semantically valid
 
      <cmd> <name> get <prop>
        The get command returns the value of the named property.

      <cmd> <name> unset <prop> [<prop> ...]
        The unset command makes the named properties have no value.

      <cmd> <name> enable <feature>
        The enable command sets the value of the named feature to true.

      <cmd> <name> disable <feature>
        The enable command sets the value of the named feature to false.

      <cmd> <name> show 
        The show command displays the value of the object.

  Class specific commands (methods)
    The configuration behavior of some objects may be enhanced by the
    addition of class specific commands to perform a useful action such
    as modifying complex properties, or controlling the objects
    behavior.  

    For example, DHCP Scope objects contain lists of address ranges
    from which leases may be offered.  To manipulate this list of
    ranges, the scope command provides the commands: addRange,
    removeRange, and listRanges.

    Another example is the forceAvailable command provided by the
    lease command to tell the DHCP server that a given lease should
    be forced into the available state.
     
  Filters 
    The results of the list commands can be restricted by applying
    filters to the results.  The filter specification is similar to
    the LDAP query filter specification, but uses infix rather than
    prefix relational operators.  See the filter man page for a more
    complete description of the filter specification grammar.

  Format specifiers 
    The output format of the list and show commands can be specified
    with the format arguments.  See the format man page for a complete
    description of the format specifiers.

  Licensing
    nrcmd requires the current cluster to have a valid license.
    If the license is invalid or has expired, only the 'license'
    command will be operational; it may be used to establish a new 
    license key.  A warning will be issued upon login if the
    license will be expiring within 7 days.

  Locking
    nrcmd versions prior to CNR 6.2 are limited to a single
    session and use a locking mechanism to control access.

    In interactive mode, the program attempts at startup to get an
    exclusive lock for the cluster to which it connects.  If this
    fails, nrcmd will issue a warning, and will allow only the
    following commands to be executed: "client", "lease",
    "zone create", "help", and "force-lock".  The force-lock
    command obtains the exclusive lock indiscriminately, and 
    should be used with caution. In particular, it should not be 
    used unless you're sure that no one else is updating the cluster.

    The warning issued for interactive mode, when the lock cannot
    be obtained, is	
        408 Already locked: '<user>@<host>.<pid>'.
        Warning: unable to lock the cluster.
        You might want to use the force-lock command if
        you're sure that no one else is updating the cluster

	where
            <user> is the name of the administrator
            <host> is the name of the Unix or Windows host on which the
                   other user is running
            <pid>  is the process ID of the nrcmd or
                   Network Registrar process.  (You can use system
                   tools such as Unix "ps" or NT "Task Manager" to
                   determine if the process is still running.)

    In batch mode (when the command is entered on the command
    line), nrcmd will not attempt to obtain a lock unless the
    command is not one of the valid ones listed above.  If a lock
    is needed, it will then attempt to get it; if this fails, the
    error issued is

        408 Cannot lock cluster: Already locked: '<user>@<host>.<pid>

    where <user>, <host>, and <pid> are as above.

  Return codes 
    All nrcmd commands will return a status code as the first line of
    output.  The status codes are heavily influenced by SMTP and other
    line oriented protocols.  The first word of the line is a three
    digit status code, and the remaining words on the line are
    descriptive text that may or may not be constant for a given
    status code.  The first digit of the status code determines the
    class of the status:
      1xx - the command completed successfully, possibly with warnings
      3xx   there was some error in processing the command
      4xx   errors in communicating with the cluster database server
      5xx   there is was an internal error in the program

  Property types
    The properties that are manipulated by the set and get command
    have specific data types which determine the syntactically valid
    values.  These types are:
        AT_STRING - a string, valid inputs are:
                    * any text

        AT_INT    - an integer, valid inputs are: 
                    * decimal digits, or 
                    * 0x followed by hex digits.

        AT_BOOL   - a boolean value, valid inputs are:
                    * true, on, enabled, 1, or
                    * false, off, disabled, 0.

        AT_DATE   - a date, valid inputs are:
                    * 'forever'
                    * +<time value>

        AT_TIME   - a span of time, in seconds, valid inputs are:
                    * decimal number of seconds
                    * combination of numbers of weeks, days, hours,
                      minutes, and seconds for example: 1w2d3h4m5s.

        AT_IPADDR - an ip address, valid inputs are:
                    * dotted quad format, for example 10.24.1.2

        AT_MACADDR - a MAC address, valid inputs are:
                    * raw hex digits, for example: 010203040506
                    * hex digits separated by ':', '.', or '-', for example: 
                      01:02:03:04:05:06, 01-02-03-04-05-06, 01.02.03.04.05.06
                    * type and length, followed by hex digits, for example:
                      1,6,ab:01:cd:02:ef:03

        AT_RANGEINT  - a range restricted integer
        AT_RANGETIME - a range restricted time value
        AT_ENUMINT   - an enumerated integer
        AT_FLAGSINT  - a bitmask with named bit positions

  Validation
    Data validation will be done at configuration creation and property
    modification time.  The nrcmd CLI will check for required valid values 
    when a configuration object is created, and it will check the validity
    of property values when they are set.

    Dangling references that are created by deleting a referred-to object, 
    such as the policy for a scope, or the client class for a client will not
    be caught by the CLI.

  Examples
 

  Limitations
 


expert
 
    Expert mode commands

  Synopsis
 

    cluster <local-cluster> delete

    ccm sync-from-dhcp [Reservation|AddressSpace|ALL] 
    ccm sync-to-dhcp [Prefix|Link|FailoverPair|Reservation|ALL]
    ccm sync-from-dns [ZoneData|Hosts]

    dhcp setFailoverState <state> <partner-name> <main | backup>
    dhcp disableComm <partner-name>
    dhcp enableComm

    reservation sync [-to|-from] dhcp

    sync-from-dns

  Description
 

    These commands are available only in expert mode and must be used
    with care. To enter expert mode:
    
    nrcmd> session set visibility=3

    The local cluster can only be deleted while in expert mode.

    The ccm sync-from-dhcp command can be used to synchronize CCM data
    from the DHCP server configuration data.

    The ccm sync-to-dhcp command can be used to synchronize the DHCP
    server's data from CCM's data.

    The ccm sync-from-dns command can be used to synchronize CCM DNS
    zone and RR data or hosts from RR data from DNS. The sync-from-dns,
    which is retained for backwards compatibility, is the same as
    ccm sync-from-dns ZoneData.

    The dhcp commands can be used to force failover related actions. These
    must be used with extreme care and are not recommended.
    
    The object command can be used to display the object with a specified
    oid. If -class=<classname> is specified, the DB for that class is
    used (the classname must be specified using the correct case). If
    -db=<dbid> is specified, the specified DB is used (the dbid must be
    specified in uppercase). If neither -class or -db is specified, the
    CCM DB is assumed.

    The reservation sync command can be used to synchronize reservations
    between CCM and DHCP. These are identical to the ccm sync-from-dhcp/
    sync-to-dhcp reservation commmands.

  Examples
 

  Limitations
 

acl
 
    acl - Manages DNS access control lists which are used to control
	    zone access for DNS updates, zone transfers and queries 

  Synopsis
 
    acl list
    acl listnames
    acl <name> show 
    acl <name> create  "<match-list>" 
    acl <name> delete  
    acl <name> get  <attribute>
    acl <name> set  <attribute>=<value> 
    acl <name> unset  <attribute>
    acl <name> add [!][key] <value>
    acl <name> remove [!][key] <value>
    
  Description
 
    The acl command is used to manage DNS ACLs which are used to
    restrict dynamic DNS updates, zone transfers and queries. Once you
    have created the acl object, it can be used with the update-acl,
    restrict-xfer-acl and restrict-query-acl on the DNS server or
    a zone object.

    You can specify the match-list as a comma-separated list of
    values, enclosed in quotes, or you can use the add and remove
    commands to edit the match list. The add command will add elements
    to the end of the list. The remove command will remove the first
    matching element in the match-list.
    
    Match list entries can consist of IP node or subnet addresses, 
    TSIG keys, or ACLs. A TSIG key must also be preceded by the 
    keyword <key>. The <!> notation can be used to negate an entry 
    in the list.
    
  Examples
 
    nrcmd> acl my-acl create "key my-key, 10.1.0.0/16"
    nrcmd> acl my-acl set match-list="10.1.1.1/32, my-acl"
    nrcmd> acl my-acl add "!10.2.0.0/16"

  Status
 

  See Also
    key
 
  Attributes
 
 match-list amelist
 
Displays a comma-separated list of match elements, which
can consist of IP node or subnet addresses, TSIG keys,
or ACLs. You can also use the following reserved words as
elements in a match list:
   any
   none
   localhost
   localnets
To specify more than one element in the match list, enclose
the list in quotation marks; for example:
   "192.168.2.1, localhost"
Use the object name to reference another ACL or TSIG key. A TSIG
key must also be preceded by the keyword <>key<>;
for example,
    key mykey.
You must specify subnet addresses in address/mask format.
Use an exclamation point (!)to negate an entry in the
list; for example,
   "!192.168.3.0/24, !youracl"
Note: You can define the name reference to an ACL in the
match list before you actually create the ACL. But the ACL must
exist before you start or reload the DNS server. If the DNS server
cannot resolve an ACL name reference on either the DNS server
object or a zone object, it will flag the error and will not start.
addr-trap
 
    addr-trap - Configures free-address monitoring by the DHCP server

  Synopsis
 
    addr-trap <name> create
    addr-trap <name> delete
    addr-trap enable <attribute>
    addr-trap <name> disable <attribute>
    addr-trap <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    addr-trap <name> unset <attribute>
    addr-trap <name> get <attribute>
    addr-trap list | listnames
    addr-trap <name> [show]

  Description
 
    The addr-trap command configures values that the DHCP server uses 
    to monitor free-address levels. Use this command with the SNMP 
    server to provide  SNMP notification trap messages as free-address 
    levels change within the DHCP server.


  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    scope, trap-recipient
 
  Attributes
 
 enable bool default = on
 
Indicates whether this configuration is active, causing scopes to
track their free-address levels and possibly send trap events.
 high-threshold percent default = 25%
 
Sets the level at which the 'low' threshold will be re-enabled,
and the high-threshold trap will be generated.
See the low-threshold for details on how the free-address level
is calculated.
 low-threshold percent default = 20%
 
Sets the free-address level at which a low-threshold trap will be
generated, and the 'high' threshold will be re-enabled.
For scopes, the free-address level is calculated as follows:
        available non-reserved leases
  100 * -----------------------------
           total configured leases
where the counts are the sum across all of the scopes included
in the aggregation.
For prefixes, the free-address level is calculated as follows:
          max-leases - dynamic leases
  100 *   ---------------------------
                  max-leases
where the counts are the sum across all of the prefixes included
in the aggregation.
 mode enumint(scope=1, network=2, selection-tags=3, prefix=4, link=5, v6-selection-tags=6, countonly=7, v6-countonly=8) default = scope
 
Indicates how scopes should aggregate their free address levels.
The 'scope' mode causes each scope to track its own free-address
level independently. This is an IPv4 only mode.
The 'network' mode causes all of the scopes configured by this
object to aggregate their free-address levels if they share a
'primary-subnet'. This is an IPv4 only mode.
The 'selection-tags' grouping causes scopes to aggregate their
free-address information together if they share a primary-subnet
and if their lists of selection tags match exactly. This is an IPv4 
only mode.
The 'prefix' mode causes each prefix to track its own free-address 
level independently.  This is an IPv6 only mode.
The 'link' mode causes all of the prefixes configured by this
object to aggregate their free-address levels if they share a
link.  This is an IPv6 only mode.
The 'v6-selection-tags' grouping causes prefixes to aggregate
their free-address information if they share a link, and if their
lists of selection tags match exactly.  This is an IPv6 only mode.
The 'countonly' and 'v6-countonly' groupings are used
for the built-in aggregation objects that are used to provide
top-utilized information when no traps are configured.
No traps will be fired for these modes.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
Gives a unique name to the configuration object.
address-block
 
    address-block - Defines a contiguous block of IP address space

  Synopsis
 
    address-block <address/mask-length> create[<attribute>=<value> ...]
    address-block <address/mask-length> delete 
    address-block list
    address-block listnames
    address-block <name> show
    address-block <name> get <attribute>
    address-block <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    address-block <name> unset <attribute>

  Description
 
    An address block is an aggregate of IP addresses based on a
    power-of-two address space. For example, the 192.168.0.0/16 address
    block includes 65536 (2^16) addresses.  
        
    Address blocks can be further divided into child address blocks and
    subnets. For example, you might want to divide the 192.168.0.0/16
    address block further into four child address blocks: 192.168.0.0/17,
    192.168.64.0/17, 192.168.128.0/17, and 192.168.192.0/17. A subnet is
    used to designate a leaf node of the address space that will not be
    further subdivided.

    Address blocks are used as a management tool to group and report on
    address space usage. The owner and region properties on an address
    block or its parent can be used to constrain user access to address
    space reports.
    
  Examples
 
    nrcmd> address-block 192.168.0.0/16 create

  Status
 

  See Also
    subnet, owner, region
 
  Attributes
 
 address subnet required,immutable
 
Specifies the IP address and mask of the CCM address block,
which was set at creation. This defines the address range
of the block. Use the set command to redefine the address.
 description string
 
Describes how this address block is used.
 forward-zone-name dname
 
Names the forward zone associated with this block.
 owner oid
 
Names the owner of this address block. Use the owner field
to group similarly owned address blocks; to limit administrative
access; and to track allocation or delegation for ARIN
reporting purposes.
 parent oid
 
Identifies the parent address block.
 region oid
 
Names the region associated with this address block. Use the
region field to group similarly located address blocks and to
limit administrative access.
 report-state enumint(available=0, internal=1, reallocated=2, reassigned=3) transient
 
Transient report state of the CCM address block, provided
to make it easier for ARIN reporting and for clients to
filter the list of address blocks they display.
    0  available
    1  internal
    2  reallocated
    3  reassigned
 reverse-zone-name dname
 
Names the reverse zone associated with this block.
 sink oid
 
Points to either the CCMOwner or CCMCluster for a
a leaf block delegated to a lower-level sink.
Delegated AddrBlocks (those with a non-null sink attribute)
cannot be further split into child address blocks or subnets.
 source oid
 
Points to the CCMOwner configuration object representing
the source for a top-level block allocated from a higher-level
source.
 type nameref(CCMAddrSpaceType)
 
Defines an addresss-block type, enabling you to group
address blocks that share common properties, such as their
associated scope template. This attribute names a
CCMAddrSpaceType object that contains more information about
the type.
 vpn-id int default = 0, immutable
 
Identifies the ID the VPN object used to support multiple
address spaces, such as in a managed VPN environment.
admin
 
    admin - Creates administrators and assigns them groups and passwords

  Synopsis
 
    admin <name> create [<attribute>=<value>]
    admin <name> delete
    admin list  
    admin listnames
    admin <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    admin <name> get <attribute>
    admin <name> unset <attribute>
    admin <name> enable <attribute>
    admin <name> disable <attribute>
    admin <name> show 
    admin <name> enterPassword 

  Description
 
    The admin command configures administrators for the cluster. 
    
    You can choose any string for the name of the administrator. 
    Names are not case-sensitive. Network Registrar uses a password
    to authenticate each administrator. Passwords are case-sensitive.
    
    Because the password is sensitive information, Network Registrar 
    prints its value as '********'.

    admin <name> enterPassword 
       If you want to enter a password and not have Network Registrar 
       display the password on your screen, create an administrator but
       do not supply a password. Then use the enterPassword command to 
       have Network Registrar prompt you twice for the password. If both
       entries match, Network Registrar will set the password value.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    group, role
 
  Attributes
 
 groups string
 
Lists the names of groups to which this administrator belongs.
 password clrtxt transient
 
Temporarily stores the cleartext password for this
administrator that is used to create the password-secret.
 superuser bool
 
Indicates whether this administrator is a superuser.
ccm
 
    ccm - Configures and controls the CCM server

  Synopsis
 
    ccm get <attribute>
    ccm set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    ccm unset <attribute>
    ccm show

  Description
 
   The ccm command manages the CCM server in the cluster. 

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    server
 
  Attributes
 
 atul-port rangeint(1-65535) default = 7543
 
Enables the CCM server to listen for incoming ATUL queries
on this UDP port. This attribute is used only by the
regional CCM server. Changes to this setting take effect
on the next server restart.
 atul-support bool default = disabled
 
Enables CCM support for the ATUL query protocol. The atul-port
parameter configures the port number to listen on for ATUL
queries. Changes to this setting take effect on the next server
restart.
 lease-hist-detail bool default = true
 
If polling for lease history data, this causes CCM to ask for history
detail data when polling DHCP servers, and save the detail data when
it's returned. Changes to this setting will take effect on
the next server restart.
 local-zone-edit-mode enumint(staged=1, synchronous=2) default = synchronous
 
Indicates the efault mode that local clients should use for DNS
updates.
This default mode is overridden if a mode is specified in a given CCM
SCP message (in other words, by specific client request).  If
unset, clients should always present the choice of mode to the user.
 poll-lease-hist-interval rangetime(0-1y) default = 4h
 
This interval specifies how often to collect the lease history
information from all the DHCP servers. If set to 0, polling
is disabled.
 poll-lease-hist-offset rangetime(0-24h)
 
Provides a fixed time of day for lease history polling.
This time is interpreted as a time of day offset, with 0 being
12 midnight, provided the polling interval is less than 24 hours,
and the offset value is less than the polling interval. If the offset
value is greater than the polling interval, or the interval is
greater than 24 hours, the offset will be ignored.
The scheduler for polling will ensure that the first polling event
occurs at the offset time. For example, if you set the interval to
4 hours and the offset to 2am, the polling would occur at 2am, 6am,
10am, 2pm, 6pm and 10pm.
 poll-lease-hist-retry rangeint(0-4) default = 1
 
The number of retries for a given polling interval, if polling fails.
 poll-replica-interval rangetime(0-1y) default = 4h
 
This interval specifies the default value of how often to poll
for configuration changes when replicating data from a local cluster.
 poll-replica-offset rangetime(0-24h) default = 0
 
Provides a fixed time of day for replica polling.
This time is interpreted as a time of day offset, with 0 being
12 midnight, provided the polling interval is less than 24 hours,
and the offset value is less than the polling interval. If the offset
value is greater than the polling interval, or the interval is
greater than 24 hours, the offset will be ignored.
The scheduler for polling will ensure that the first polling event
occurs at the offset time. For example, if you set the interval to
4 hours and the offset to 2am, the polling would occur at 2am, 6am,
10am, 2pm, 6pm and 10pm.
 poll-subnet-util-interval rangetime(0-1y) default = 4h
 
This interval specifies how often to collect subnet
utilization from all the DHCP servers. If set to 0, polling
is disabled.
 poll-subnet-util-offset rangetime(0-24h)
 
Provides a fixed time of day for subnet utilization polling.
This time is interpreted as a time of day offset, with 0 being
12 midnight, provided the polling interval is less than 24 hours,
and the offset value is less than the polling interval. If the offset
value is greater than the polling interval, or the interval is
greater than 24 hours, the offset will be ignored.
The scheduler for polling will ensure that the first polling event
occurs at the offset time. For example, if you set the interval to
4 hours and the offset to 2am, the polling would occur at 2am, 6am,
10am, 2pm, 6pm and 10pm.
 poll-subnet-util-retry rangeint(0-4) default = 1
 
The number of retries for a given polling interval, if polling fails.
 poller-event-threads rangeint(1-5) default = 2
 
This specifies how many threads that the poller will create.
Changes to this setting will take effect on the next server restart.
 regional-zone-edit-mode enumint(staged=1, synchronous=2) default = staged
 
Indicates the default mode that regional clients should use
for DNS updates.
This default mode is overridden if a mode is specified in a given CCM
SCP message (in other words, by specific client request).  If
unset, clients should always present the choice of mode to the user.
 scope-edit-mode enumint(staged=1, synchronous=2) default = staged
 
Indicates the default mode that web UI and CLI clients use
for DHCP edits:
    1  staged
       Edits are written to the database but are not immediately
       forwarded to the DHCP server; that is, they remain
       unpublished by DHCP.
    2  synchronous
       Edits are written to the database and are immediately
       forwarded for publishing to the DHCP server.
 trim-changeset-age rangetime(24h-3y) default = 1y
 
Sets the minimum age for a change log entry to be eligible
for trimming.
 trim-lease-hist-age rangetime(24h-1y) default = 24w
 
The minimum length of time that we will keep a lease history record in
the lease history database.  Any lease history record older than this
time will be deleted when the next lease history database trimming
operation occurs.
If set to 0, all lease history data will be trimmed. Changes to this
setting will take effect on the next server restart.
 trim-lease-hist-interval rangetime(0-1y) default = 24h
 
This interval specifies how often to trim the old lease history data.
If set to 0 no automatic lease history trimming occurs.
If lease history collection and polling are enabled and this parameter
is set to 0, the lease history database will continue to grow without
bound. Changes to this setting will take effect on the next server
restart.
 trim-subnet-util-age rangetime(24h-1y) default = 24w
 
The age that we will allow a subnet-util trimming element to be before
deciding to delete that element. If this value is set to zero, we will
not consider the record age when trimming. Changes to this setting
will take effect on the next server restart.
 trim-subnet-util-interval rangetime(0-1y) default = 24h
 
This interval specifies how often to trim the old subnet utilization
data. If set to 0 no automatic subnet utilization trimming occurs.
Changes to this setting will take effect on the next server restart.
 webui-mode enumint(Basic=0, Advanced=1, Expert=2) default = Basic
 
Sets the mode for the web UI at session startup:
    0  basic
    1  advanced
    2  expert
client
 
    client - Creates clients and assigns them to client-classes

  Synopsis
 
    client <name> create [<attribute>=<value>]
    client <name> delete
    client list  
    client listnames
    client <name> show 
    client <name> get <attribute>
    client <name> set <attribute>=<value>
    client <name> unset <attribute>

  Description
 
    The client command assigns attributes to a specific client entry. 
    These attributes determine what type of IP address, policy, or 
    both that Network Registrar assigns to the requesting host. 
    Network Registrar always stores the client identifier (MAC 
    address or default) in lowercase characters.

    Because the DHCP server reads the client-specific configuration
    information each time a request comes in, you do not have to 
    reload the server after modifying it. However, you must reload
    the server if you modify the default client configuration.
     
    The attributes you can assign include such things as
    a class of client, a policy, an action, and the inclusion or
    exclusion of scope selection tags. The DHCP server looks up these
    properties to determine how it should process a host request for
    an IP address.
    
    If you have common client attributes to configure, such as selection 
    criteria, use the client-class so that multiple client
    configurations can reference the attributes.
          
    You can specify the client by using the MAC address or some
    other unique client identifier related to the client-lookup-id
    that is specified in the client's associated client-class.

    A sample Ethernet MAC address might be 1,6,00:a0:24:2e:9c:20


    client name create [attribute=value?]
    client default create [attribute=value?]
       Creates the client identifier as a MAC address or the word default 
       (and optionally defines its attributes). The default client configuration
       applies to all clients that do not have an explicit configuration. If an 
       entry for the client already exists, the command overwrites it.

       If using a MAC address, it should be in the form hardware, length, 
       address (without spaces and including the commas):

          hardware
          Usually 1 (Ethernet) or 6 (Token Ring), but can be any number from 1 through 255.

          length
          Octets in the MAC address (usually 6, but can be any number from 1 through 16).

          address
          MAC address itself, with octets separated by colons, and each octet having a 
          two-character hex value from 00 through FF (not case-sensitive).

               
    
  Examples
 
    nrcmd> client 1,6,00:d0:ba:d3:bd:3b create client-class-name=external

  Status
 

  See Also
    client-class
 
  Attributes
 
 action flags(exclude=1, deprecated-one-shot=2, deprecated-use-release-grace-period=3, none=32)
 
Describes the action the DHCP server takes for this client.
    1  exclude - causes the server to ignore all
       communication from this client.
    2  deprecated-one-shot - now deprecated.
    3  deprecated-use-release-grace-period - now deprecated.
    32 none
If you specify the exclude action in the default client
entry, then any client not specifically registered through
the client command cannot communicate with the server.
Note: The deprecated flags (2,3) are now available through
the policy command attributes inhibit-all-renews and
release-grace-period.
 add-to-environment-dictionary string
 
Lists attribute-value pairs that are added to the environment
dictionary whenever this client-class is associated with an
incoming DHCP request.  You can use these attribute-value pairs
to configure extensions or expressions without having to rewrite
the executable code in the extension or expression.
The string must have the format:
"attribute1=value1,attribute2=value2, ... ,attributen=valuen"
 authenticate-until date
 
Sets an authentication expiration date, using date format or the
forever keyword. Dates can be in the 2h (two hours ago, for
example) or month day hour:minute[:second] year format.
Formats for the date are:
 +
    Time in the future, where num is a decimal number and unit
    is s, m, h, d, or w for seconds, minutes, hours, days or
    weeks, respectively.
   :[:] 
    Month, day, 24-hour time, and 2-or-4-digit-year.
    For example:Jun 30 20:00:00 2007. Enter the time that is
    local to the nrcmd process.
 forever
    Does not expire the authentication for this client.
 client-class-name string
 
Identifies the client-class to which a client belongs. If the client
is not a member of a client-class, then the DHCP server uses the
default client-class properties.
 default-vpn nameref(VPN)
 
Names the VPN to assign to clients that do not already have a
vpn-id or vrf-name value.
 domain-name string
 
Gives the domain name (which must be a zone) to use when performing
DNS updates. Places the client's A record in this DNS domain.
This feature is maintained for compatibility with prior versions.
Additional options to specify the forward zone are provided on
the client policy (or embedded policy) and its referenced
DNSUpdateConfig objects.
 embedded-policy obj(0)
 
Specifies the embedded policy object for this client.
 host-name string
 
Specifies the hostname. Use this string to replace any hostname
DHCP option that the DHCP client sends. The two forms for
specifying the hostname are:
1.  A string that does not start with an at (@) sign. This form
    of host-name value is used to override the DHCP client
    request host name. When you enter a valid name, you cause
    the DHCP server to ignore any host-name specified by this
    client, and, instead, use this client-entry attribute. The
    actual value of the hostname option in the client's DHCP
    packet is ignored. You can use any valid DNS name. You
    cannot use underscores (_)in the hostname.
2.  A string that starts with an at (@) sign. Network Registrar
    uses this form of hostname value to signal the following
    special handling:
    @host-name-option
       Causes the server to use whatever hostname option the
       client sent. This is the default behavior if there is no
       entry for hostname in either the client or client-class.
    @no-host-name-option
       Causes the server to drop the hostname option that the
       client sent, and not replace it. If you have disabled DNS
       name synthesis, then the client will have no name placed
       into DNS.
    @use-macaddress
       Causes the server to synthesize a hostname for the
       client that is derived from its MAC address, and is
       thus unique. This token is used to ensure that a
       client has a valid name in DNS.
This feature is maintained for compatibility with earlier versions.
Additional options for hostname synthesis are provided on the
DNSUpdateConfig object referenced by the policy hierarchy.
 over-limit-client-class-name string
 
Identifies which client-class to use if this client is over the
limit allowed for the number of simultaneous active leases with
a common limitation-id.
 override-vpn nameref(VPN)
 
Names the VPN to assign to clients, no matter what values
clients present as VPN-IDs or vrf-names.
 policy-name string
 
Identifies the policy to add to Network Registrar's DHCP policy
search list for this client.
 selection-criteria string
 
Lists selection tags for this client. All the criteria in this
list must appear in the scope/prefix selection tags for a
scope/prefix to be considered acceptable to this client.
 unauthenticated-client-class-name string
 
Identifies the client-class to use if this client is no longer
authenticated.
 user-defined string
 
Contains an opaque user-defined string that can be set and
queried. This attribute has no effect on the operation of the
DHCP server.
client-class
 
    client-class - Creates client-classes

  Synopsis
 
    client-class <name> create [<attribute>=<value>] 
    client-class <name> delete 
    client-class list
    client-class listnames
    client-class <name> show 
    client-class <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    client-class <name> get <attribute>
    client-class <name> unset <attribute>

  Description
 
    The client-class command applies a set of attributes to a group or
    class of DHCP client configurations. Unlike most client configurations, 
    the DHCP server reads the client-class configurations at server startup 
    time. Therefore, you must reload the server for changes to take effect.

    You must enable client-class processing for the server for 
    Network Registrar to recognize client-classes, as the examples show.

  Examples
 
	 nrcmd> dhcp enable client-class
       nrcmd> client-class internal create 
       nrcmd> dhcp reload

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 action flags(exclude=1, deprecated-one-shot=2, deprecated-use-release-grace-period=3, none=32)
 
Specifies what action to take with this client-class.  You can
specify exclude, causing the server to ignore all communication
from this client.
If you specify the exclude action in the default client entry,
then any client not specifically registered through the client
command cannot communicate with the server.
The one-shot and use-release-grace-period actions are now
deprecated and ignored; these are available through the policy
inhibit-all-renews and release-grace-period attributes.
 add-to-environment-dictionary string
 
This string contains attribute-value pairs that are added to the
environment dictionary whenever this client-class is associated
with an incoming DHCP request.  You can use these attribute-value
pairs to configure extensions or expressions without having to
re-write the executable code in the extension or expression.  The
string must have the format:
"attribute1=value1,attribute2=value2, ... ,attributen=valuen"
 client-lookup-id expr
 
Specifies the key value used to lookup the specified client in the
client database, using an expression that evaluates to a string
or a blob that is a valid string.  The lookup can be local or through
LDAP.
 default-vpn nameref(VPN)
 
Determines the VPN to which a client is assigned if the client does
not supply a VPN-ID (or vrf-name) value.
 domain-name string
 
Sets the domain name, which must be a zone, for performing DNS
updates. Places the client's A record in this DNS domain.
This feature is maintained for compatibility with prior versions.
Additional options to specify the forward zone are provided on
the client-class's policy (or embedded policy) and its
referenced DNSUpdateConfig objects.
 embedded-policy obj(Policy)
 
Specifies the embedded policy object for this client-class.
 host-name string
 
Specifies the hostname for clients in this client-class.
Network Registrar uses this form of hostname value to signal the
following special handling:
    @host-name-option
       Causes the server to use whatever hostname option the
       client sent. This is the default behavior if there is no
       entry for host-name in either the client or client-class.
    @no-host-name-option
       Causes the server to drop the hostname option that the
       client sent, and not replace it. If you have disabled
       DNS name synthesis, then the client will have no name
       placed into DNS.
    @use-macaddress
       Causes the server to synthesize a host-name for the
       client that is derived from its MAC address, and is thus
       unique. This token is used to ensure that a client has a
       valid name in DNS.
This feature is maintained for compatibility with prior versions.
Additional options for host-name synthesis are provided on the
DNSUpdateConfig object referenced by the policy hierarchy.
 limitation-id expr
 
Specifies an expression that evaluates to a binary large object
(blob), or a string that can be used as a blob. The resulting
value groups leases that have a maximum limit on the number of
simultaneous active leases allowed. To configure the limit, use
limitation-count attribute of the policy command. See also
the over-limit-client-class attribute.
 over-limit-client-class-name string
 
Designates the client-class used if this client is over the limit
allowed for the specified limitation-id.
 override-client-id expr
 
Specifies the client-identity value for the specified client, using
an expression that evaluates to a binary large object (blob).  The
value that is derived from the expression evaluation replaces any
client-id option value in the incoming packet (though in actual
practice, both values are retained in the lease-state database).
 override-vpn nameref(VPN)
 
Determines the VPN to which a client is assigned regardless
of what the client provides for a VPN-ID (or vrf-name) value.
 policy-name string
 
Names the policy that should be used for this client-class.
 selection-criteria string
 
Lists the selection tags for this client-class. All the criteria
in this list must appear in the scope/prefix selection tags for a
scope/prefix to be considered acceptable to this client-class.
 unauthenticated-client-class-name string
 
Names the client-class used if this client is no longer
authenticated.
 user-defined string
 
Provides an opaque user-defined string that can be set
and queried. This property has no effect on the operation
of the DHCP server.
 v6-client-lookup-id expr
 
Specifies the key value used to lookup the DHCPv6 client in the
client database, using an expression that evaluates to a string
or a blob that is a valid string.  The lookup can be local or through
LDAP.
 v6-override-client-id expr
 
An expression which evaluates to a blob which is used for the
client-identity value for the current DHCPv6 client.  Conceptually
this value derived from the expression evaluation will replace any
client-id option value in the incoming packet (though in actual
practice, both values are retained in the lease-state database).
client-class-policy
 
    client-class-policy - Adds DHCP policy information to a client-class

  Synopsis
 
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> delete
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> 
        set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> get <attribute>
    
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> disable <attribute>
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> enable <attribute>
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> show
    
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> setLeaseTime <time-val>
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> getLeaseTime
    
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> setOption <opt-name | id> <value>
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> getOption <opt-name | id>
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> unsetOption <opt-name | id> 
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> listOptions

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> setV6Option <opt-name | id> <value>
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> getV6Option <opt-name | id>
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> unsetV6Option <opt-name | id> 
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> listV6Options

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> 
        setVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name> <value>

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> 
        getVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> 
        unsetVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> listVendorOptions

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> 
        setV6VendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name> <value>

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> 
        getV6VendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> 
        unsetV6VendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> listV6VendorOptions

  Description
 
    The client-class-policy command configures embedded policies for 
    client-classes. Each client-class can contain option data in its 
    embedded policy and can refer to a named policy with more option
    data; for example, a router IP address.

    An embedded policy is a collection of DHCP option values and settings
    associated with (and named by) a client-class. Network Registrar 
    implicitly creates and deletes an embedded client-class policy when
    you create and delete the corresponding client-class. You manipulate
    the client-class policy using the name of the client-class to which 
    the embedded policy is attached.
    
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> setOption <opt-name | id> <value>
       Sets individual option values. When you set an
       option value the DHCP server will replace any existing value or
       create a new one as needed for the given option name.

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> getOption <opt-name | id>
       Displays option values.

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> unsetOption <opt-name | id> 
       Unsets option values.

    client-class-policy <client-class-name> setLeaseTime <time-val>
        Sets the lease time.
    
    client-class-policy <client-class-name> getLeaseTime    
        Displays the lease time for the specified client-class.
   
    See the attribute descriptions for the policy command for a complete list of
    attributesfor client-class-policy. Except where noted in that list, 
    policy command attributes also apply to client-class policies.
  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    policy, scope-policy, client-policy
 
  Attributes
 
 affinity-period time
 
Associates a lease in the AVAILABLE state with the client that
last held the lease. If the client requests a lease during the
affinity period, it is granted the same lease; that is, unless
renewals are prohibited, then it is explicitly not given the lease.
Because of the vast IPv6 address space and depending on the address
generation technique, it could be millions of years before an
address ever needs reassignment to a different client, and there
is no reason to hold on to this information for that long.
To prohibit renewals enable either the inhibit-all-renews attribute
or the inhibit-renews-at-reboot attribute.
 allow-client-a-record-update bool default = disabled
 
Determines if a client is allowed to update A records.
If the client sets the flags in the FQDN option to indicate that
it wants to do the A record update in the request, and if this
value is TRUE, the server allows the client to do the A record
update; otherwise, based on other server configurations, the server
does the A record update.
 allow-dual-zone-dns-update bool default = disabled
 
Enables DHCP clients to perform DNS updates into two DNS zones.
To support these clients, you can configure the DHCP server to
allow the client to perform an update, but also to perform a DNS
update on the client's behalf.
 allow-lease-time-override bool default = disabled
 
Gives the server control over the lease period.  Although a client
can request a specific lease time, the server need not honor the
request if this attribute is set to false (the default).
Even if set to true, clients can request only lease times that are
shorter than those configured for the server.
 allow-non-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request non-temporary
(IA_NA) addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request non-temporary addresses.
 allow-rapid-commit bool default = false
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can use a Solicit with the
Rapid Commit option to obtain configuration information with
fewer messages. To permit this, make sure that a single DHCP
server is servicing clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked:
  - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
    FALSE, Rapid Commit is not allowed.
  - If at least one has it set to TRUE, Rapid Commit is allowed.
  - Otherwise, the remaining policies in the hierarchy are
    checked.
The default is not to allow clients to use Rapid Commit.
 allow-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request temporary (IA_TA)
addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request temporary addresses.
 default-prefix-length rangeint(0-128) default = 64
 
For delegation, specifies the default length of the delegated prefix,
if a router (client) does not explicitly request it.
The default length must always be less than or equal to the prefix
length of the prefix range.
 forward-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which forward zones to include in updates.
 forward-zone-name dname
 
Designates an optional forward zone for DNS updates.
 giaddr-as-server-id bool default = false
 
Enables the DHCP server to set the server-id option on a DHCPOFFER
and a DHCPACK to the giaddr of the incoming packet, instead of the
IP address of the server (the default action).
This causes all unicast renews to be sent to the relay agent instead
of directly to the DHCP server, and so renews arrive at the DHCP
server with option-82 information appended to the packet.
Some relay agents may not support this capability and, in some
complex configurations, the giaddr might not actually be an address
to which the DHCP client can send A unicast packet. In these cases,
the DHCP client cannot renew a lease, and must always perform a
rebind operation (where the DHCP client broadcasts a request instead
of sending a unicast to what it believes is the DHCP server).
 grace-period time default = 5m
 
Defines the length of time between the expiration of a lease
and the time it is made available for reassignment.
 inhibit-all-renews bool default = false
 
Causes the server to reject all renewal requests, forcing the client
to obtain a different address any time it contacts the DHCP server.
 inhibit-renews-at-reboot bool default = false
 
Permits clients to renew their leases, but the server forces
them to obtain new addresses each time they reboot.
 limitation-count int
 
Specifies the maximum number of clients with the same limitation-id
that are allowed to have currently active and valid leases.
 offer-timeout time default = 2m
 
Instructs the server to wait a specified amount of time when it
has offered a lease to a client, but the offer is not yet accepted.
At the end of the specified time interval, the server makes the
lease available again.
 packet-file-name string
 
Identifies the boot-file to use in the boot process of a client.
The server returns this file name in the 'file' field of its replies.
The packet-file-name cannot be longer than 128 characters.
 packet-server-name string
 
Identifies the host-name of the server to use in a client's boot
process. The server returns this file name in the 'sname' field
of its replies. The packet-server-name field cannot be longer
than 64 characters.
 packet-siaddr ipaddr
 
Identifies the IP address of the next server in the client boot
process. For example, this might be the address of a TFTP server
used by BOOTP clients. The server returns this address in the
'siaddr' field of its replies.
 permanent-leases bool default = disabled
 
Indicates whether leases using this policy are permanently granted
to requesting clients. If leases are permanently granted, the server
ignores the configured dhcp-lease-time option value and uses the
maximum lease time.
 preferred-lifetime time default = 1w
 
Assigns the default and maximum preferred lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative to
the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets the
length of time that the address is preferred; that is, its use is
unrestricted. When the preferred lifetime expires, the address
becomes deprecated and its use is restricted.
 reconfigure enumint(allow=1, disallow=2, require=3) default = allow
 
Controls DHCPv6 client reconfiguration support:
   1  allow        Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server will honor the
                   request (default).
   2  disallow     Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support but the server will not honor
                   the clients' request.
   3  require      Requires clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server drops client
                   Solicit and Request messages that do not
                   include a Reconfigure-Accept option.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked
as follows:
   - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
   disallow or require, that setting is used.
   - Otherwise, if at least one has it set to allow, Reconfigure
   is allowed.
   - If no prefix policies have this attribute set, the remaining
   policies in the hierarchy are checked.
 reconfigure-via-relay bool default = false
 
Controls whether the server should prefer unicasting or
relaying DHCPv6 Reconfigure messages.
If false (the default), the server prefers to unicast
Reconfigure messages if the client has one or more valid
statefully assigned addresses.
If true, the server prefers to send Reconfigure messages
via the relay agent unless no relay agent information is
available.
Note: When you use this attribute, consider that:
    -  In networks where the DCHPv6 server cannot communicate
       directly with its client devices?for example, where
       firewalls are in place?set this value to true.
    -  The DHCPv6 server does not use embedded and named
       policies configured on a client when it evaluates
       this attribute.
    -  The relay agent cannot be used if the Relay-Forw message
       came from a link-local address.
 reverse-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which reverse zones to include in a DNS update.
 server-lease-time time
 
Tells the server how long a lease is valid.  For more frequent
communication with a client, you might have the server consider
leases as leased for a longer period than the client considers them.
This also provides more lease-time stability. This value is not used
unless it is longer than the lease time in the dhcp-lease-time option
found through the normal traversal of policies.
 split-lease-times bool default = disabled
 
Specifies a value that the DHCP server might use internally to
affect lease times.
If enabled, the DHCP server still offers clients lease times that
reflect the configured lease-time option from the appropriate
policy; but the server bases its decisions regarding expiration
on the 'server-lease-time' value.
 unavailable-timeout time default = 24h
 
Permits the server to make a lease unavailable for the time specified
and then to return the lease to available state. If there is no value
configured in the system_default_policy, then the default is
86400 seconds (or 24 hours).
 use-client-id-for-reservations bool default = off
 
Controls how the server database checks for reserved IP
addresses.
By default, the server uses the MAC address of the DHCP client as the
key for its database lookup.  If this attribute is set to true
(enabled), then the server does the check for reserved
addresses using the DHCP client-id, which the client usually sends.
In cases where the DHCP client does not supply the client-id, the
server synthesizes it, and uses that value.
 v4-bootp-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all BOOTP clients.
 v4-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all DHCPv4 clients, whether
or not the client specifically asks for the option data.
 v6-reply-options optionid6
 
Lists the options that should be returned in any
replies to DHCPv6 clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked.
 valid-lifetime time default = 2w
 
Assigns the default and maximum valid lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative
to the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets
the length of time that an address remains valid.  When this
period of time expires, the address becomes invalid and
unusable. The valid lifetime must be greater than or equal
to the preferred lifetime.
client-policy
 
    client-policy - Adds DHCP policy information to a client object

  Synopsis
 
    client-policy  <client-name> delete 
    client-policy  <client-name> set  <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    client-policy  <client-name> get  <attribute>
    
    client-policy  <client-name> disable  <attribute>
    client-policy  <client-name> enable  <attribute>
    client-policy  <client-name> show 
    
    client-policy  <client-name> setLeaseTime  <time-val>
    client-policy  <client-name> getLeaseTime 
    
    client-policy  <client-name> setOption  <opt-name | id> <value>
    client-policy  <client-name> getOption  <opt-name | id>
    client-policy  <client-name> unsetOption  <opt-name | id> 
    client-policy  <client-name> listOptions 

    client-policy  <client-name> setV6Option  <opt-name | id> <value>
    client-policy  <client-name> getV6Option  <opt-name | id>
    client-policy  <client-name> unsetV6Option  <opt-name | id> 
    client-policy  <client-name> listV6Options 

    client-policy  <client-name> 
        setVendorOption  <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name> <value>

    client-policy <client-name> 
        getVendorOption  <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>

    client-policy  <client-name> 
        unsetVendorOption  <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>

    client-policy  <client-name> listVendorOptions 

    client-policy  <client-name> 
        setV6VendorOption  <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name> <value>

    client-policy  <client-name> 
        getV6VendorOption  <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>

    client-policy  <client-name> 
        unsetV6VendorOption  <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>

    client-policy  <client-name> listV6VendorOptions 

  Description
 
    The client-policy command configures embedded policies for clients. 
    Each client can contain option data in its embedded policy and might
    refer to a named policy with more option data?for example, a router
    IP address. Network Registrar implicitly creates and deletes an 
    embedded client policy when you create or delete the corresponding 
    client. You manipulate the client policy using the name of the client
    to which the embedded policy is attached.

    client-policy  <client-name> setOption  <opt-name | id> <value>  
       Sets individual option values. When you set an
       option value the DHCP server replaces any existing value or
       creates a new one as needed for the given option name.
   
    client-policy <client-name> unsetOption <opt-name | id>
       Unsets option values.

    client-policy <client-name> getOption <opt-name | id>
       Displays option values for the specified client.     
   
    client-policy <client-name> setLeaseTime
       Sets lease time values for the specified client.

     client-policy <client-name> getLeaseTime
       Displays the lease time value.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    policy, scope-policy, client-class-policy
 
  Attributes
 
 affinity-period time
 
Associates a lease in the AVAILABLE state with the client that
last held the lease. If the client requests a lease during the
affinity period, it is granted the same lease; that is, unless
renewals are prohibited, then it is explicitly not given the lease.
Because of the vast IPv6 address space and depending on the address
generation technique, it could be millions of years before an
address ever needs reassignment to a different client, and there
is no reason to hold on to this information for that long.
To prohibit renewals enable either the inhibit-all-renews attribute
or the inhibit-renews-at-reboot attribute.
 allow-client-a-record-update bool default = disabled
 
Determines if a client is allowed to update A records.
If the client sets the flags in the FQDN option to indicate that
it wants to do the A record update in the request, and if this
value is TRUE, the server allows the client to do the A record
update; otherwise, based on other server configurations, the server
does the A record update.
 allow-dual-zone-dns-update bool default = disabled
 
Enables DHCP clients to perform DNS updates into two DNS zones.
To support these clients, you can configure the DHCP server to
allow the client to perform an update, but also to perform a DNS
update on the client's behalf.
 allow-lease-time-override bool default = disabled
 
Gives the server control over the lease period.  Although a client
can request a specific lease time, the server need not honor the
request if this attribute is set to false (the default).
Even if set to true, clients can request only lease times that are
shorter than those configured for the server.
 allow-non-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request non-temporary
(IA_NA) addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request non-temporary addresses.
 allow-rapid-commit bool default = false
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can use a Solicit with the
Rapid Commit option to obtain configuration information with
fewer messages. To permit this, make sure that a single DHCP
server is servicing clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked:
  - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
    FALSE, Rapid Commit is not allowed.
  - If at least one has it set to TRUE, Rapid Commit is allowed.
  - Otherwise, the remaining policies in the hierarchy are
    checked.
The default is not to allow clients to use Rapid Commit.
 allow-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request temporary (IA_TA)
addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request temporary addresses.
 default-prefix-length rangeint(0-128) default = 64
 
For delegation, specifies the default length of the delegated prefix,
if a router (client) does not explicitly request it.
The default length must always be less than or equal to the prefix
length of the prefix range.
 forward-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which forward zones to include in updates.
 forward-zone-name dname
 
Designates an optional forward zone for DNS updates.
 giaddr-as-server-id bool default = false
 
Enables the DHCP server to set the server-id option on a DHCPOFFER
and a DHCPACK to the giaddr of the incoming packet, instead of the
IP address of the server (the default action).
This causes all unicast renews to be sent to the relay agent instead
of directly to the DHCP server, and so renews arrive at the DHCP
server with option-82 information appended to the packet.
Some relay agents may not support this capability and, in some
complex configurations, the giaddr might not actually be an address
to which the DHCP client can send A unicast packet. In these cases,
the DHCP client cannot renew a lease, and must always perform a
rebind operation (where the DHCP client broadcasts a request instead
of sending a unicast to what it believes is the DHCP server).
 grace-period time default = 5m
 
Defines the length of time between the expiration of a lease
and the time it is made available for reassignment.
 inhibit-all-renews bool default = false
 
Causes the server to reject all renewal requests, forcing the client
to obtain a different address any time it contacts the DHCP server.
 inhibit-renews-at-reboot bool default = false
 
Permits clients to renew their leases, but the server forces
them to obtain new addresses each time they reboot.
 limitation-count int
 
Specifies the maximum number of clients with the same limitation-id
that are allowed to have currently active and valid leases.
 offer-timeout time default = 2m
 
Instructs the server to wait a specified amount of time when it
has offered a lease to a client, but the offer is not yet accepted.
At the end of the specified time interval, the server makes the
lease available again.
 packet-file-name string
 
Identifies the boot-file to use in the boot process of a client.
The server returns this file name in the 'file' field of its replies.
The packet-file-name cannot be longer than 128 characters.
 packet-server-name string
 
Identifies the host-name of the server to use in a client's boot
process. The server returns this file name in the 'sname' field
of its replies. The packet-server-name field cannot be longer
than 64 characters.
 packet-siaddr ipaddr
 
Identifies the IP address of the next server in the client boot
process. For example, this might be the address of a TFTP server
used by BOOTP clients. The server returns this address in the
'siaddr' field of its replies.
 permanent-leases bool default = disabled
 
Indicates whether leases using this policy are permanently granted
to requesting clients. If leases are permanently granted, the server
ignores the configured dhcp-lease-time option value and uses the
maximum lease time.
 preferred-lifetime time default = 1w
 
Assigns the default and maximum preferred lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative to
the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets the
length of time that the address is preferred; that is, its use is
unrestricted. When the preferred lifetime expires, the address
becomes deprecated and its use is restricted.
 reconfigure enumint(allow=1, disallow=2, require=3) default = allow
 
Controls DHCPv6 client reconfiguration support:
   1  allow        Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server will honor the
                   request (default).
   2  disallow     Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support but the server will not honor
                   the clients' request.
   3  require      Requires clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server drops client
                   Solicit and Request messages that do not
                   include a Reconfigure-Accept option.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked
as follows:
   - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
   disallow or require, that setting is used.
   - Otherwise, if at least one has it set to allow, Reconfigure
   is allowed.
   - If no prefix policies have this attribute set, the remaining
   policies in the hierarchy are checked.
 reconfigure-via-relay bool default = false
 
Controls whether the server should prefer unicasting or
relaying DHCPv6 Reconfigure messages.
If false (the default), the server prefers to unicast
Reconfigure messages if the client has one or more valid
statefully assigned addresses.
If true, the server prefers to send Reconfigure messages
via the relay agent unless no relay agent information is
available.
Note: When you use this attribute, consider that:
    -  In networks where the DCHPv6 server cannot communicate
       directly with its client devices?for example, where
       firewalls are in place?set this value to true.
    -  The DHCPv6 server does not use embedded and named
       policies configured on a client when it evaluates
       this attribute.
    -  The relay agent cannot be used if the Relay-Forw message
       came from a link-local address.
 reverse-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which reverse zones to include in a DNS update.
 server-lease-time time
 
Tells the server how long a lease is valid.  For more frequent
communication with a client, you might have the server consider
leases as leased for a longer period than the client considers them.
This also provides more lease-time stability. This value is not used
unless it is longer than the lease time in the dhcp-lease-time option
found through the normal traversal of policies.
 split-lease-times bool default = disabled
 
Specifies a value that the DHCP server might use internally to
affect lease times.
If enabled, the DHCP server still offers clients lease times that
reflect the configured lease-time option from the appropriate
policy; but the server bases its decisions regarding expiration
on the 'server-lease-time' value.
 unavailable-timeout time default = 24h
 
Permits the server to make a lease unavailable for the time specified
and then to return the lease to available state. If there is no value
configured in the system_default_policy, then the default is
86400 seconds (or 24 hours).
 use-client-id-for-reservations bool default = off
 
Controls how the server database checks for reserved IP
addresses.
By default, the server uses the MAC address of the DHCP client as the
key for its database lookup.  If this attribute is set to true
(enabled), then the server does the check for reserved
addresses using the DHCP client-id, which the client usually sends.
In cases where the DHCP client does not supply the client-id, the
server synthesizes it, and uses that value.
 v4-bootp-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all BOOTP clients.
 v4-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all DHCPv4 clients, whether
or not the client specifically asks for the option data.
 v6-reply-options optionid6
 
Lists the options that should be returned in any
replies to DHCPv6 clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked.
 valid-lifetime time default = 2w
 
Assigns the default and maximum valid lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative
to the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets
the length of time that an address remains valid.  When this
period of time expires, the address becomes invalid and
unusable. The valid lifetime must be greater than or equal
to the preferred lifetime.
cluster
 
    cluster - Configures the local and remote clusters

  Synopsis
 
    cluster <name> create <address> [<attribute>=<value>] 
    cluster <name> delete
    cluster list  
    cluster listnames
    cluster <name> show
    cluster <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    cluster <name> get <attribute>
    cluster <name> unset <attribute>

    cluster <name> enable <attribute>
    cluster <name> disable <attribute>

  Description
 
    The cluster command configures the specified local or remote 
    cluster, primarily providing connection and polling information;
    for example, IP address, fully qualified domain name, and HTTP port.  
    This information provides reference points for objects related to 
    the cluster.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 admin string
 
Sets the administrator identity to use to contact this cluster.
 atul-port rangeint(0-65535)
 
if > 0, a process on this cluster is listening for ATUL protocol
queries on this port number.
 cluster-id short unique,immutable
 
Identifies the local cluster that is the authoritative source
for this object.  This attribute is set as part of replica data
propagation.
 fqdn dname
 
Provides the fully qualified domain name of this server.
This attribute is not used to contact the cluster.
 http-port int
 
Specifies the http-port to use for non-SSL-secured connections
to the web server for this cluster.
 https-port int
 
Controls the https-port to use for SSL-secured connections to
the webserver for this cluster.  This port is only used if the
value of the use-https-port attribute is true.
 ipaddr ipaddr required,unique
 
Provides the IP address of this server.  This attribute,
rather than the fqdn is used to connect to the cluster.
 local-servers obj(CCMServer) transient
 
Lists the servers associated with this cluster. This transient
attribute makes it easier for clients that want to show a tree
of clusters with their child servers to get all the information
in a single request.
 name string required,unique
 
Names the cluster.
 password clrtxt transient
 
Sets the password that authenticates the identity stored
in the admin attribute.  Do not use this clear-text value
except within process memory.  Use the corresponding
password-secret instead.
 password-secret secret
 
Sets the identifier of the secret representing the password that
authenticates the identity stored in the admin attribute.
 poll-lease-hist-interval rangetime(0-1y)
 
Specifies how often to collect the lease history from the DHCP
server for this cluster. If set to 0, polling does not occur.
 poll-lease-hist-offset rangetime(0-24h)
 
Provides a fixed time of day for lease history polling.
This time is interpreted as a time of day offset, with 0 being
12 midnight, provided the polling interval is less than 24 hours,
and the offset value is less than the polling interval. If the offset
value is greater than the polling interval, or the interval is
greater than 24 hours, the offset will be ignored.
The scheduler for polling will ensure that the first polling event
occurs at the offset time. For example, if you set the interval to
4 hours and the offset to 2am, the polling would occur at 2am, 6am,
10am, 2pm, 6pm and 10pm.
 poll-lease-hist-retry rangeint(0-4)
 
Controls how often to retry if lease history polling fails.
 poll-replica-interval time default = 4h
 
Set the automatic replication interval; that is, how often
Network Registrar polls this server for replica data.
 poll-replica-offset time default = 4h
 
Sets a fixed time of day for replica polling.
This time is interpreted as a time of day offset, with 0 being
12 midnight, provided that:
    the polling interval is less than 24 hours, and
    the offset value is less than the polling interval.
If the offset value is greater than the polling interval, or
the interval is greater than 24 hours, the offset is ignored.
The scheduler for polling ensures that the first polling event
occurs at the offset time. For example, if you set the interval
to 4 hours and the offset to 2am, the polling would occur at
2am, 6am,  10am, 2pm, 6pm and 10pm.
 poll-subnet-util-interval rangetime(0-1y)
 
Specifies how often to collect subnet utilization data from
the DHCP server for this cluster. If set to 0, polling does
not occur.
 poll-subnet-util-offset rangetime(0-24h)
 
Provides a fixed time of day for subnet utilization polling.
This time is interpreted as a time of day offset, with 0 being
12 midnight, provided the polling interval is less than 24 hours,
and the offset value is less than the polling interval. If the offset
value is greater than the polling interval, or the interval is
greater than 24 hours, the offset will be ignored.
The scheduler for polling will ensure that the first polling event
occurs at the offset time. For example, if you set the interval to
4 hours and the offset to 2am, the polling would occur at 2am, 6am,
10am, 2pm, 6pm and 10pm.
 poll-subnet-util-retry rangeint(0-4)
 
Controls how often to retry if subnet utilization polling fails.
 product-version pcv
 
The product version number of the cluster in major, minor, rev form.
This value is updated when the cluster is resynchronized.
 remote-id short
 
Sets the ID on the remote cluster that refers back to the
local cluster. If there are two cluster objects on two servers
that share a secret and refer to each other, then the local ID =
the remote-id, the local remote ID = the remote ID, and the value
of the local shared secret = the value the remote shared secret.
 replication-initialized bool default = false
 
Indicates whether data replication has already been initialized
on this cluster.
 restore-state enumshort default = active, transient
 
Indicates whether the cluster has been deactivated or is in the
process of being restored from the replica db.
 scp-port int
 
Controls the port number used for SCP communications.
 scp-read-timeout time default = 20m
 
The time limit for how long we should wait for data when
reading an SCP message from this cluster.
 shared-secret secret
 
Specifies the identifier for the secret shared between the
server storing this object and the cluster it represents.
This shared secret is used to generate single-sign-on
authentication tokens.
 use-https-port bool default = false
 
Controls whether the https-port is used to make single sign-on
connections to the cluster.  If the value is false, or the
https-port attribute is not set, then the http-port is used.
 use-ssl enumstr(disabled=1, optional=2, required=3) default = optional
 
What security mode should we use when connecting to this cluster.
If optional, and we have a security library installed, we will
try to secure the connection.  If required, we will not make
the connection unless we can secure the connection (this requires
the security library to be installed).  If none, we will not
try to secure the connection.
dhcp
 
    dhcp - Configures and controls the DHCP server

  Synopsis
 
    dhcp disable <attribute>
    dhcp enable <attribute>
    
    dhcp get <attribute>
    dhcp set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    dhcp unset <attribute>
    dhcp show

    dhcp getStats [[all | server [,] failover [,] dhcpv6] [total | sample]]
    dhcp resetStats
    dhcp getScopeCount [FailoverPair <name> | vpn <name> | all]
    dhcp getPrefixCount [vpn <name> |all]

    dhcp attachExtension <extension-point> <extension-name> [sequence number]
    dhcp detachExtension <extension-point> [sequence number]
    dhcp listExtensions

    dhcp setPartnerDown <partner-server-name> [<date>]
    dhcp getRelatedServers [column-separator=<string>]

    dhcp updateSms [all]
    dhcp serverLogs show
    dhcp serverLogs nlogs=<nlogs> logsize=<logsize>

    dhcp limitationList <ipaddr> [<limitation-id>] show

  Description
 
    The dhcp command lets you configure the DHCP server in a cluster. 
 
     dhcp getStats [[all | server [,] failover [,] dhcpv6] [total | sample]]
     dhcp resetStats
       The getStats command retrieves statistics from a running DHCP
       server. You can supply one or more specific categories of 
       statistics counters, or the keyword all to retrieve all supported
       categories. If collection of sample counters is enabled in the 
       server, you can retrieve the most recent sample counters instead
       of the running totals by specifying sample after the categories. 
       The resetStats command resets the running totals counters.

    dhcp attachExtension <extension-point> <extension-name> [sequence number]
    dhcp detachExtension <extension-point> [sequence number]
    dhcp listExtensions
       Use the commands attachExtension, detachExtension,
       and listExtensions to configure the extensions points in the 
       server. 
       You can associate multiple extensions with each extension
       point, and each executes in the order specified by the sequence 
       number used when the attachment was made.  If no sequence number
       is used with attachExtension and detachExtension, it defaults 
       to 1.  If multiple extensions are configured for a given point, 
       listExtensions shows the sequence numbers associated with each.  
       Sequence numbers must be in the range 1-32.

       The available extension points are:

       The attachExtension command sets the specified extension point (and
       optional sequence position) to call the named extension.  If the 
       extension point is already configured (for a given sequence position)
       to call an extension, Network Registrar overwrites it with the new
       value.
    
       The detachExtension command removes any extension configuration from
       the specified extension point and sequence number.
    
       The listExtensions command shows the current configurations for
       each extension point.
    
       You can put the DHCP server into import mode by enabling the
       import-mode feature and then restarting the server. You take
       the server out of import-mode by disabling the feature and restarting
       the server. You can use import mode to exclude all DHCP lease
       requests except for the specially tagged ones that come from the
       CLI during lease import (see the import command).


    dhcp setPartnerDown <partner-server-name> [<date>]
       The dhcp setPartnerDown command notifies the DHCP server that one of
       its safe failover partner servers is down.  The date specified
       represents a time equal to or later than the last known time the
       partner server could have been operational.  If no date is specified,
       the current time is used.  The time value should be entered using
       the local time of the nrcmd process.  Formats for the date are:

       -<num><value>
          where <num> is a decimal number and <value> is one of 's', 'm',
          'h', 'd', 'w', in which 's' is seconds, 'm' is minutes, 'h' is
          hours, 'd' is days and 'w' is weeks.
 
       <month> <day> <hour>:<minute>[:<second>] <year>
          where <month> is the name or first three letters of the name of
          the month, <hour> is the hour on a 24- hour clock, and <year> is
          the fully-specified year or a two-digit representation in which
          98 = 1998, 99 = 1999 and all other two digit values XX = 20XX.

    dhcp getRelatedServers [column-separator=<string>]
       The dhcp getRelatedServers command displays a table with the following
       information for each associated safe failover, DNS or LDAP server:

          Type
             Main, Backup, DNS or LDAP

          Name
             DNS host name

          Address
             IP Address in dotted octet format

          Communications
             OK or INTERRUPTED

          Requests
             Number of outstanding requests

          <cluster-name> State
             Failover state of this server

          Partner State
             Failover state of partner

    
    dhcp updateSms [all]
        The dhcp updateSms command initiates SMS processing. To send all
        leases to SMS, use the argument all; otherwise, only the new leases
        activated since the last time the command ran successfully are sent.
        To run this command, turn on sms-network-discovery and set 
        sms-library-path. The command returns an error if sms-network-discovery is 
        not turned on or if it is unable to load SMS library or if the optional
        argument string is invalid, otherwise it returns success to indicate SMS 
        processing started successfully.
 
    
    dhcp serverLogs show
       The serverLogs show command displays the number of log files and the 
       maximum size for each file.
    
        The serverLogs command allows setting the two server logging parameters,
        nlogs and logsize.  Either or both may be specified in the command, and
        changes will only occur to the one(s) specified.  When setting logsize,
        the value may be suffixed with K or M to signify units of thousands or
        millions.  Note that in order for these changes to take effect you must
        save the changes and restart the server Agent. 
    
        dhcp serverLogs nlogs=6 logsize=500K
        dhcp serverLogs logsize=5M
    
       
    dhcp getScopeCount [FailoverPair <name> | vpn <name> | all]
       The getScopeCount command displays the scopes, networks, and VPNs
       for the current VPN, all VPNs, a specific VPN, or a failover pair.
       The getPrefixCount command displays the prefixes, links, and VPNs
       for the current VPN, all VPNs, or a specific VPN.

       If the ip-history feature is enabled, you should trim
       records from the history database  to reclaim disk space. 
       Each history record has a binding end time. Periodically,
       the DHCP server examines the lease history records, and deletes
       any records for bindings which ended at least ip-history-max-age
       in the past.

    dhcp limitationList <ipaddr> [<limitation-id>] show
       Lists DHCP clients and leases that are associated by a common 
       limitation-id for the client (see the client command). Use this
	 command when a DHCP client is denied service because the number of
       existing clients with a common limitation-id equals the allowed
       limitation-count, as set for a policy (see the policy command).
       It then determines which existing clients with that limitation-id 
       have active leases.
 
       If you specify both the ipaddr and limitation-id arguments, the ipaddr 
       determines the network in which to search, and does not have to be an 
       actual IP address that the DHCP server could allocate. In this case, the
       limitation-id must be a blob in nn:nn:nn format (such as 01:02:03) or a 
       string in string format. If you omit the limitation-id, the ipaddr must
       be the IP address of a currently active lease, and the limitation-id used 
       for the command will be the one associated with that lease.     

       If you want to determine the existing clients and leases using up
       the limitation-count for a particular limitation-id because the following
       message appeared in the DHCP server log:
    
   	   Warning Server 0 05646 Could not add Client MAC: 
	   '1,6,01:02:03:04:0c:03'  with limitation-id: 01:02:03
	   using Lease: 10.0.0.23, already 3 Clients with that id.  
	   No over-limit client class specified! Dropping packet!

       Use the lease specified in "...  using Lease 10.0.0.23" as
       the <ipaddr>, and the limitation-id specified in "...  with
       limitation-id 01:02:03" as the <limitation-id>:

   	   nrcmd> dhcp limitationList 10.0.0.23 01:02:03 show

       The result would be a list of 3 leases with the client's MAC
       address, the client last transaction time, and the client's host name.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    server
 
  Attributes
 
 activity-summary-interval time default = 5m
 
Sets the time that elapses between activity summary log
messages. You must also enable the activity-summary setting
in log-settings.
 addr-blocks-default-selection-tags string
 
Associates a default selection tag (or list of tags) with incoming
subnet-allocation requests that do not contain any subnet name
data.
 addr-blocks-use-client-affinity bool default = true
 
Controls whether the DHCP server allocates subnets to clients
using address-blocks that the clients have already used.
If you set this attribute to false, the server allocates subnets
from any suitable block (based on other selection data in client
messages.
 addr-blocks-use-lan-segments bool default = false
 
Controls whether DHCP subnet-allocation uses the lan-segment
attribute when it is configured on address-blocks.
 addr-blocks-use-selection-tags bool default = true
 
Controls whether the server compares subnet name data on an
incoming subnet-allocation request with the selection tag of each
address-block.  A block is only considered if the two match.
 atul-port rangeint(1-65535) default = 7543
 
If configured, enables the DHCP server to listen for incoming
ATUL queries on this UDP port.
 atul-support bool default = off
 
Enables DHCP support for the ATUL query protocol. The atul-port
parameter configures the port number to use to listen for
ATUL queries.
 client-cache-count int default = 1000
 
Specifies the maximum number of clients in the client cache.
The DHCP server allocates the amount at startup and frees
it at shutdown. If you set the value to 0, you disable client
caching and the server must use persistent storage to process a
DHCPREQUEST.
 client-cache-ttl time default = 10s
 
Sets the maximum time-to-live in seconds for a client in
cache. The DHCP server discards the entries in memory after
this period.
 client-class bool default = disabled
 
Controls how the DHCP server uses the client and client-class
configuration objects to affect request processing. Default is
false (disabled).
 client-class-lookup-id expr
 
Specifies the expression used to determine a client-class solely
on data contained in an incoming DHCP client request.
The expression must return a string with the name of a currently
configured client-class, otherwise it must return the string
''. Any return that is not a string containing the name
of a currently configured client-class or '' is considered
an error.
 cnr-5-0-upgraded date
 
Indicates whether the DHCP server was upgraded from 3.5 to 5.0.
Read-only.
 collect-addr-util-duration rangetime(0-3d) default = 0
 
Sets the maximum period, in hours, that the DHCP server
maintains address utilization data.
To disable collecting address utilization data, unset
this attribute or give it a value of 0.
Use this attribute, with the collect-addr-util-interval
attribute, to determine the frequency that the server
uses to take snapshots of the data and to set the length of
time the DHCP server maintains the data. Together these attributes
have an impact on memory usage because each snapshot of data is
68 bytes.
For example, if you have 10 scopes and you set
collect-addr-util-duration is set to 24h and
collect-addr-util-interval to 1h, memory used by the DHCP
server to maintain address utilization data is 24 times 68 bytes
for each scope; that is, 10x24x68 or 16KB.
 collect-addr-util-interval rangetime(5m-24h) default = 15m
 
Sets the frequency, in minutes or hours, that the DHCP
server uses to take snapshot views of address utilization data.
If collect-addr-util-duration is not configured, or set
to 0, the DHCP server ignores the collect-addr-util-interval.
Use this attribute, with the collect-addr-util-duration
attribute, to determine the frequency that the server uses to
take snapshots of the data and the length of time the DHCP server
maintains the data. Together these attributes affect memory
usage because each snapshot of data is 68 bytes.
For example, if you have 10 scopes and you set
collect-addr-util-duration to 24h and collect-addr-util-interval
to 1h, memory used by the DHCP erver to maintain address
utilization data is 24 times 68 bytesfor each scope; that is,
10x24x68 or 16KB.
 collect-performance-statistics bool default = false
 
Controls whether the DHCP server collects statistics for
performance monitoring.
 collect-sample-counters bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether the DHCP server collects activity statistics
counters independently of the log-settings attribute flag.
If false, this attribute is disabled.
If true, this attribute enables collecting activity
statistics.
Note: These activity statistics counters are also enabled,
if you enable 'activity-summary'
logging is enabled (see 'log-settings').
 default-free-address-config nameref(AddrTrapConfig)
 
Specifies the default SNMP free-address trap configuration object
for the server. All scopes that are not individually configured
use this default free-address value.
 defer-lease-extensions bool default = true
 
Determines whether the DHCP server can defer extending leases
to their full lease expiration time.
If enabled (true), the DHCP server can defer extending the lease
expiration time. Rather than give the client the full configured
lease time, the server instead gives the client the remaining 
time on the existing lease, improving server performance and 
throughput. The DHCP server typically defers extending the lease
if the client renews early; that is, before the client's lease 
renewal time (T1) elapses.
If enabled, the DHCP server can save committing the lease to 
disk and updating its failover partner with an extended lease 
expiration time.
If disabled, the DHCP server always attempts to extend the 
lease expiration time. However, there may be conditions 
that prevent the server from extending the lease for the full 
configured lease time; for example, failover protocol restrictions.
 delete-orphaned-leases bool default = false
 
Controls how the DHCP server handles orphaned leases.
Default is false (disabled).
A lease is orphaned if:
--It does not match a range or reservation in a configured scope, or
--If it appears in the lease state database with a VPN ID that does
  not match a VPN in the database.
If this is attribute is true, the server deletes orphaned leases
when the server next reloads. This ensures that the lease state
database has no old, unconfigured leases in it, but it also may
cause the total loss of lease state information due to a mistake
in configuration.
If this attribute is false, the server ignores the entries in
the lease state database. If the lease was orphaned due to a
configuration mistake, then when you when you correct the
mistake, the DHCP server can use the lease.
Whether true or false, the server cannot use the lease.
 delete-orphaned-subnets bool default = false
 
Controls how the DHCP server handles information about an
orphaned subnet; that is, whether it keeps the entry in its
database or deletes it. Default is false (disable).
As the DHCP server starts up, it tries to locate the
parent VPN and DHCP address block of each DHCP subnet. If a
subnet refers to a VPN that is no longer configured, or if
the server cannot locate a parent DHCP address block that
contains the subnet, the server uses this attribute
to decide.
 dns-timeout int default = 60000, required
 
Controls the number of milliseconds that the DHCP server waits
for a response before retrying dynamic DNS requests.
 docsis-version-id-missing string
 
Sets the string value (maximum 255 characters) to substitute
for the %@docsis-vers% variable in the policy command boot-
file attribute. No default.
DOCSIS devices must provide their version id
(for example, "docsis1.0") in the vendor-class-id option.
The server substitutes the DOCSIS version id as the
value of the boot-file option. If the vendor
class-id option is missing, or is not syntactically correct,
the server uses the docsis-version-id-missing attribute
for the boot-file option.
This substitution occurs if the DHCP request packet does not
contain a vendor-class-id option or the option does not contain
a DOCSIS version ID.
 drop-old-packets int default = 4
 
Sets the time, in seconds, that a packet can age and still be
processed.
The server attempts to read as many packets as possible from
the UDP input queue, and then process them quickly.  If the
server is very busy, it can sometimes become flooded with
packets. This could delay processing some packets.
In the DHCP protocol, however, some clients automatically
retry packets that have not been processed in a few seconds
--so allowing the server to process packets that are
older than a small number of seconds.  This can increase
congestion without providing any real value for the clients.
The drop-old-packets parameter is the number of seconds that
a packet can age and still be processed by the DHCP server.
If a packet is more than the value of drop-old-packets old
when processed by the DHCP server, the server drops the packet.
 drop-packet-on-extension-failure bool default = enabled
 
Causes the server to drop a packet (if possible) when it
encounters an extension failure. Default is true (enable).
 enhanced-sample-counters bool default = enabled
 
Enables collection of enhanced statistics counters by the DHCP
server, which are then available with DHCP server statistics.
The enhanced counters provide more detailed information, but
cost the server some performance to maintain. Currently, this
enables collecting milliseconds ACK/Reply latencies (instead
of second based) and scope aggregation data (even if not
explicitly configured).
 equal-priority-most-available bool default = disabled
 
Controls address allocation among scopes in the same network.
This attribute determines how the DHCP server allocates an
address to a new client when multiple scopes have the same
nonzero allocation priority. Default is false (disable).
If disabled, the server uses the scope with the fewest available
addresses to allocate an address to a new client (if not in a
limitation list).
If enabled, the server uses the scope with the most available
addresses to allocate an address to a new client
(if not in a limitation list).
In either case, if a client is in a limitation list,
among those scopes of the same priority, the one that contains
other clients in the same list is always used.
 expression-configuration-trace-level int default = 2
 
Sets the trace level to use when configuring DHCP expressions.
Default is 2 (failure retry).
The range is from 0 through 6, with 0 being the lowest amount
of tracing and 6 the highest:
   0  No additional tracing
   1  No additional tracing
   2  Failure retry
   3  Function definitions
   4  Function arguments
   5  Variable lookups and literal details
   6  Everything
Setting a high expression-configuration-trace-level imposes no
performance penalty, since expressions are configured only
when you restart the server.
 expression-trace-level int default = 2
 
Sets the trace level to use when executing DHCP expressions.
ptional, default 2.
The range is from 0 through 6, with 0 being no tracing and 6 the
highest amount of tracing:
0-No tracing
1-Failures, including those protected by (try ...)
2-Total failure retries (with trace level = 6 for retry)
3-Function calls and returns
4-Function arguments evaluated
5-Print function arguments
6-Datatype conversions (everything)
Setting this attribute to any level other than 0, 1, or 2
imposes a considerable performance penalty.
The setting of 1 only traces when there is a failure in an
expression. The default setting of 2 re-executes
evaluating an expression that fails at the outermost level
with the expression-trace-level=10 for the duration of the
re-execution, to provide maximum debugging assistance.
 extension-trace-level int default = 0
 
Sets the value of the extension trace level for every
request object. Default is 0.
The range is from 0 through 3, with 0 being very little tracing
and 3 the highest amount of tracing.
 failover-bulking bool default = true
 
With failover enabled, controls whether a failover BIND update
(BNDUPD) contains multiple lease state updates. Default true
(enable).
This attribute affects only the lease state updates that a DHCP
client generates.
 failover-poll-interval time default = 15s
 
With failover enabled, controls the space of time, in seconds,
that elapses between polls of failover partners to confirm
network connectivity. Default is 15s.
 failover-poll-timeout time default = 60s
 
With failover enabled, defines the space of time, in seconds,
after which a poll between partners times out. Default is 60s.
This attribute signals that the partners cannot communicate
due to lost network connectivity. The partners then change their
operational states appropriately.
 failover-recover date default = none
 
With failover enabled, sets the time at which the server
is initialized and goes into RECOVER state. No default.
If failover-recover is non-zero, and the server has no
record of a previous failover state in its stable storage,
then the server assumes that it was previously operational
but lost all of its stable storage.
The time value in the failover-recover parameter represents
a time equal to or later than the last known time the server
could have been operational.  The server attempts to refresh
its information from its failover partner by entering RECOVER
state and requesting a complete update of all binding
information.
Time values for this attribute can be in hours (for example,
-2h two hours ago) or month day hour:minute[:second] year.
Use the local time of the nrcmd process.
Formats for the date are:
-
  where  is a decimal number and  is one of 's', 'm',
  'h', 'd', 'w', in which 's' is seconds, 'm' is minutes, 'h' is
  hours, 'd' is days and 'w' is weeks.
  :[:] 
  where  is the name or first three letters of the name of
  the month,  is the hour on a 24- hour clock, and  is
  the fully-specified year or a two-digit representation in which
  98 = 1998, 99 = 1999 and all other two digit values XX = 20XX.
 force-dns-updates bool default = false
 
Controls whether the DHCP server retries a DNS update
whenever a client renews its lease, even if it appears
to the server that the update was already completed
successfully. Default is false (disable).
This attribute uses one of the following values:
   forward DnsUpdateConfig object (if configured)
   reverse DnsUpdateConfig object (if configured)
   the default (or where appropriate the server configured
   value or default value).
 get-subnet-mask-from-policy bool default = false
 
Controls whether the DHCP server searches all relevant
policies for a subnet mask option to construct a response
to a client. Default is false (disable).
Normally, the DHCP server retains the subnet mask configured
in the scope containing the base being granted to the DHCP
client.
 ha-dns-failover-timeout rangeint(30-120) default = 30
 
Sets the maximum time period in seconds that the DHCP server
waits for replies from a DNS server before failing over to its
partner. Default is 30s.
To use this attribute, first configure your DHCP server to
perform HA DNS updates.
If DHCP is configured for HA-DNS updates, dns-timeout parameters
are set to fit max-dns-retries within ha-dns-failover-timeout.
For example, with a default ha-dns-failover-timeout value of
30 seconds and and max-dns-retries of 3, dns-timeout is set to
6 seconds, so that after 3 retry attempts and an
ha-dns-failover-timeout, the DHCP server failovers. The DHCP
server uses a minimum limit value for a dns-timeout of 2 seconds
and dns-retries of 1.
 hardware-unicast bool default = enabled
 
Controls whether the DHCP server sends unicast rather
than broadcast responses when a client indicates that it can
accept a unicast.
Note: This attribute is only available on these
operating systems: Solaris, Windows 2000, and Windows NT.
 ignore-cisco-options string
 
Skips processing the Cisco-specific DHCP options specified
by name in the comma-separated list.  No default.
Allowable option names are vpn-id (185), cisco-vpn-id (221),
and subnet-alloc (220). Use this attribute only if
clients use the options for other purposes.
 ignore-icmp-errors bool default = enabled
 
Controls how the DHCP server handles ICMP ECHO (ping-before-
offer) requests. Default is true (enable).
If you enable this attribute and configure the DHCP server to
to send ICMP ECHO requests, the server makes unavailable any
address for which it receives an ECHO reply within its
configured timeout period.
If you disable this attribute, the DHCP server also treats
ICMP DEST_UNREACHABLE and TTL_EXPIRED error messages that it
receives after sending ICMP ECHO requests as grounds for making
an address unavailable.
 ignore-requests-for-other-servers bool
 
Controls whether to prevent the normal DHCP server
response to client requests for other servers.  No
default.
Normally, if the DHCP server detects a client requesting a lease
from another server for an address that this server is
configured to control, it sets the lease to unavailable. Some
clients, however, might send request packets with bad server ID
options--rather than packets actually directed to other
servers--that the server wrongly interprets as an unavailable
address. Enabling this attribute prevents this.
 import-mode bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether the DHCP server recognizes only packets
generated from the import leases command, ignoring all
others. Default is false (disable).
Use this attribute to update your DHCP server, preventing
clients from receiving addresses during this period.
 inhibit-busy-optimization bool default = false
 
Controls whether the server uses optimization to recover from
periods of congestion. Default false (disable).
By default, the DHCP server determines that it is heavily loaded
when the number of request packets reaches two-thirds of the
total allocated. The server logs a message and attempts to
recover from the congestion by performing several optimizations.
For example, it relaxes the requirement to keep the client?s
last transaction time updated to the granularity specified by
the last-transaction-time-granularity attribute.
When the number of request packets drops to one-third of the
total allocated, the server logs a message and returns to
normal operation. If you enable the inhibit-busy-optimization
attribute, the server does not use the optimizations or log the
messages when it gets congested.
 initial-environment-dictionary string
 
Contains attribute-value pairs that initialize all environment
dictionaries used within the DHCP server.  Use these attribute-value
pairs to configure extensions or expressions without having to
re-write the executable code in the extension or expression.
The string must have the format:
"attribute1=value1,attribute2=value2, ... ,attributen=valuen"
 ip-history bool default = disabled
 
Enables the lease history database. Default is false (disable).
 ip-history-detail bool default = false
 
Controls whether to record detailed data for the IP
history database. Default is false (disable).
 ip-history-max-age time default = 4w
 
If ip-history is enabled, determines how long IP records are
kept in the database. Default is 4w.
The server accumulates database records over time as lease
bindings change. The ip-history-max-age attribute establishes
a limit on the age of thehistory records kept in the database.
The server periodically examines the lease history records,
establishes an age threshold based on this parameter, and
deletes any records that represent bindings that end before
the threshold. The history records are trimmed by default once
a day, at 3:00 a.m. local time.
 last-transaction-time-granularity time default = 60s
 
Sets the time, in seconds, to guarantee that the last
transaction time is accurate. Default is 60s.
Do not set this lower than the default of 60 seconds. For
optimal performance, set it to a value that is greater than half
of your lease interval.
By default the server maintains an accurate record of the time
when it last interacted with a DHCP client concerning a given
lease.  This setting provides a control on how accurate that time
is guaranteed to be.  A setting of 300 seconds, for instance,
would allow the server to avoid database updates whose sole
purpose is to update a last transaction time that is less than 5
minutes in the past.
 ldap-mode enumint(round-robin=1, failover=2)
 
Determines the preference for using LDAP servers if
multiple LDAP servers are configured. No default.
This attribute has two possible values:
   1  round-robin-The DHCP server ignores LDAP server
      preferences. It treats all LDAP servers (those configured
      to handle client queries and those configured to accept
      lease-state updates) equally.
   2  failover-The DHCP server uses the active LDAP server with
      the lowest preference. If the preferred server loses its
      connection or fails, the DHCP server uses the next LDAP
      server in preference order. The DHCP server uses servers
      with equal preference in round-robin order.
 log-settings flags(default=1, incoming-packets=2, missing-options=3, incoming-packet-detail=4, outgoing-packet-detail=5, unknown-criteria=6, dns-update-detail=7, client-detail=8, client-criteria-processing=9, failover-detail=10, ldap-query-detail=11, ldap-update-detail=12, ldap-create-detail=13, leasequery=14, dropped-waiting-packets=15, no-success-messages=16, no-dropped-dhcp-packets=17, no-dropped-bootp-packets=18, no-failover-activity=19, activity-summary=20, no-invalid-packets=21, no-reduce-logging-when-busy=22, no-timeouts=23, minimal-config-info=24, no-failover-conflict=25, atul-detail=26, v6-lease-detail=27) default = default,incoming-packets,missing-options
 
Determines which events to log in the log files. Default flags are
default, incoming-packets, and missing-options.
Logging additional detail about events can help analyze a problem.
However, leaving detailed logging enabled for a long period
can fill up the log files.
Possible flags are:
  default
    The default gives a low level of logging in several parts of
    the DHCP server.  If you unconfigure the default, even this
    logging will not appear.
  missing-options
    This setting (on by default) will cause a message to be logged
    whenever an option requested by a DHCP client has not been
    configured in a policy and therefore cannot be supplied by the
    DHCP server.
  incoming-packets
    This setting (on by default) will cause a single line message
    to be logged for every incoming packet.  This is especially
    useful when initially configuring a DHCP server or a BOOTP
    relay, in that an immediate positive indication exists that
    the DHCP server is receiving packets.
  incoming-packet-detail
    This setting will cause the contents of every DHCP packet
    received by the DHCP server to be interpreted in a human
    readable way and printed in the log file.  This enables the
    built-in DHCP packet sniffer for input packets.  The log files
    will fill up (and turn over) very rapidly when this setting is
    enabled.  This setting also causes a significant performance
    impact on the DHCP server and should not be left enabled as a
    matter of course.
  outgoing-packet-detail
    This setting will cause the contents of every DHCP packet
    transmitted by the DHCP server to be interpreted in a human
    readable way and printed in the log file.  This enables the
    built-in DHCP packet sniffer for output packets.  The log files
    will fill up (and turn over) very rapidly when this setting is
    enabled.  This setting also causes a significant performance
    impact on the DHCP server and should not be left enabled as a
    matter of course.
  client-detail
    This setting will cause a single line to be logged at the
    conclusion of every client-class client lookup operation.  This
    line will show the composite of the data found for the client
    as well as the data that found in the client's client-class.
    It is useful when setting up a client-class configuration and
    for debugging problems in client-class processing.
  client-criteria-processing
    This setting will cause a log message to be output whenever a
    scope is examined to find an available lease or whenever a
    scope is examined to determine if a lease is still acceptable
    for a client who already has one.  It can be very useful when
    configuring or debugging client-class scope criteria
    processing.  It causes moderate amount of information to be
    logged and should not be left enabled as a matter of course.
  unknown-criteria
    This setting will cause a single line log message to appear
    whenever a client entry is found which specifies selection
    criteria that is not found in any scope appropriate for that
    client's current network location.
  dns-update-detail
    This setting causes the server to log a message as it sends
    each dns update and as it receives replies to update messages.
  ldap-query-detail
    This setting will cause log messages to appear whenever the
    dhcp server initiates a query to LDAP server, receives response
    and retrieves result or error messages.
  ldap-update-detail
    This setting will cause log messages to appear whenever the
    dhcp server initiates an update lease state to LDAP server,
    receives response and retrieves result or error messages.
  ldap-create-detail
    This setting will cause log messages to appear whenever the
    dhcp server initiates an lease state entry create to LDAP
    server, receives response and retrieves result or error
    messages.
  leasequery
    This setting will cause log messages to appear when leasequery
    packets are processed without internal errors and result in
    an ACK or a NAK.
  dropped-waiting-packets
    If the value of max-waiting-packets is non-zero packets may
    be dropped if the queue length for any IP address exceeds the
    value of max-waiting-packets.  If dropped-waiting-packets
    is set, the server will log a message whenever it drops a
    waiting packet from the queue for an IP address.
  no-success-messages
    This setting will cause the single line message that is
    normally logged for every successful outgoing DHCP response
    packet to not appear.  It affects logging only for successful
    outgoing DHCP response packets.
  no-dropped-dhcp-packets
    This setting will cause a single line message normally logged
    for every DHCP packet that is dropped due to DHCP
    configuration to not appear.  (See no-invalid-packets for
    messages associated with packets dropped because they are
    invalid.)
  no-dropped-bootp-packets
    This setting will cause the single line message normally
    logged for every BOOTP packet that is dropped to not appear.
  no-failover-activity
    This setting will cause normal activity and some warning
    messages logged for failover to not appear.  Serious error
    log messages will continue to appear independent of this
    log-setting.
  activity-summary
    This setting will cause a summary message to appear every 5
    minutes.  It is useful when many of the no-xxx log settings
    are enabled, to give some idea of the activity in the server
    without imposing the load required for a log message
    corresponding to each DHCP message.  The time period for
    these messages can be configured with the DHCP server
    property activity-summary-interval.
  no-invalid-packets
    This setting will cause a single line message normally logged
    for every DHCP packet that is dropped due being invalid to
    not appear.  (See no-dropped-dhcp-packets for messages
    associated with packets dropped due to DHCP server
    configuration.)
  no-reduce-logging-when-busy
    Normally, the DHCP server will reduce logging when it becomes
    very busy (i.e., when it has used over 2/3 of the available
    receive buffers (itself a configurable value)).  It will set
    no-success-messages, no-dropped-dhcp-packets,
    no-dropped-bootp-packets, no-failover-activity,
    no-invalid-packets, and clear everything else except
    activity-summary.  If no-reduce-logging-activity is set, then
    the server will not do this.  It will restore the previous
    settings when the server becomes unbusy (i.e., when it has
    used only 1/3 of the available receive buffers).
  no-timeouts
    This setting will cause messages associated with timeout
    of leases or offers not to appear in the log file.
  minimal-config-info
    This setting will reduce the number of configuration messages
    printed when the server starts or reloads.  In particular,
    it will not log a message for every scope.
  no-failover-conflict
    This setting will cause conflicts between failover partners
    to not be logged.
  atul-detail
    This setting causes the server to log messages when ATUL
    messages are received and processed.
  v6-lease-detail
    This setting causes the server to log individual messages
    regarding DHCPv6 leasing activity (in addition to or in
    place of a single message per client transaction depending
    on no-success-messages, or client timeout event depending on
    no-timeouts).
 mac-address-only bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether the DHCP server uses the client?s MAC
address as the only client identifier. The standard behavior,
as specified in RFC 2132, is to use the client-id option (if it
is present) as the unique client identifier. Default is false
(disable).
CAUTION: Use this attribute with care. When enabled, it
precludes a MAC address from getting multiple IP addresses per
network. It forces the server to use a Client-Identifier (CID)
created from the MAC address instead of the RFC described
client-id contained in the request. This can preclude newer
devices that take multiple IP addresses. Enabling, or later
disabling, this attribute can also have an operational impact.
Clients that originally obtain addresses through a client-id
cannot renew them once they are assigned attributes based on
a MAC address.
 map-radius-class enumint(none=0, map-as-tag=1, map-as-class=2, append-to-tags=3) default = 0
 
Controls how to map the radius attribute, if present,
in the client request relay-agent option:
   0  none             Ignores the radius class name default
   1  map-as-tag       Maps the radius class to selection-tags
   2  map-as-class     Maps the radius class  directly to a
                       client-class name
   3  append-to-tags   Appends the radius class to the
                       selection-tags
 map-radius-pool-name enumint(none=0, map-as-tag=1, map-as-class=2, append-to-tags=3) default = 0
 
Controls use of the radius framed-pool attribute, if present,
in a client relay-agent option.
   0  none             Ignores the framed-pool attribute
   1  map-as-tag       Maps the framed-pool attribute to
                       selection-tags
   2  map-as-class     Maps framed-pool attribute directly to a
                       client-class name
   3  append-to-tags   Appends the user-class-id to the
                       selection-tags
 map-user-class-id enumint(none=0, map-as-tag=1, map-as-class=2, append-to-tags=3) default = 0
 
Controls how the server uses the user-class-id option. Values are:
   0  none             Ignores the user class-id(default)
   1  map-as-tag       Maps the user-class-id to selection-tags
   2  map-as-class     Maps user-class-id directly to a
                       client-class name
   3  append-to-tags   Appends the user-class-id to the
                       selection-tags
 max-client-leases rangeint(1-65535) default = 50
 
Sets the maximum number of leases, regardless of state or whether
reserved or not, that the server can associate with a DHCPv6
client. A DHCPv6 lease is always associated with a client; if it
is not, it is deleted.
This setting is to prevent a client from using lots of leases
(such as by issuing many requests with different IAID values). It
is not intended to limit the number of active leases a client may
have.
While 1 can be configured as the minimum for backwards
compatibility, the server uses a minium of 2 to allow for a
client that usually only has a single lease to be renumbered or
moved to a different prefix on the link.
This limit is not applied when existing leases are loaded from
the lease state database during server start-up.
 max-dhcp-requests int default = 500, required
 
Controls the number of buffers that the DHCP server allocates
for receiving client requests.
When you enable failover, allocate at least 150 buffers. Up to
1500 buffers might be reasonable for high capacity
installations.
Caution: Increasing the number of buffers can degrade
performance. Cisco recommends using the default value
in most situations. When buffer size exceeds capacity, a burst
of DHCP activity can clog the server with requests that become
stale before they are processed. This increases the processing
load and might severely degrade performance as clients try to
obtain a new lease. A lower buffer setting throttles requests
and avoids wasted processing on requests that would otherwise be
stale.
When using LDAP client lookups, buffers should not exceed the
LDAP lookup queue size defined by the total number of LDAP
connections and the maximum number of requests allowed for each
connection. Set the LDAP queue size to match the LDAP server?s
capacity to service client lookups.
 max-dhcp-responses int default = 1000, required
 
Controls the number of buffers that the DHCP server allocates
for responses to client requests. The server ignores this
value if max-dhcp-requests is higher, or other configuration
options such as failover require that the value be set higher
than configured.
 max-dns-renaming-retries int default = 3, required
 
Controls the number of times that the DHCP server can attempt
adding a host into DNS, even if the DHCP server detects that the
hostname is already present in DNS.  The DHCP server attempts
to modify the hostname in order to resolve a conflict on each
failed update.
 max-dns-retries int default = 3, required
 
Controls the number of times that the DHCP server can try to
send dynamic updates to a DNS server.
 max-dns-ttl int default = 86400, required
 
Sets the time to live (TTL) ceiling, in seconds, for DNS records
added through dynamic updates. When the DHCP server adds a DNS
record, it uses a TTL of the minimum of either this ceiling or one
third the lease time.
 max-ping-packets int default = 500
 
Sets the number of buffers the server allocated for sending and
receiving ICMP ping messages. See the scope 'ping-clients'
command.
 max-waiting-packets int default = 6
 
Sets the maximum number of packets that can wait for a
particular IP address.
The server queues only the most recently received n packets
(of an address) for processing. If an additional packet
associated with that address arrives and n packets are already
queued, the server drops the oldest packet and queues the new
one. It also drops duplicate packets (whose XID, client ID, and
MAC address are the same as one already queued).
A value of 0 indicates that there is no maximum queue length,
and all packets are processed.
Dropped packets are logged if the log setting
dropped-waiting-packets is set. It is off by default.
 mcd-blobs-per-bulk-read rangeint(1-2500)
 
Determines the number of binary large objects (blobs) in a bulk
read. Default 256.  Range, 1 to 2500.
Use this attribute to tune DHCP start and reload times.
Generally, a higher value will result in faster server start and
reload time, at the cost of using more memory.
 min-dns-ttl time default = 10m
 
Minimum value for time to live (TTL) in seconds, for DNS records
added through dynamic updates.  When the DHCP server adds a DNS
record, the TTL value will be min-dns-ttl if one third the lease
time is less than the min-dns-ttl value.
 multicast-addresses ip6addr default = ff02::1:2,ff05::1:3
 
Controls the default multicast addresses that are enabled
on interfaces. The address ff02::1:2 is required if any
DHCPv6 clients are directly connected to the link associated
with an interface. The address ff05::1:3 is the default
multicast address that relay agents use to relay DHCPv6
requests.
 one-lease-per-client enumint(disabled=0, last-client-preferred=1, first-client-preferred=2) default = disabled
 
Controls whether the DHCP server releases other leases a client
might have on other LAN segments on this server.
   0   disabled
   1   last-client-preferred
   2   first-client-preferred
Within one LAN segment, the DHCP server never allocates more
than one DHCPv4 address to a single client. Across multiple
independent network LAN segments, however, a single client
might have one address allocated on several networks.
In an enterprise environment this might happen when a laptop
user travels from building to building, causing no particular
problems. In a service provider context, this might happen when
an unapproved user attempts to clone the MAC address of a
legitimate subscriber, causing a theft of service.
The one-lease-per-client feature limits a single client to one
lease over all of the networks configured on the DHCP server.
This limit only affects a client's ability to have concurrent
leases to different IP addresses on more than one network at
a time on the DHCP server.
In the last-client-preferred approach, the client with the most
recent lease is given preference, and any other leases held by
the same client are released.
In the first-client-preferred approach, the first lease that a
particular client receives from the DHCP server is the only
lease that client is allowed.  In the event that the client
moves, the first lease must be made available (perhaps by a
force-available command or by letting it expire) before the
client is allowed to lease another IP address on a different
network.
Caution: Use the first-client-preferred approach with great
care, since manual intervention might be required to ensure
proper operation.
Both forms of one-lease-per-client require additional bookkeeping
overhead beyond that normally done in the DHCP server.
 priority-address-allocation bool default = disabled
 
Controls address allocation among scopes in the same network and
within an individual scope as well.
When enabled, any scope without an explicit setting for
allocation-priority is configured with an allocation-priority
equal to the network number of the scope.  Similarly, any scope
without an explicit setting for allocate-first-available
is considered enabled.
Explicit settings for either of these scope attributes override
the priority-address-allocation set for that scope.
This attribute gives the administrator a way to change address
allocation in a server wide manner without having to separately
configure each scope.
 return-client-fqdn-if-asked bool default = true
 
Controls whether the system returns the client FQDN option
in the outgoing packet to the client if the incoming packet
contains the FQDN option. Default false (disable).
If true (enable), the option flags are always set to 0x3
and the RCODE1 and RCODE2 to 255. Any string contained in the
incoming packet is returned, even if the use-client-fqdn
attribute is disabled and regardless of the actual FQDN.
 save-vendor-class-id bool default = false
 
Determines whether to store the vendor=class-id, as
furnished in a dhcp request option 60, as part of the lease
record in either ldap, mcd or both.
 skip-client-lookup bool default = false
 
Determines whether the DHCP server looks up the client entry
in the database to do client-class processing. This value
can be examined as well as changed in a script at the
pre-client-lookup extension point. Default false
(disable).
If true, the server skips the client entry.
 sms-lease-interval int default = 1100
 
Sets the amount of time, in milliseconds, that the DHCP server
waits between sending addresses to the System Management Server
(SMS) when executing updateSms command.
 sms-library-path string
 
Overrides the internal default value for the SMS.dll.  Default
is an empty string.
If the string is empty, the system defaults to the internal
server default of smsrsgen.dll.
If the string is not empty, its value overrides the internal
SMS library name, smsrsgen.dll. If the system path does not include
the location of the SMS dll, you should provide the absolute path
of the dll.
 sms-network-discovery int default = 0
 
Determines whether the DHCP server generates SMS network
discovery records.
If this attribute is set to 0, you disable SMS network
discovery. If it is set to 1, you enable discovery.
Use this attribute in conjunction with the dhcp updateSMS
command.
 sms-site-code string
 
Specifies the site code name of the SMS server that receives
discovery records when you use the updateSMS keyword.
For proper functioning, make sure that you initialize this
attribute to the appropriate site code.
The default value is an empty string, but this prohibits data
discovery to complete successfully. So, you must provide the
site code.
 synthesize-reverse-zone bool default = enabled
 
Controls whether the DHCP server automatically generates the
name of the reverse zone (in-addr.arpa or ip6.arpa) that receives
PTR records updates.  Default is true (enable).
If true, you are not required to configure an explicit 
dns-reverse-zone-name in the DNS update configuration. Instead, the
DHCP server uses the IP address of each lease and the dns-host-bytes 
attribute of the scope or the reverse-zone-prefix-length attribute 
of the prefix to synthesize the reverse zone name for each update. 
The server trims the specified host bytes from the low-order
bytes of the address, and turns the remaining bytes into a zone
name of the form '.b.a.in-addr.arpa.' The host-bytes
low-order bytes of the address are used to form the hostname
within that zone. Similarly, the prefix length is used to
form the 'ip6.arpa' zone name, and the low-order bytes are used
to form the hostname.
 traps-enabled flags(all=1, server-start=2, server-stop=3, free-address-low=4, free-address-high=5, dns-queue-size=6, other-server-down=7, other-server-up=8, duplicate-address=9, address-conflict=10, failover-config-error=11, free-address6-low=12, free-address6-high=13, duplicate-address6=14, duplicate-prefix6=15)
 
Determines the traps that this server is configured to send.
   1  all
      Sends notifications for all server events.
   2  server-start
      Sends notifications whenever the server is started or
      reinitialized.
   3  server-stop
      Sends notifications whenever the server is stopped.
   4  free-address-low
      Sends notifications when the number of free IP addresses
      becomes less than or equal to the low threshold.
   5  free-address-high
      Sends notifications when the number of free IP addresses
      exceeds the high threshold after having previously
      triggered the free-address-low trap.
   6  dns-queue-size
      Sends notifications when the DHCP server?s DNS queue
      fills and the DHCP server stops processing requests.
   7  other-server-down
      Sends notifications when another server (DHCP, DNS, or
      LDAP) stops responding to this DHCP server.
   8  other-server-up
      Sends notifications when another server (DHCP, DNS, or
      LDAP) responds after having been unresponsive.
   9  duplicate-address
      Sends notifications whenever a duplicate IP address is
      detected.
   10 address-conflict
      Sends notifications when an address conflict with another
      DHCP server is detected.
   11 failover-config-error
      Notifies when a configuration mismatch between DHCP
      failover partners occurs.
   12 free-address-low
      Sends notifications when the number of free IPv6 addresses
      becomes less than or equal to the low threshold.
   13 free-address-high
      Sends notifications when the number of free IPv6 addresses
      exceeds the high threshold after having previously
      triggered the free-address-low6 trap.
   14 duplicate-address6
      Sends notifications whenever a duplicate IPv6 address is
      detected.
   15 duplicate-prefix6
      Sends notifications whenever a duplicate prefix is
      detected.
No default.
 trim-host-name bool default = enabled
 
Controls whether or not DHCP server trims the hostname string
to the first period (or dot) character (used to update DDNS
records and to return host-name-option to clients). Default,
true (enable).
If true, the hostname is truncated before the period.
If false, the DHCP server retains the period characters in the
hostname.
 update-dns-for-bootp bool default = enabled
 
If the server is replying to a BOOTP request, and is offering a
lease from a Scope which is configured to perform DNS updates, it
will check this property before beginning the DNS update. This
feature allows an administrator to prevent DNS updates for BOOTP
clients, while allowing updates for DHCP clients.
 upgrade-unavailable-timeout time default = 24h
 
Controls the time given to a lease in the database that has no
expiration; that is, it became unavailable prior to
installing Network Registrar. The DHCP server uses the
upgrade-unavailable-timeout for the expiration time of the
unavailable lease. Default is 86400 seconds (1 day).
 use-client-fqdn bool default = true
 
Controls whether the server examines the client-FQDN option
for the hostname. Default is true (enable).
If true, the server ignores any characters after the first dot (.)
because the domain is determined from the scope.
If false, the server does not determine the hostname using this.
This is useful if the client is sending unexpected or junk
characters.
 use-client-fqdn-first bool default = true
 
Controls whether the DHCP server looks at the client-FQDN option
on incoming packets first, before looking at the 'hostname'
option.  Default is true (enable).
If true and the client-FQDN option specifies a hostname, the
server uses that hostname.
If the client-FQDN option is not present in the incoming packet,
the server uses the hostname from the 'hostname' option.
If false, the server also uses the hostname from the
'hostname' option.
 use-dns-update-prereqs bool default = true
 
Controls whether the DHCP server adds prerequisites to DNS
update messages.  Default true (enable).
If true, the DHCP server includes prerequisites in DNS update
messages to make sure the client is using the domain name,
before it is updated with the current lease (IP
address).
If false, the DHCP server assumes the requesting client is
entitled to the domain name.  In this case, it does not include
prerequisites in the DNS update message, and associates the client
lease with that domain name.
Note: The DHCP server always adds prerequisites to the DNS
update message while adding a new domain name record on behalf
of a client acquiring a new lease and removing the domain name
record when a client releases its lease or the lease expires.
 use-host-name bool default = true
 
Specifies whether the server looks at  the 'hostname' option
for the hostname. Default is true (enable).
If true, the server obtains the hostname from the 'hostname'
option.
If false, the server does not obtain the hostname from this
option. This is useful if the client is sending unexpected or
junk characters.
 use-ldap-client-data bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether the DHCP server attempts to read client-entry
data using the configuration supplied by the 'ldap'
command. Default is false (disable).
 v6-client-class-lookup-id expr
 
Defines the expression used to assign a client-class based
solely on data contained in an incoming DHCPv6 client request.
No default.
The expression must return a string that is the name of a
currently configured client-class; otherwise, the expression
must return the string ''. Any return that is not a string
containing the name of a currently configured client-class or
'' is considered an error.
 v6-default-free-address-config nameref(AddrTrapConfig)
 
Specifies the default SNMP v6 free-address trap configuration object
for the server. All Prefixes and Links that are not individually
configured use this default free-address value.
 validate-client-name-as-mac bool default = false
 
Controls whether the Network Registrar user interfaces require
that the name of client entries is valid MAC address (or the
literal string 'default').  Default is false (disable).
If true, the user interfaces convert the name to the canonical
MAC address format: 1,6,xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx.  The DHCP server uses
this as the default client entry lookup key.
If false, the user interfaces allow creating client
entries with arbitrary names, which could match the lookup
keys generated from the client-lookup-id expression.
 vpn-communication bool default = true
 
Controls the ability of the DHCP server to communicate with
clients that are on a different VPN from the server. Default
is true (enable).
If true, the server communicates with DHCP clients residing on
a different VPN by using an enhanced DHCP Relay Agent capability.
This enhanced DHCP Relay Agent capability is indicated by the
appearance of the server-id-override sub-option in
the relay agent information option (Option 82).
dhcp-address-block
 
    dhcp-address-block - Defines a contiguous range of IP address space
    from which the DHCP server may allocate subnets

  Synopsis
 
    dhcp-address-block <name> create <address> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    dhcp-address-block <name> delete 
    dhcp-address-block list
    dhcp-address-block listnames
    dhcp-address-block <name> show
    dhcp-address-block <name> listsubnets
    
    dhcp-address-block <name> get <attribute>
    dhcp-address-block <name> set<attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    dhcp-address-block <name> unset <attribute>
    dhcp-address-block <name> enable <attribute>
    dhcp-address-block <name> disable <attribute>

  Description
 
    The dhcp-address-block command creates and sets attributes
    for Network Registrar DHCP address blocks. The command applies
    only to address block objects that are designated in the 
    DHCP server for subnet allocation to clients. When a DHCP server
    receives a request to allocate a subnet to a client, it does so 
    by subdividing its available address-blocks. In this context, 
    a DHCP address block is a contiguous range of IP address space
    that is delegated to the DHCP server for assignment. The DHCP 
    server expects to subdivide these DHCP address blocks for 
    delegation to some other server or device, or for its own use in
    interaction with DHCP clients.

    DHCP address blocks can parent one or more subnets. Subnets are also
    contiguous ranges of IP address space that are bound to a specific 
    client, usually a router or another DHCP server. DHCP address blocks
    and subnets are similar to scopes in that they contain address ranges
    and other attributes necessary to configure the DHCP client-server 
    interaction. Unlike scopes, DHCP address blocks and subnets do not 
    have address ranges available for assignment to DHCP clients and do 
    not contain reserved addresses.

    In a virtual private network (VPN) deployment where multiple VPNs use 
    the same private address space, you can use logically identical DHCP 
    address blocks simultaneously on multiple VPNs.
    

  Examples
 

    nrcmd> dhcp-address-block example1 create 10.10.0.0/16
    nrcmd> dhcp-address-block example1 set policy=p2
    nrcmd> dhcp-address-block example1 show

  Status
 

  See Also
    dhcp-subnet
 
 
    vpn [] (AT_STRING, Optional, default: <none>)
	This is a "virtual" property.  Use this property to set or
	get the vpn-id by vpn name instead of by id.
  Attributes
 
 address subnet required
 
Determines the IP subnet address (in the address/mask format) of
a DHCP address block. This value is defined when you create the
address block.
 default-subnet-size int default = 28
 
Sets the default subnet size for allocations from this address
block.
 deprecated bool default = false
 
Determines whether the server deactivates a DHCP address block.
The server ignores a deprecated DHCP address block for new subnet
allocations. It allows existing clients to renew their subnets, but
indicates to them that the subnet is deprecated. The client then
prepares to release the deprecated subnet or subnets back to the
server.
 embedded-policy obj(0)
 
Displays the embedded policy object for this DHCP address block.
Read-only. Use the dhcp-address-block-policy command to set the
embedded policy.
 name string
 
Defines the name of the address-block. This value is defined
when you create the address block.
 policy nameref(Policy) default = default, required
 
Identifies the name of the policy associated with this address-block.
 segment-name string
 
Designates the LAN segment name for this DHCP address block. To group
multiple, logical IP subnets on a single, physical network, give each
DHCP address block the same segment-name string. The server ignores
character case when comparing values.
 selection-tags string
 
Lists tag strings that are compared with incoming selection tags in
an allocation request. All tags in the request must match a DHCP
address block?s selection tags for that block to satisfy the request.
Separate multiple tags with a comma (do not include commas in tag
names).
 vpn-id int default = 0
 
Sets the VPN identifier for the VPN that contains this address-block.
dhcp-address-block-policy
 
    dhcp-address-block-policy - Edits a DHCP policy embedded in an
                                address-block

  Synopsis
 
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> delete

    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> set <attribute>=<value>
                                        [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> get <attribute>
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> disable <attribute>
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> enable <attribute>
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> show
  
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> setLeaseTime<time-val>
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> getLeaseTime
    
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> setOption<opt-name | id> <value>
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> getOption<opt-name | id>
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> unsetOption<opt-name | id> 
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> listOptions
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> 
        setVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name> <value>
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> 
        getVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> 
        unsetVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>
    dhcp-address-block-policy <name> listVendorOptions

  Description
 
    The dhcp-address-block-policy command lets you configure a DHCP
    policy embedded in a DHCP address block.  An embedded policy is a
    collection of DHCP option values and settings associated with (and
    named by) another object -- in this case an address block.  An
    dhcp-address-block-policy is created implicitly when you first
    reference it, and is deleted when the address block is deleted.

    You can set individual option values with the setOption command,
    unset option values with the unsetOption command, and view option
    values with the getOption and listOptions commands.  When you set
    an option value the DHCP server will replace any existing value or
    create a new one as needed for the given option name.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    policy, client-policy, client-class-policy, scope-policy
 
  Attributes
 
 affinity-period time
 
Associates a lease in the AVAILABLE state with the client that
last held the lease. If the client requests a lease during the
affinity period, it is granted the same lease; that is, unless
renewals are prohibited, then it is explicitly not given the lease.
Because of the vast IPv6 address space and depending on the address
generation technique, it could be millions of years before an
address ever needs reassignment to a different client, and there
is no reason to hold on to this information for that long.
To prohibit renewals enable either the inhibit-all-renews attribute
or the inhibit-renews-at-reboot attribute.
 allow-client-a-record-update bool default = disabled
 
Determines if a client is allowed to update A records.
If the client sets the flags in the FQDN option to indicate that
it wants to do the A record update in the request, and if this
value is TRUE, the server allows the client to do the A record
update; otherwise, based on other server configurations, the server
does the A record update.
 allow-dual-zone-dns-update bool default = disabled
 
Enables DHCP clients to perform DNS updates into two DNS zones.
To support these clients, you can configure the DHCP server to
allow the client to perform an update, but also to perform a DNS
update on the client's behalf.
 allow-lease-time-override bool default = disabled
 
Gives the server control over the lease period.  Although a client
can request a specific lease time, the server need not honor the
request if this attribute is set to false (the default).
Even if set to true, clients can request only lease times that are
shorter than those configured for the server.
 allow-non-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request non-temporary
(IA_NA) addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request non-temporary addresses.
 allow-rapid-commit bool default = false
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can use a Solicit with the
Rapid Commit option to obtain configuration information with
fewer messages. To permit this, make sure that a single DHCP
server is servicing clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked:
  - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
    FALSE, Rapid Commit is not allowed.
  - If at least one has it set to TRUE, Rapid Commit is allowed.
  - Otherwise, the remaining policies in the hierarchy are
    checked.
The default is not to allow clients to use Rapid Commit.
 allow-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request temporary (IA_TA)
addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request temporary addresses.
 default-prefix-length rangeint(0-128) default = 64
 
For delegation, specifies the default length of the delegated prefix,
if a router (client) does not explicitly request it.
The default length must always be less than or equal to the prefix
length of the prefix range.
 forward-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which forward zones to include in updates.
 forward-zone-name dname
 
Designates an optional forward zone for DNS updates.
 giaddr-as-server-id bool default = false
 
Enables the DHCP server to set the server-id option on a DHCPOFFER
and a DHCPACK to the giaddr of the incoming packet, instead of the
IP address of the server (the default action).
This causes all unicast renews to be sent to the relay agent instead
of directly to the DHCP server, and so renews arrive at the DHCP
server with option-82 information appended to the packet.
Some relay agents may not support this capability and, in some
complex configurations, the giaddr might not actually be an address
to which the DHCP client can send A unicast packet. In these cases,
the DHCP client cannot renew a lease, and must always perform a
rebind operation (where the DHCP client broadcasts a request instead
of sending a unicast to what it believes is the DHCP server).
 grace-period time default = 5m
 
Defines the length of time between the expiration of a lease
and the time it is made available for reassignment.
 inhibit-all-renews bool default = false
 
Causes the server to reject all renewal requests, forcing the client
to obtain a different address any time it contacts the DHCP server.
 inhibit-renews-at-reboot bool default = false
 
Permits clients to renew their leases, but the server forces
them to obtain new addresses each time they reboot.
 limitation-count int
 
Specifies the maximum number of clients with the same limitation-id
that are allowed to have currently active and valid leases.
 offer-timeout time default = 2m
 
Instructs the server to wait a specified amount of time when it
has offered a lease to a client, but the offer is not yet accepted.
At the end of the specified time interval, the server makes the
lease available again.
 packet-file-name string
 
Identifies the boot-file to use in the boot process of a client.
The server returns this file name in the 'file' field of its replies.
The packet-file-name cannot be longer than 128 characters.
 packet-server-name string
 
Identifies the host-name of the server to use in a client's boot
process. The server returns this file name in the 'sname' field
of its replies. The packet-server-name field cannot be longer
than 64 characters.
 packet-siaddr ipaddr
 
Identifies the IP address of the next server in the client boot
process. For example, this might be the address of a TFTP server
used by BOOTP clients. The server returns this address in the
'siaddr' field of its replies.
 permanent-leases bool default = disabled
 
Indicates whether leases using this policy are permanently granted
to requesting clients. If leases are permanently granted, the server
ignores the configured dhcp-lease-time option value and uses the
maximum lease time.
 preferred-lifetime time default = 1w
 
Assigns the default and maximum preferred lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative to
the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets the
length of time that the address is preferred; that is, its use is
unrestricted. When the preferred lifetime expires, the address
becomes deprecated and its use is restricted.
 reconfigure enumint(allow=1, disallow=2, require=3) default = allow
 
Controls DHCPv6 client reconfiguration support:
   1  allow        Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server will honor the
                   request (default).
   2  disallow     Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support but the server will not honor
                   the clients' request.
   3  require      Requires clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server drops client
                   Solicit and Request messages that do not
                   include a Reconfigure-Accept option.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked
as follows:
   - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
   disallow or require, that setting is used.
   - Otherwise, if at least one has it set to allow, Reconfigure
   is allowed.
   - If no prefix policies have this attribute set, the remaining
   policies in the hierarchy are checked.
 reconfigure-via-relay bool default = false
 
Controls whether the server should prefer unicasting or
relaying DHCPv6 Reconfigure messages.
If false (the default), the server prefers to unicast
Reconfigure messages if the client has one or more valid
statefully assigned addresses.
If true, the server prefers to send Reconfigure messages
via the relay agent unless no relay agent information is
available.
Note: When you use this attribute, consider that:
    -  In networks where the DCHPv6 server cannot communicate
       directly with its client devices?for example, where
       firewalls are in place?set this value to true.
    -  The DHCPv6 server does not use embedded and named
       policies configured on a client when it evaluates
       this attribute.
    -  The relay agent cannot be used if the Relay-Forw message
       came from a link-local address.
 reverse-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which reverse zones to include in a DNS update.
 server-lease-time time
 
Tells the server how long a lease is valid.  For more frequent
communication with a client, you might have the server consider
leases as leased for a longer period than the client considers them.
This also provides more lease-time stability. This value is not used
unless it is longer than the lease time in the dhcp-lease-time option
found through the normal traversal of policies.
 split-lease-times bool default = disabled
 
Specifies a value that the DHCP server might use internally to
affect lease times.
If enabled, the DHCP server still offers clients lease times that
reflect the configured lease-time option from the appropriate
policy; but the server bases its decisions regarding expiration
on the 'server-lease-time' value.
 unavailable-timeout time default = 24h
 
Permits the server to make a lease unavailable for the time specified
and then to return the lease to available state. If there is no value
configured in the system_default_policy, then the default is
86400 seconds (or 24 hours).
 use-client-id-for-reservations bool default = off
 
Controls how the server database checks for reserved IP
addresses.
By default, the server uses the MAC address of the DHCP client as the
key for its database lookup.  If this attribute is set to true
(enabled), then the server does the check for reserved
addresses using the DHCP client-id, which the client usually sends.
In cases where the DHCP client does not supply the client-id, the
server synthesizes it, and uses that value.
 v4-bootp-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all BOOTP clients.
 v4-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all DHCPv4 clients, whether
or not the client specifically asks for the option data.
 v6-reply-options optionid6
 
Lists the options that should be returned in any
replies to DHCPv6 clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked.
 valid-lifetime time default = 2w
 
Assigns the default and maximum valid lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative
to the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets
the length of time that an address remains valid.  When this
period of time expires, the address becomes invalid and
unusable. The valid lifetime must be greater than or equal
to the preferred lifetime.
dhcp-dns-update
 
    dhcp-dns-update - Configures a DNS Update object for DHCP

  Synopsis
 
    dhcp-dns-update <name> create [<attribute>=<value>] 
    dhcp-dns-update <name> delete
    dhcp-dns-update list  
    dhcp-dns-update listnames
    dhcp-dns-update <name> show
    dhcp-dns-update <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    dhcp-dns-update <name> get <attribute>
    dhcp-dns-update <name> unset <attribute>

    dhcp-dns-update <name> enable <attribute>
    dhcp-dns-update <name> disable <attribute>

  Description
 
    The dhcp-dns-update command configures dynamic DNS update configurations
    for DHCP.  DHCP policies refer to this information to control the DNS 
    update behavior for each client.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    policy
 
  Attributes
 
 backup-server-addr ipaddr
 
Specifies the backup DNS server address that receives DNS updates
if the server specified in server-addr is down.
 backup-server-key nameref(Key)
 
Specifies the TSIG key used to process all dynamic DNS updates for
backup-server-addr.
 dns-host-bytes rangeint(1-4)
 
Sets the number of bytes in a lease IP address to use when forming
in-addr.arpa names. The server forms names in the in-addr.arpa zone
by prepending these bytes of the address (in reverse order) to the
reverse zone name. If unset, the server synthesizes an appropriate
value based on the scope?s subnet size.
 dynamic-dns enumbyt default = update-all
 
Controls whether the DHCP server should attempt to update a
DNS server with the name and address information from leases
that are granted to requesting clients.
 force-dns-updates bool default = false
 
Determines whether the DHCP server retries a dynamic DNS update
whenever a client renews its lease, even if DHCP thinks that the
update has already been completed successfully.
 forward-zone-name dname
 
Designates the DNS forward zone used to add a DHCP client host name
(A record).
 host-name-generator expr
 
Defines an expression that evaluates to the synthesized host name
to be used. If undefined or the expression returns "", the
configured host name synthesis is used. If the expression returns
a null value, no host name will be used.
 max-dns-ttl time
 
Indicates the maximum number of seconds the DHCP server keeps DNS
records it acquired through dynamic updates. Default is 86400s (1d).
This value sets a ceiling (or time to live) on how long to keep
DNS updates.
When the DHCP server adds a DNS record, it uses a TTL of one
third the lease time if it is between min-dns-ttl and
max-dns-ttl values. If one third of the lease time is greater
than max-dns-ttl, the TTL value is set to max-dns-ttl.
 min-dns-ttl time
 
Indicates the minimum number of seconds the DHCP server keeps the
DNS records acquired through dynamic updates. This value sets the
shortest allowable time (or time to live) to keep DNS updates.
When the DHCP server adds a DNS record, it uses a TTL of one
third the lease time if it is  between min-dns-ttl and
max-dns-ttl values. If one third of the lease time is smaller
than min-dns-ttl, the TTL value will be set to min-dns-ttl.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
Gives a unique name to the configuration object.
 reverse-zone-name dname
 
Designates the DNS reverse (in-addr.arpa) zone that is updated
with PTR records.
If a reverse-zone-name is configured, DHCP always uses it.
Alternately, if DHCP server synthesize-reverse-zone feature is
enabled and if a reverse-zone-name is not configured, DHCP
uses the lease IP address and the scope dns-host-bytes to
automatically generate a reverse zone name.
 reverse-zone-prefix-length rangeint(0-124)
 
Identifies the prefix length of the reverse zone for ip6.arpa
updates. The server forms the zone name using this value if
configured; otherwise the prefix length is determined from the
Prefix. This value must be a multiple of 4 as ip6.arpa zones are
on 4 bit (nibble) boundaries. If not a multiple of 4, it is
rounded up to the next higher multiple of 4.
 server-addr ipaddr
 
Specifies the DNS server address that receives dynamic DNS updates.
 server-key nameref(Key)
 
Specifies the TSIG key used to process all dynamic DNS updates for
server-addr.
 synthesize-name bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether the DHCP server automatically creates DNS host
names for DHCP clients that do not provide names. The server
can synthesize unique names for clients based on the 'synthetic
name stem' attribute.
 synthetic-name-stem string default = dhcp
 
Identifies the stem of the default host name to use if clients do not
supply host names.
 update-dns-first bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether to update the DNS server before granting a lease.
 update-dns-for-bootp bool default = enabled
 
Controls whether the DNS server receives updates for BOOTP clients.
If the server is replying to a BOOTP request, and is offering a
lease configured to perform DNS updates, it checks
this attribute before beginning the DNS update. This attribute allows
an administrator to prevent DNS updates for BOOTP clients, while
allowing updates for DHCP clients. If not configured, the server
setting is used (which defaults to true).
 use-dns-update-prereqs bool default = true
 
If configured, the update ignores DHCP server level
use-dns-update-prereqs. By default (enabled), the DHCP server
adds prerequisites to DNS update messages to assure that the
current client uses the domain name, before updating the client
with the current lease (IP Address).
If disabled, the DHCP server assumes that the current client is
entitled to the domain name (and hence not add prerequisites to
DNS update message) and associates the client's current lease
with that domain name.
Note: The DHCP server always adds prerequisites to the DNS
update message while adding a new domain name record on behalf of
a client acquiring a new lease and removing the domain name record
when client release its lease or the lease expires.
 v6-host-name-generator expr
 
Defines an expression that evaluates to the synthesized host name
to be used. If undefined or the expression returns "", the
configured host name synthesis is used. If the expression returns
a null value, no host name will be used.
 v6-synthetic-name-generator enumint(duid=1, hashed-duid=2, cablelabs-device-id=3, cablelabs-cm-mac-addr=4) default = hashed-duid
 
Controls what the DHCP server appends to the synthetic name stem
when synthesizing the fully-qualified domain name for a client:
   duid
      The raw client DUID. This is formatted as a hexadecimal
      string with a hyphen as separator between each octet.
   hashed-duid
      The hashed client DUID. The rightmost 64-bits of the SHA-256
      hash over the client's DUID appended with the forward zone
      name (in DNS wire format) is used to generate a 13-character
      base 32 encoded string. This is the default method and the
      fallback method if the configured type is not possible
      (that is, the option needed to generate the selected type
      does not exist for the client).
   cablelabs-device-id
      The Cablelabs CL_OPTION_DEVICE_ID option data is used, if
      available. This is formatted as a hexadecimal string with a
      hyphen as separator between each octet. This might be used
      for names generated for DOCSIS 3.0 cable modems.
   cablelabs-cm-mac-addr
      The Cablelabs CL_CM_MAC_ADDR option data is used, if
      available. This is formatted as a hexadecimal string with
      a hyphen as separator between each octet. This might be
      used for names generated for CPEs behind a customer's
      DOCSIS 3.0 cable modem (if the customer has multiple CPEs,
      a name collision and disambiguation will likely result).
Note: Several of these methods may cause privacy concerns if
the DNS is accessible from the Internet.
dhcp-interface
 
    dhcp-interface - Configures the DHCP server's network interfaces

  Synopsis
 
    dhcp-interface <name> create [<attribute>=<value>] 
    dhcp-interface <name> delete
    dhcp-interface list  
    dhcp-interface listnames
    dhcp-interface <name> show
    dhcp-interface <name> set <attribute>=<value> [attribute>=<value> ...]
    dhcp-interface <name> get <attribute>
    dhcp-interface <name> unset <attribute>

    dhcp-interface <name> enable <attribute>
    dhcp-interface <name> disable <attribute>

  Description
 
    The dhcp-interface command configures network interfaces for use
    by the Network Registrar DHCP server. If there are no defined 
    interfaces, the server discovers and uses all available 
    interfaces on the system. When this list is present, the server
    uses only the available interfaces, if any, that match this list.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 address subnet
 
Specifies the IP address and subnet mask length of one or more
interfaces that the DHCP server should use.
 ip6address prefix
 
Specifies the IPv6 address and prefix length of one or more
interfaces that the DHCP server should use.
 multicast-addresses ip6addr default = ff02::1:2,ff05::1:3
 
Enables or disables the specified multicast addresses on DHCP
interfaces. The default multicast addresses are ff02::1:2 and
ff05::1:3.  DHCPv6 requires address ff02::1:2, if any DHCPv6 clients
are directly connected to the link associated with the interface.
The address ff05::1:3 is the default multicast addresses used by
relay agents when relaying DHCPv6 requests.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
Identifies the interface for DNS server use.
dhcp-subnet
 
    dhcp-subnet - Describes a contiguous range of IP address space
    which the DHCP server has allocated to a client.

  Synopsis
 
    dhcp-subnet <dhcp-subnet-number> [show]
    dhcp-subnet <subnet-number> get <attribute>

    dhcp-subnet <subnet-number> force-available

  Description
 
    The dhcp-subnet commands manipulate subnet objects that the DHCP
    server has leased to its clients. When the DHCP server receives a
    request for a subnet, it creates the subnet by subdividing its
    available address-blocks, and allocating the subnet to the client.

    The dhcp-subnet commands apply only to subnet objects that have
    been allocated to clients by the DHCP server.


  Examples
 
    dhcp-subnet 10.10.1.0/24 show
 
  Status
 

  See Also
    dhcp-address-block
 
  Attributes
 
 address subnet immutable
 
Displays the subnet address, including the mask.
 all-vpns bool
 
Provides failover configuration information for this subnet.
If true, this subnet is configured to use the same failover
configuration for all VPNs. Read only.
 client-domain-name string
 
Displays the domain name the client specified in its messages (if
any).
 client-flags flags(client-valid=1, client-id-created-from-mac-address=2)
 
Displays either client-valid or client-id-created-from-mac-address
(the client ID was created for internal use from the client MAC
address).
 client-host-name string
 
Displays the host name that the client specified (if any).
 client-id blob
 
Displays the client-id of the subnet's client.
 client-last-transaction-time date
 
Displays the time when the client last contacted the DHCP server.
 client-mac-addr macaddr
 
Displays the MAC address which the client presented to the DHCP
server.
 expiration date
 
Displays the expiration time of the subnet binding.
 high-water int
 
Displays the highest utilization level recorded since the last time
that statistics were retrieved.
 in-use-addresses int
 
Displays the number of addresses currently being used by hosts.
 last-transaction-time date
 
Displays the time at which the client last communicated with the
server about this subnet. Read only.
 relay-agent-option blob
 
Displays the contents of the relay agent information option from
the most recent client interaction. Read only.
 selection-tags string
 
Displays the selection-tag string that the client presented when
it last leased or renewed the subnet binding. Read only.
 state enumint(none=0, available=1, other-available=2, offered=3, leased=4, expired=5, released=6, unavailable=7, pending-available=8)
 
Displays the state of the subnet.
 unusable-addresses int
 
The number of addresses marked unusable.
 vpn-id int default = 0
 
Identifies the VPN that contains this subnet.
dns
 
    dns - Configures and controls the DNS server

  Synopsis
 
    dns disable <attribute>
    dns enable <attribute>
    
    dns get <attribute>
    dns set <attribute>=<value> [attribute>=<value ...]
    dns unset <attribute>
    dns show
    
    dns findRR -name <fqdn>|<addr>
    dns findRR [-namePrefix <namePrefix>] [-rrTypes <rrTypeList>]
               [-protected | -unprotected] [-zoneType forward | reverse
                | primary | secondary | published | unpublished | ALL]

    dns addRootHint <name> <addr> [<addr> ...]
    dns removeRootHint <name>
    dns listRootHints
    
    dns addException <name> <addr> [<addr> ...]
    dns removeException <name>
    dns listExceptions
    
    dns addForwarder <addr>
    dns removeForwarder <addr>
    dns listForwarders
    
    dns flushCache

    dns rebuildRR-Indexes

    dns forceXfer secondary

    dns scavenge

    dns serverLogs show
    dns serverLogs nlogs=<nlogs> logsize=<logsize>

    dns getStats [performance | query | errors | security | maxcounters |
                  ha | ipv6 | all] [total | sample]
    dns resetStats


    dns getZoneCount [forward | reverse | primary | secondary | published |
                      unpublished | ALL]
    dns getRRCount [zone <name> | forward | reverse | primary | secondary |
                    published | unpublished | ALL]

    dns removecachedRR <name> [<type>] [<data>]

    dns setPartnerDown
    
  Description
 
    The dns command lets you configure the DNS server in the cluster. 

    dns findRR -name <fqdn>|<addr>
    dns findRR [-namePrefix <namePrefix>] [-rrTypes <rrTypeList>]
               [-protected | -unprotected] [-zoneType forward | reverse
                | primary | secondary | published | unpublished | ALL]
       Use the findRR commands to display the resource records for a
       specific domain name; or to display those matching a name prefix, 
       a list of resource record types--whether protected or unprotected--and 
       certain zone types.

    dns addRootHint <name> <addr> [<addr> ...]
    dns removeRootHint <name>
    dns listRootHints
       Use the RootHint commands to add or remove the names
       and addresses of the root servers. After you specify the
       root servers, Network Registrar queries them for their 
       root name server records.  These records are in turn used 
       to resolve other names. As such, these values need not be 
       exact, but must be accurate enough for the Network Registrar 
       DNS server to retrieve the correct information.
    
       The addRootHint command adds the name of a root server and the
       addresses (to which it is listening on) to the list that the DNS
       server uses to find the roots of the DNS name space.
    
       The removeRootHint command removes a root server from the list.
    
       The listRootHints command lists the root server information.
    
    dns addException <name> <addr> [<addr> ...]
    dns removeException <name>
    dns listExceptions
       Use the exception commands only if you do not want 
       your DNS server to use the standard name resolution 
       for querying root name servers for names outside the domain.
       The exception command lets you specify the resolution 
       exception domains and the IP addresses of the associated 
       servers.
    
       The addException command adds a list of DNS servers to use
       to resolve names in a specified domain. This list allows you
       to override DNS the publicly configured names server for one
       or more domains.
    
       The removeException command removes an entry for exceptional 
       resolution of addresses within a domain.
    
       The listExceptions command lists the domains that are configured
       to have exceptional resolution of their names.

    dns addForwarder <addr>
    dns removeForwarder <addr>
    dns listForwarders
       Use the Forwarder commands to specify the addresses of any name
       servers that you want your Network Registrar DNS server to use 
       as forwarders. Network Registrar forwards recursive queries to 
       these servers before forwarding queries to the Internet at-large.
       You can use the exception command to override forwarding for
       specific domains.
    
       The addForwarder command adds the address of a forwarder for 
       this DNS server.
    
       The removeForwarder command removes the address of a forwarder.
    
       The listForwarders command lists the forwarders for this DNS 
       server.
  
    dns flushCache
        The flushCache command flushes the persistently cached 
        information in the DNS server. To remove cached information, to be removed,
        reload the DNS server.

    dns rebuildRR-Indexes

       The rebuildRR-Indexes command rebuilds the resource record 
       indexes.

    dns forceXfer secondary
       The forceXfer command forces full zone transfers for every zone       
       whose type matches the type (primary or secondary) specified in 
       the command, regardless of the SOA serial numbers, to synchronize
       DNS data store.  If a normal zone transfer is already in progress, 
       the forceXfer command schedules a full zone transfer for that 
       zone immediately after the normal zone transfer finishes. 

       Note: The option for primary is not yet available.

    dns scavenge
       The scavenge command causes scavenging to occur on all primary 
       zones that have scavenge enabled. 
	
    dns serverLogs show
    dns serverLogs nlogs=<nlogs> logsize=<logsize>
       The serverLogs show command displays the number of log files
       and the maximum size for each file.
    
       The serverLogs command allows setting the two server logging 
       parameters, nlogs and logsize.  Either or both may be specified
       in the command, and changes will only occur to the one(s) 
       specified.  When setting logsize, a suffix of K or M indicates
       units of thousands or millions.  
  
          dns serverLogs nlogs=6 logsize=500K
          dns serverLogs logsize=5M

       Note: For these changes to take effect you must save the changes
       and restart the server Agent.

    
    dns getStats [performance | query | errors | security | maxcounters |
                  ha | ipv6 | all] [total | sample]
    dns resetStats
       The getStats command displays the requested DNS server 
       statistics, either since the last reload or for the last sample
       period.
       The resetStats commands returns the DNS activity counters 
       (statistics) to zero.

   
    dns getZoneCount [forward | reverse | primary | secondary | published |
                      unpublished | ALL]
    dns getRRCount [zone <name> | forward | reverse | primary | secondary |
                    published | unpublished | ALL]
       The getZoneCount and getRRCount commands display the number of 
       zones or resource records for the requested zones. By default, 
       all published zones are reported.

    dns removecachedRR <name> [<type>] [<data>]
       The removecachedRR comand allows the removal of non-authoritative
       RRs from both the (non-authoritative) persistent cache and 
       the in-memory cache. An RR name-set can be removed by supplying
       only 'name'. An RR-set can be completely removed by specifying  
       both 'name' and 'type'; a specific RR can be purged by supplying 
       'name', 'type' and 'data'.

    dns setPartnerDown
       The setParterDown command notifies the DNS server that its High
       Availability DNS partner server is down.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    server
 
  Attributes
 
 activity-counter-interval rangetime(10s-24h) default = 5m
 
Sets the period of time that server activity counters use to
collect metrics.
Use this attribute together with the 'collect-sample-counters'
attribute.  Make sure the 'collect-sample-counters' is set to
true (enable) to start sampling.
 activity-counter-log-settings flags(total=1, sample=2, performance=3, query=4, errors=5, security=6, maxcounters=7, ha=8, ipv6=9, server=10) default = total,performance,query,errors,security,maxcounters,ha,ipv6
 
Controls what activity counters a DNS server uses for logging.
The possible flags are:
  total        log the accumulated counters since reset or server
               start.
  sample       log counters for each sampling interval.
  performance  log performance-related counters.
  query        log query-related counters.
  errors       log error-related counters.
  security     log security-related counters.
  maxcounters  log maxcounters-related counters.
  ha           log HA-related counters.
  ipv6         log IPv6-related counters.
 activity-summary-interval rangetime(60s-24h) default = 5m
 
Sets the seconds between DNS activity summary log messages,
if the activity-summary attribute is enabled in the server
log-settings. The default value is 5 minutes.
 auth-db-cache-kbytes int default = 10240
 
Sets the kilobytes of internal (BTREE) cache that the authzone
database uses.
Note: This value is rounded up to the nearest 4KB boundary. For
example, an 81KB value is rounded up to 84KB.
 axfr-multirec-default bool default = on
 
Determines the default multi-record AXFR choice for
foreign (remote) servers not found in remote server list.
Default is true (enable). Only old version Bind 8.x and
Microsoft NT version require this attribute to set false.
 cache-db-cache-kbytes int default = 10240
 
Sets the kilobytes of internal (BTREE) cache that the cache database
uses.
Note: This value is rounded up to the nearest 4KB boundary. For
example, an 81KB value is rounded up to 84KB.
 checkpoint-interval rangetime(60m-1w) default = 3h
 
Sets the seconds that elapse between snapshots of zone information.
DNS records this information in the Zone Checkpoint database.
 collect-sample-counters bool default = true
 
Switches counter sampling on and off.
 default-negcache-ttl rangetime(0-24h) default = 0
 
Sets the amount of time in seconds that the DNS server caches
negative answers if there is no SOA record in the authority
section of the reply.
The presence of an SOA record in the authority section of a
negative overrides this attribute value.
For more details, see IETF RFC2308.
 delegation-only-domains dname
 
Instructs the DNS server to expect a specified zone to
return only delegations to authoritative nameservers
when queried.
Other than records at the domain name itself, the
specified zone must contain only NS records for each each
nameserver to which the subzone is delegated and the zone's
apex SOA record.  For example, 'com.' is a domain that should
contain only delegations.
Use this attribute to filter out wildcard or synthesized data
from authoritative nameservers whose undelegated (in-zone) data
is of no interest.
The server enforces the delegation-only nature of the domains on
this list when it examines responses that are not from a
forwarder or resolution exception server. The server converts
non-conforming answers to no-such-name responses.  This cannot
be enforced when the answer comes from a forwarder.
 exception-forwarding enumint(forward-last=0, forward-first=1, forward-always=2) default = forward-last
 
Controls the order (forward-first, forward-last or forward-always)
with which the DNS server will forward a query to a configured
resolution exception.
forward-always - DNS will always forward queries to a configured
         	 exception
forward-first  - DNS will first forward queries to a configured 
	         exception and if it doesn't get an answer 
		 before the request expires, it will forward to 
	         cached name servers (if any)
forward-last   - DNS will first forward queries to cached name 
		 servers (if any) and if it doesn't get an answer 
		 before the request expires, it will forward the 
		 query to a configured exception
 fake-ip-name-response bool default = enabled
 
Controls whether the DNS server rejects queries of fully
qualified domain names that are in IP address form (for
example, an A record like 192.168.40.40), without even trying
to query (or forward to) other servers. Default is true
(enable).
Enabling this feature causes the server to respond to these
queries indicating the name does not exist.   Queries of this
type are generally from rogue applications.
 forward-retry-time rangetime(1s-30s) default = 8s
 
Sets the retry interval for forwarding a DNS query to a
forwarder or resolution exception server. These queries are
recursive, and may require more time for the forwarder to
resolve.
To ensure the server tries all forwarders, set this value to the
'request-expiration-time' divided by one less than the total
number of configured forwarders).
Note:  This attribute has no affect when you enable slave-mode;
the server uses slave-forward-retry-time instead.
 ha-dns-comm-timeout rangetime(2s-24h) default = 30s
 
Sets the period of time that must elapse before the server
determines it cannot communicate with its HA DNS partner.
 ixfr-enable bool default = enabled
 
Controls the incremental transfer behavior for zones for
which you have not configured a specific behavior. Required,
true (enable).
 ixfr-expire-interval rangetime(0-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 0
 
Specifies the maximum duration between full zone transfers that 
the DNS server will request incremental transfer updates for its 
secondary zones.  After this time interval expires, even if an 
incremental transfer would normally be requested, the DNS server 
will instead request a full zone transfer.  Setting this value 
to 0 does not enforce any time limit between full zone transfers.
 local-port-num rangeint(1-65535) default = 53
 
Specifies the UDP and TCP port number that the DNS server
uses to listen for queries.
 log-settings flags(config=1, ddns=2, xfr-in=3, xfr-out=4, notify=5, datastore=8, scavenge=9, scavenge-details=10, server-operations=11, lame-delegation=13, root-query=14, ddns-refreshes=15, ddns-refreshes-details=16, ddns-details=17, tsig=18, tsig-details=19, activity-summary=20, query-errors=21, config-details=22, incoming-packets=23, outgoing-packets=24, xfr-in-packets=25, query-packets=26, notify-packets=27, ddns-packets=28, xfr-out-packets=29, ha-details=30) default = config,ddns,xfr-in,xfr-out,notify,datastore,scavenge,server-operations,root-query,tsig,query-errors,ha-details
 
Determines which detailed events the DNS server logs, as set
using a bit mask. Logging these additional details can help
analyze a problem. Leaving detailed logging enable for a long
period, however, can fill the log files and cause the loss of
important information.
The possible flags are:
  config
    This flag will cause log messages pertaining to server
    configuration and server de-initialization (unconfiguration).
  ddns
    This flag will cause the logging of high-level DDNS messages.
    Detailed DDNS logging (e.g. RRs that have been deleted or
    added) can be enabled via ddns-details.
  xfr-in
    This flag will allow the generation of log messages
    associated with inbound full and incremental zone transfers.
  xfr-out
    This flag will allow the generation of log messages
    associated with outbound full and incremental zone transfers.
  notify
    This flag allows log messages associated with the processing
    of notify messages.
  datastore
    This flag allows the generation of log messages associated
    with datastores processing. Enabling this flag provides
    insight into various events in the server's embedded
    databases/datastores.
  scavenge
    This flag allows the logging of events associated (RR)
    scavenging.
  scavenge-details
    This flag causes more detailed logging, pertaining to
    scavenging, to be displayed. Note, this flag is disabled by
    default.
  server-operations
    This flag enables the logging of general high server events
    (such as those pertaining to sockets and interfaces).
  lame-delegation
    This flag allows the logging of lame-delegation events.
    Though enabled by default, disabling this flag could prevent
    the log from getting filled with frequent lame-delegation
    encounters.
  root-query
    This flag allows the generation of log messages associated
    queries (and responses) from root servers.
  ddns-refreshes
    This flag allows the server to log messages associated with
    (W2K) DDNS refreshes.
  ddns-refreshes-details
    This flag generates log messages that provide details
    describing RRs that were refreshed.
  ddns-details
    This flag enables detailed logging that describes the RR(s)
    that have deleted/added due to DDNS updates.
  tsig
    This flag allows the logging of events associated Transaction
    Signature (TSIG) DDNS updates.
  tsig-details
    This flag causes more detailed logging, pertaining to tsig, to
    be displayed. Note, this flag is disabled by default.
  query-errors
    This flag causes logging of errors encountered while
    processing DNS queries.
  config-details
    This flag generates detailed information during server
    configuration (e.g. displaying all configured and assumed
    server attributes)
  incoming-packets
    This flag causes incoming packets to be traced.
  outgoing-packets
    This flag causes outgoing packets to be traced.
  xfr-in-packets
    This flag causes incoming zone transfer packets to be traced.
  xfr-out-packets
    This flag causes outgoing zone transfer packets to be traced.
  query-packets
    This flag causes query packets to be traced.
  notify-packets
    This flag causes notify packets to be traced.
  ddns-packets
    This flag causes DDNS packets to be traced.
  performance
    This flag logs server level performance statistics.
  ha-details
    This flag enables detailed logging of HA related information.
 max-cache-ttl rangetime(0-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 1w
 
Sets the maximum amount of time that you want the DNS server
to retain cached information.  Default is 604800s (1w).
 max-dns-packets int default = 500
 
Specifies the maximum number of packets that dns server will
handle concurrently. DNS server will drop inbound packets if this
limit is reached.
 max-negcache-ttl rangetime(0-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 60m
 
Sets an upper limit on the number of seconds a DNS server
maintains negative cache entries. Default is 3600s (1h).
A server generates these cache entries after querying another
name server and receiving an authoritative reply stating the
requested records do not exist.
 mem-cache-size rangeint(200-4194303) default = 50000
 
Indicates the size, in kilobytes, of the in-memory record cache.
Default is 50000 (50MB).
 minimal-responses bool default = false
 
Controls whether the DNS server omits or includes records from
the authority and data sections of query responses when these 
records are not required. Enabling this attribute may improve
query performance such as when the DNS server is configured as
a caching server.
 neg-cache-ttl rangetime(0-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 10m
 
Indicates how long information learned from other name
servers about non-existent names or data should be cached.
 no-fetch-glue bool default = disabled
 
Specifies whether you want the DNS server, when composing
a response to a query, to fetch missing glue records.
Glue records are DNS A records, which specify the address of a
domain's authoritative name servers. Normal DNS responses include
NS records and their A records related to the name being queried.
 no-recurse bool default = disabled
 
Specifies whether you want to disable forwarding client queries
to other name servers when your DNS server is
not authoritative for data in its own cache. If you disable
recursive queries, you make your name server a noncaching server.
 notify bool default = enabled
 
Controls how the DNS server sends NOTIFY packets for zones
that have changed. Default is true (enable).
You must also set these attributes or accept their defaults:
notify-defer-cnt, notify-min-interval, notify-rcv-internal,
notify-send-stagger, notify-wait.
 notify-defer-cnt int default = 100
 
With the notify attribute enabled, sets the maximum number of
changes the DNS server can accumulate during the notify-wait
period. If changes exceed this number, the DNS server sends
notification before the notify-wait period has elapsed.
Default is 100 changes.
 notify-min-interval rangetime(0-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 2s
 
With the notify attribute enabled, sets the minimum interval
required before sending notification to a particular server of
consecutive changes on the same zone. Default is 2s.
 notify-rcv-interval rangetime(0-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 5s
 
With the notify attribute enabled for secondary zones, sets the
minimum amount of time between complete processing of one
notification (serial number testing and/or zone transfer), and
the start of processing of another notification. ,
default 5s.
 notify-send-stagger rangetime(0-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 1s
 
With the notify attribute enabled, sets the interval
to use for staggering notifications to multiple servers
about a zone change. Default is 1s.
 notify-source-address ipaddr
 
Specifies the source IP address that the DNS server uses to send
notify requests to other servers. A value of 0.0.0.0 indicates
that operating systen uses the best local address based on the
destination.
 notify-source-port rangeint(0-65535)
 
Specifies the UDP port number that the DNS server uses to send
notify requests to other servers.
A value of zero indicates that the server should choose a random
port. If this attribute is unset, then queries are sent from
the port used to listen for queries (See the local-port-num
attribute).
 notify-wait rangetime(0-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 5s
 
With the notify attribute enabled, and after an initial zone
change, sets the period of time for the DNS server to wait
before it sends change notification to other name servers.
Default is 5s.
This property allows you to accumulate multiple changes,
and thus limit the number of times the serial number advances.
 persist-mem-cache bool default = true
 
Specifies whether the DNS server writes memory chache, or reads
it from the persistent cache database.
If you set this to false, DNS does not use the persistent cache
database.
 query-source-address ipaddr
 
Specifies the source IP address from which the DNS server will
send queries to other servers when resolving names for clients.  A
value of 0.0.0.0 indicates that OS will use the best local address
based on the destination.
 query-source-port rangeint(0-65535)
 
Specifies the UDP port number that the DNS server uses to send
queries to other servers when resolving names for clients.  A
value of zero instructs the server to choose a random port.  If
you unset this attribute, the server sends queries from the
port it uses to listen for queries (see the local-port-num
attribute).
 remote-port-num rangeint(1-65535) default = 53
 
Specifies the UDP and TCP port number the DNS server
uses to send queries to other servers. Default is port 53.
 request-expiration-time rangetime(10s-5m) default = 1m30s
 
Governs the expiration time of DNS queries; for example,
DNS query, zone transfer SOA query, IXFR request and notify
request). A query that is not answered within this time interval
expires.
Note: Cisco recommends that you make sure this value is
considerably larger than 'request-retry-time' to allow multiple
attempts to query multiple servers, using exponential backoff.
 request-retry-time rangetime(1s-30s) default = 4s
 
Dictates the retry time interval (in secs) when querying a name
server. This time interval is used in general queries - in
response to DNS clients queries - (zone transfers) SOA queries,
IXFR requests and notify requests. Understand that this is a
minium retry time. The server applies an exponential backoff on
retries.
 restrict-cache-query-acl amelist
 
Specifies an access control list that restricts which
clients are allowed to query for cached non-authoritative
resource records. If unset, restrict-query-acl is used.
Optional.
 restrict-query-acl amelist default = any
 
Provides a global access control list (ACL) used to limit device
queries that a DNS server must honor. You can restrict query
clients based on host IP address, network address, TSIG keys,
and access control lists. The default is to allow any client to
perform a query.
Zones inherit this ACL if they are missing their
restrict-query-acl. This ACL also serves as filtering queries for
non-authoritative zones.
 restrict-recursion-acl amelist default = any
 
Defines the global Access Control List (ACL) used to restrict
recursive that the DNS server honors.  This list can contain
host, network addresses, TSIG keys and global ACLs that
restrict recursive queries to a certain set of DNS clients.
Default is to allow any client to perform a query. For any client
not passing this ACL andrequesting a recursive query, the server
responds with a referal - as if originally requested with an
iterative query.
 restrict-xfer-acl amelist default = none
 
Overrides the default access control list (designating who can
receive zone transfers).
 round-robin bool default = enabled
 
Specifies whether you want round-robin cycling of equivalent
records in responses to queries. Equivalent records are records
of the same name and type. Since clients often only look at the
first record of a set, enabling this features can help balance
loads and keep clients from forever trying to talk to an
out-of-service host.
 save-negative-cache-entries bool default = enabled
 
Controls whether to have the server store negative query results.
Default, true (enable).
Disabling this feature prevents persistent caching of negative
query responses.
 scvg-ignore-restart-interval rangetime(2h-24h) default = 2h
 
Ensures that the server does not reset the scavenging time with
every server restart. Within this interval, Network Registrar
ignores the time between when a server went down and its restart.
This interval is normally short. The value can range from two
hours to one day. With any time longer than that set,
Network Registrar recalculates the scavenging period
to allow for record updates that cannot take place while the
server is stopped. You can also set this  attribute on a zone,
and the value set on the zone overrides the server setting.
Default is 2h.
 scvg-interval rangetime(60m-1y) default = 1w
 
Sets the seconds that DNS waits before removing (scavenging)
out-of-date address (A) records.
 scvg-no-refresh-interval rangetime(60m-1y) default = 1w
 
Sets the number of seconds during which DNS updates cannot increment
the zone timestamp.
 scvg-refresh-interval rangetime(60m-1y) default = 1w
 
Sets the number of seconds during which DNS updates can increment
the zone timestamp. After both the no-refresh and refresh intervals
expire, the record is a candidate for scavenging. The value
can range from one hour to 365 days. The zone setting overrides
the server setting of 604800s (1w).
 simulate-zone-top-dynupdate bool default = disabled
 
Enables compatibility with a Windows 2000 Domain Controller.
When processing a dynamic update packet, which attempts to add
or remove A records from the name of a zone, DNS responds as if
the update succeeded, rather than responding with a refusal, as
would normally occur due to the protected/unprotected name
conflict. No update to the records at the zone name will actually
occur, although the response indicates that it has.
 slave-forward-retry-time rangetime(5s-60s) default = 30s
 
Sets the retry interval for forwarding a DNS query in slave-mode.
These queries are recursive, and may require more time for the
forwarder to resolve.
To ensure the server tries all forwarders, set this value to the
'request-expiration-time' divided by one less than the total
number of configured forwarders.
 slave-mode bool default = disabled
 
Specifies whether you want this server to be a slave server; that
is, a server that relies entirely on forwarders for data that
is not in its cache. Default is false (disable).
This attribute takes effect only if you specify the corresponding
forwarders.
Note: You can override slave-mode for specific domains with the
exception-list property.
 subnet-sorting bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether DNS reorders A records when responding to client
queries. Default is false (disable).
As implemented in BIND 4.9.7, the Network Registrar DNS
server confirms the client?s network address before responding to
a query. If the client, server, and target of the query are on the
same subnet, and the target has multiple A records, the server tries
to reorder the A records in its response by putting the target?s
closest address first in the response packet.
Because clients often only look at the first record in a set,
enabling this attribute can help localize network traffic onto
a subnet. This attribute is only applied on answers to queries
from clients located on the same subnet as the DNS server.
 tcp-query-retry-time rangetime(10s-5m) default = 10s
 
Defines the retry time for DNS queries over a TCP connection.
Cisco recommends that you set this value to less than
'request-expiration-time'.
 transfer-source-address ipaddr
 
Specifies the source IP address that the DNS server uses to send
transfer and SOA requests to other servers.
A value of 0.0.0.0 indicates that operating system uses the best
local address based on the destination.
 transfer-source-port rangeint(0-65535)
 
Specifies the UDP port number that the DNS server uses to send
transfer and SOA requests to other servers.
A value of 0 (zero) indicates that you should choose a random port.
If this attribute  is unset, then queries are sent from the port
used to listen for queries (see local-port-num).
 traps-enabled flags(all=1, server-start=2, server-stop=3, ha-dns-partner-down=4, ha-dns-partner-up=5, ha-dns-config-error=6, masters-not-responding=7, masters-responding=8, secondary-zone-expired=9, forwarders-not-responding=10, forwarders-responding=11)
 
Defines the traps that this server is configured to send.
   1  all
      Sends notifications for all server events.
   2  server-start
      Sends notifications whenever the server is started or 
      reinitialized.
   3  server-stop
      Sends notifications whenever the server is stopped.
   4  ha-dns-partner-down
      Sends notifications whenever the HA DNS partner 
      goes down.      
   5  ha-dns-partner-up
      Sends notifications whenever the HA DNS partner becomes 
      available again after going down.
   6  ha-dns-config-error
      Sends notifications when a configuration mismatch between 
      HA DNS partners occurs.
   7  masters-not-responding
      Sends notifications when master servers stop responding.
   8  masters-responding
      Sends notifications when master servers start responding 
      again.
   9  secondary-zone-expired
      Sends notifications when a secondary server can no longer 
      claim authority for zone data when responding to queries
      during a zone transfer.
   10 forwarders-not-responding
      Sends notifications when DNS forwarders stop responding.
   11 forwarders-responding
      Sends notifications when DNS forwarders start responding
      again.
 update-acl amelist default = none
 
Provides server-level control of which devices can access and
update the DNS server. If the access control list is set at the
zone level, Network Registrar overrides the server-level setting.
 update-relax-zone-name bool default = disabled
 
Enables DNS updates to specify any zone name in the authoritative
zone rather than the exact zone name; thus, relaxing the RFC 2136
restriction on the zone name record in dynamic updates. This
attribute allows updates to specify a zone name which is any name
within an authoritative zone rather than exactly the name of a zone.
dns-interface
 
    dns-interface - Configures the DNS server's network interfaces

  Synopsis
 
    dns-interface <name> create [<attribute>=<value>] 
    dns-interface <name> delete
    dns-interface list  
    dns-interface listnames
    dns-interface <name> show
    dns-interface <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    dns-interface <name> get <attribute>
    dns-interface <name> unset

    dns-interface <name> enable <attribute>
    dns-interface <name> disable <attribute>

  Description
 
    The dns-interface command configures network interfaces for use
    by the Network Registrar DNS server. If there are no defined 
    interfaces, the server discovers and uses all available interfaces
    on the system. When this list is present, the server uses
    only the available interfaces, if any, that match this list.
    
  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 address subnet
 
Specifies the IP address and subnet mask of the DNS interface.
 ip6address prefix
 
Specifies the IPv6 address and prefix length for one or more
DNS interfaces.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
The name of the DNS server interface.
 port rangeint(1-65535) default = 53
 
Specifies the UDP and TCP port number the DNS server listens on.
dns-update-map
 
    dns-update-map - Configures a DNS update map of the DHCP and DNS
                     server configurations needed to perform DNS updates

  Synopsis
 
    dns-update-map <name> create  <dhcp-servers> <dns-servers>
                                 <dns-config> [<attribute>=<value> ...]                                
    dns-update-map <name> delete 
    dns-update-map list
    dns-update-map listnames
    dns-update-map <name> show

    dns-update-map <name> get <attribute>
    dns-update-map <name> set <attribute>=<value [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    dns-update-map <name> unset <attribute>

    dns-update-map <name> push 

  Description
 
    The dns-update-map command lets you define and manage DNS update
    configuration maps. A DNS update map defines an update relationship
    between a DHCP policy and a list of DNS zones. The update map is 
    designed to coordinate:

       - DNS servers or Highly Available (HA) DNS server pairs
       - DNS update ACLs or update policies
       - DHCP servers or failover server pairs
       - DHCP policy selection

    An update map applies to all primary zones that the DNS server
    manages, and all scopes that the DHCP server manages.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    dhcp, failover-pair, dns, ha-dns-pair, dhcp-dns-update, acl, update-policy
 
  Attributes
 
 dhcp-client-class nameref(ClientClass)
 
If dhcp-policy-selector=use-client-class-policy, this attribute
specifies the named client-class embedded policy which
should specify the DnsUpdateConfig referenced in this map.
A new embedded policy will be created if one does not exist
when the map is applied.
 dhcp-named-policy nameref(Policy)
 
If dhcp-policy-selector=use-named-policy, this attribute
specifies the named policy which should specify the DnsUpdateConfig
referenced in this map.
 dhcp-policy-selector enumint(use-named-policy=1, use-client-class-embedded-policy=2, use-scope-embedded-policy=3) default = 1, required
 
Indicates how to find the DHCP Policy to which to attach the
DnsUpdateConfig referenced in the dns-config attribute. If a
named-policy or client-class-embedded-policy is selected,
the referenced policy and/or client-class must be preconfigured
on the DHCP servers before the map is applied. If
scope-embedded-policy is selected, it is applied to all scopes
on the DHCP servers. A new embedded policy is created if one
does not exist when the map is applied.
 dhcp-servers oid required
 
The DHCP server or DHCP failover pair associated with
this configuration.
 dns-config nameref(DnsUpdateConfig) required
 
The DnsUpdateConfig object associated with this configuration.
 dns-servers oid required
 
The DNS server or HA pair associated with
this configuration.
 dns-update-acl amelist
 
The update-acl to apply to zones referenced by the
DnsUpdateConfig in this map.  If this attribute is set, then the
value (if any) of the dns-update-policy-list attribute is ignored.
If neither attribute is set, then a simple update-acl will be
constructed enabling just the dhcp-servers to perform dns updates,
using the IP address(es) of the single DHCP server or failover pair,
and, if specified, the server-key from the DnsUpdateConfig referenced
in the dns-config attribute.
 dns-update-policy-list nameref(UpdatePolicy)
 
The list of DNS update policies to apply to zones referenced by the
DnsUpdateConfig in this map.  If the attribute dns-update-acl
is set, then this attribute is ignored.
If neither attribute is set, then a simple update-acl will be
constructed enabling just the dhcp-servers to perform dns updates,
using the IP address(es) of the single DHCP server or failover pair,
and, if specified, the server-key from the DnsUpdateConfig referenced
in the dns-config attribute.
 name string required,unique
 
The name of this managed DNS update configuration.
exit
 
    exit - Exits the current nrcmd session.

  Synopsis
 
    exit 

  Description
 
    The exit command lets you exit the current nrcmd session.  If you have
    unsaved changes, they will be flushed to the database before the session
    exits.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    save(nrcmd)
 
export
 
    export - exports configuration information to a file

  Synopsis
 
    export leases -server 
       [ -vpn <vpn-name> ] 
       [ -time-ascii | -time-numeric ] <file>

    export leases -client 
       [ -vpn <vpn-name> ] 
       [ -time-ascii | -time-numeric ] <file>

    export zone <zone name> {ccm | dns | both} [<file>]

    export zonenames {forward | reverse | both} [<file>]

    export hostfile [<file>]

    export addresses [file=<CSV text file> | { database=<data source name>
       user=<db user name> password=<db user password>
       [table=<table name>] } ] [config=<config file>]
          [vpn=<vpn-name>]
             [dhcp-only] [time-ascii | time-numeric]

    export keys <file>

    export key <keyname> <filename>

    export option-set <option-set name> <filename>

  Description
 
    The export command lets you export data in one of several common
    formats.

    export leases -server 
       [ -vpn <vpn-name> ] 
       [ -time-ascii | -time-numeric ] <file>
       Use the export leases -server command to export the 
       current and expired leases to a file in the DHCP server's log
       directory.

    export leases -client 
       [ -vpn <vpn-name> ] 
       [ -time-ascii | -time-numeric ] <file> 
       Use the export leases -client command to export the 
       current leases to the specified file or the standard output.

    export zone <zone name> {ccm | dns | both} [<file>]
       Use the export zone command to export the resource
       records in the specified zone.  BIND can parse the format of 
       the output.

    export zonenames {forward | reverse | both} [<file>] 
       Use the export zonenames command to export the list of zones
       that match a given criteria.

    export hostfile [<file>] 
       Use the export hostfile command to export the CCM DNS 
       information in the cluster in a UNIX hostfile format.

    export addresses [file=<CSV text file> | { database=<data source name>
       user=<db user name> password=<db user password>
       [table=<table name>] } ] [config=<config file>]
          [vpn=<vpn-name>]
             [dhcp-only] [time-ascii | time-numeric]
       Use the export addresses command to export DNS and IP Address
       information to a CSV (comma-separated value) text file, or the 
       standard output, or to an ODBC database.

       Output of the export command can include the VPN specification. 
       The value can be any valid, predefined VPN name, or the reserved 
       words global and all. 

          global--indicates all addresses not in any of the defined VPNs. 
          all--indicates all VPNs, including the global one. 

       If you omit the VPN, the current one applies, as set by the 
       session set current-vpn command. If the current VPN is undefined, 
       the global VPN applies. Network Registrar adds the ID of the VPN at
       the end of each output line in the export file.

     Use these conventions for export addresses keywords:

       Configuration file
       If it exists, the default configuration file 
       is .nrconfig. To use a configuration file other than the default 
       file, use the config keyword to identify your configuration file. 
       If there is an [export-addresses] section in the configuration file, 
       the export command uses the clusters that the section specifies 
       instead of the default cluster. If you omit a configuration file, the
       export addresses command looks for a default .nrconfig file. This is 
       the same configuration file that the report command uses. 

       Network Registrar looks for the file first in your current directory, 
       then in your home directory, and finally in the install-path/conf 
       directory. It uses the first file it encounters. Each line of the 
       configuration file must begin with the character # (comment), a 
       section header enclosed in square brackets, or a parameter=value 
       pair or its continuation. For example:

          [export addresses] 
          clusters=machine1 username password, machine2 username password [...] 

       Network Registrar strips leading white space from each line and ignores 
       blank lines.

       dhcp-only
       This keyword causes the command to output only DHCP information and 
       not DNS information.

       Database tables
       The table keyword specifies the database table to which the command 
       exports address information. If you omit this keyword, 
       Network Registrar writes to the default table name ip_addresses. 
       If the table already exists in the specified database when you run the
       export command, Network Registrar clears (and resets the columns) 
       before writing the new data. Network Registrar does not provide a 
       warning or confirmation if it clears an existing table.

       Date and time
       The optional time-ascii and time-numeric keywords specify how to 
       output date/time fields to a CSV text file and when the target 
       database does not support the timestamp data type. The default
       is time-ascii.

    If no vpn is specified, the current-vpn  of the session is used.
    is used.
    
    When specifying a <vpn-name> to any export command which supports
    it, the name "global" (with or without the quotes) will specify
    the global (i.e., unnamed or default) vpn.  The name "all" (also
    with or without the quotes) will specify that all vpn (including
    the global one) should be exported.

    You can use the export command to export the TSIG keys that are
    configured on a cluster with the export keys command. You can
    also specify to export a single key with the export key <keyname>
    command. These commands will generate key definitions in BIND
    syntax so they may be either imported into other clusters or copyied
    into BIND configurations.

    The export option-set command writes out a text file that may be
    loaded into a running server with the option-set import command.
  
  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    session current-vpn
 
extension
 
    extension - Integrates user-written DHCP extensions into the DHCP server

  Synopsis
 
    extension list  
    extension listnames
    extension <name> create <lang> <file> <entry> [<attribute>=<value>...]
    extension <name> delete 
    extension <name> get <attribute>
    extension <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    extension <name> unset <attribute> 
    extension <name> show

  Description
 
    The extension command lets you configure extension modules. To
    extend the DHCP server with an extension module, you must do the
    following:
    
    1. Write the extension module in either Tcl, C or C++, and install
    it in the server scripts directory.
    
    2. Configure the DHCP server to recognize this extension, using
    this command. 
    
    3. Attach the configured extension to one or more DHCP script
    points using the dhcp attachExtension command.

  Examples
 

    Create a tcl script, sample1, that does something.
    nrcmd> extension sample1 create tcl sample1.tcl sample_ext


  Status
 

  See Also
    dhcp AttachExtension
 
  Attributes
 
 entry string required
 
Identifies the entry point for the module.  This function is
called from any extension point to which this module is bound.
 file string required
 
Provides the filename relative to the directory extensions in the
installation, or as an absolute pathname, but this cannot contain
a sequence of two dots (..).
 init-args string
 
Describes the arguments that should be passed to the init-entry
point function. The arguments are passed in the environment
dictionary using the key "Arguments".
 init-entry string
 
Specifies the  name of the init entry point. If  set, the server
calls this function when the server loads the module.
 lang enumstr(Tcl=1, Dex=2)
 
Describes the language in which the script or module is implemented.
'Tcl' indicates that the module is a Tcl script (tcl8.4). 'Dex'
indicates that the module is a shared object with C calling
interfaces.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
Designates the script or module. The DHCP server uses
this name to assign scripts or modules to script points.
failover-pair
 
    failover-pair - configures a DHCP failover relationship

  Synopsis
 
    failover-pair <name> create <main-cluster/address>
                                <backup-cluster/address>
                                [<attribute>=<value> ...]
                                [addMatch [<vpn>/]<address/mask>]

    failover-pair <name> delete 
    failover-pair list
    failover-pair listnames
    failover-pair <name> show

    failover-pair <name> get <attribute>
    failover-pair <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    failover-pair <name> unset <attribute>

    failover-pair <name> addMatch [<vpn>/]<address/mask>
    failover-pair <name> removeMatch [<vpn>/]<subnet/mask>
    failover-pair <name> listMatches

    failover-pair <name> sync <update | complete | exact> 
                         [<main-to-backup | backup-to-main>]

  Description
 
    The failover-pair command lets you define and manage the failover
    relationship between a main and backup server.
    
    Either the main and backup clusters or the main and backup server
    IP addresses can be specified with the create command. If the 
    main-server and backup-server addresses are set, the cluster addresses 
    will only be used for synchronization of the server configuration.
    The referenced clusters must be configured with appropriate connection 
    credentials for the sync command to be successful.
        
  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    cluster
 
  Attributes
 
 backup oid(CCMCluster)
 
Identifies the cluster that contains the backup server for
a failover pair.
 backup-pct percent default = 10%
 
Controls the percentage of available addresses that the main
server sends to the backup server.  Set this value
on the main server.  If it is set on a backup server, it is
ignored (to enable copying of configurations).
Unless you explicitly set this value on a scope and you disable
load balancing, the value set here becomes the default value.
 backup-server ipaddr
 
Controls the IP address used for the failover protocol on the
backup server. If this value is unset, the address specified
for the backup cluster is used. Cisco recommends setting
this attribute only if the server is configured with
different interfaces for configuration management and clients
requests. Always configure the failover protocol with the
interface used to serve clients.
 dynamic-bootp-backup-pct percent
 
Determines the percentage of available addresses that the
main server sends to the backup server for scopes on which dynamic
BOOTP is enabled.  If defined, it must be defined on
the main server.  If it is defined in a backup server, it is
ignored (to enable copying of configurations).  If it is not
defined at all or the value is 0, the "backup-pct" is
used instead.  This parameter is separate from "backup-pct"
because if dynamic BOOTP is enabled on a scope, a server
will never, even in PARTNER-DOWN state, grant leases on
addresses that are available to the other server because
they can never safely be assumed to be available again.
The MCLT has no meaning for dynamic BOOTP leases.
 failover bool default = true
 
Enables failover configuration. If you disable this attribute,
you turn off failover on attached subnets without changing
configuration fundamentals.
 load-balancing bool default = disabled
 
Determines whether load balancing (RFC 3074) is enabled on a failover
pair. The default is disabled. When enabled, the backup-pct is
ignored and the main and backup server evenly split the client
load and available leases for all scopes in the failover
relationship (that is, as if backup-pct were configured at 50%).
 main oid(CCMCluster)
 
Identifies the cluster with the main server for a failover pair.
 main-server ipaddr
 
Controls the IP address used for the failover protocol on the
main server. If this value is unset, the address specified
for the main cluster is used. Cisco recommends setting
this attribute only if the server is configured with
different interfaces for configuration management and clients
requests. Always configure the failover protocol with the
interface used to serve clients.
 mclt time default = 60m
 
Sets the maximum client lead time in seconds. This attribute
controls how far ahead of the backup server that you can make
the client lease expiration. You must define this value on both
the main and backup servers, and make sure the value is
identical on both servers.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
Names a failover pair.
 persist-lease-data-on-partner-ack bool default = true
 
Controls when the main server updates its database. Normally,
the main server updates its database when the backup server
ACKs it with what the backup knows.  Disabling this capability
speeds up the main server, but after a restart the main server
is out of sync with what the backup knows, and may offer all
clients one lease period with a renew time of the current time
plus the MCLT.
 poll-lease-hist-interval rangetime(0-1y)
 
Specifies how often to collect lease history from the DHCP
server for this cluster. If set to 0, no poll occurs.
 poll-lease-hist-offset rangetime(0-24h)
 
Provides a fixed time of day for lease history polling.
This time is interpreted as a time of day offset, with 0 being
12 midnight, provided the polling interval is less than 24 hours,
and the offset value is less than the polling interval. If the
offset value is greater than the polling interval, or the
interval is greater than 24 hours, the offset will be ignored.
The scheduler for polling will ensure that the first polling
event occurs at the offset time. For example, if you set the
interval to 4 hours and the offset to 2am, the polling would
occur at 2am, 6am, 10am, 2pm, 6pm and 10pm.
 poll-lease-hist-retry rangeint(0-4)
 
Specifies how often to retry if the server fails to poll
the data.
 poll-lease-hist-server-first enumint(mainserver=0, backupserver=1) default = mainserver
 
Specifies which server to poll first:
    0  main server
    1  backup server
 poll-subnet-util-interval rangetime(0-1y)
 
Specifies how often to collect the subnet utilization data
from DHCP server for this cluster. If set to 0, no poll
occurs.
 poll-subnet-util-offset rangetime(0-24h)
 
Provides a fixed time of day for subnet utilization polling.
This time is interpreted as a time of day offset, with 0 being
12 midnight, provided the polling interval is less than 24 hours,
and the offset value is less than the polling interval. If the
offset value is greater than the polling interval, or the
interval is greater than 24 hours, the offset will be ignored.
The scheduler for polling will ensure that the first polling
event occurs at the offset time. For example, if you set the
interval to 4 hours and the offset to 2am, the polling would
occur at 2am, 6am, 10am, 2pm, 6pm and 10pm.
 poll-subnet-util-retry rangeint(0-4)
 
Specifies how often to retry if the server fails to poll
the data.
 poll-subnet-util-server-first enumint(mainserver=0, backupserver=1) default = mainserver
 
Specifies which server to poll first:
    0  main server
    1  backup server
 safe-period time default = 24h
 
Controls the safe period, in seconds.  It does not have to be
the same on both main and backup servers.  It only has meaning
if use-safe-period is enabled.  Define this attribute on the
main server.  If it is defined on a backup server, it is ignored
(to enable copying of configurations).
 scopetemplate oid
 
Associates a scope template with a specified failover pair.
 use-safe-period bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether a server can enter PARTNER-DOWN state without
an operator command. If disabled, a server never enters
PARTNER-DOWN  without an operator command.
Define this attribute on the main server.  If it is defined
on a backup server, it is ignored (to enable copying of
configurations).
group
 
    group - Configures a named group of administrators

  Synopsis
 
    group <name> create [<attribute>=<value>] 
    group <name> delete
    group list  
    group listnames
    group <name> show
    group <name> set =<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    group <name> get <attribute>
    group <name> unset <attribute>

    group <name> enable <attribute>
    group <name> disable <attribute>

  Description
 
    The group command configures the specified group of administrators.
    Administrator groups are used to associate an admin to one or
    more roles that control access to operations and data.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    admin, role
 
  Attributes
 
 desc string
 
Describes this group.
 name string required,unique
 
Names this group of administrator roles.
ha-dns-pair
 
    ha-dns-pair - configure a High Availability DNS relationship

  Synopsis
 
    ha-dns-pair <name> create <main-cluster/address>
                              <backup-cluster/address>
                              [<attribute>=<value> ...]

    ha-dns-pair <name> delete 
    ha-dns-pair list
    ha-dns-pair listnames
    ha-dns-pair <name> show

    ha-dns-pair <name> get
 <attribute>
    ha-dns-pair <name> set
 <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    ha-dns-pair <name> unset
 <attribute>

    ha-dns-pair <name>  sync  <  update | complete | exact>
                  <  main-to-backup | backup-to-main> [from-regional] > 

  Description
 
    The ha-dns-pair command lets you define and manage the
    High Availability relationship between a main and backup DNS server.
    
    Either the main and backup clusters or the main and backup server
    IP addresses can be specified with the create command. If the 
    ha-dns-main-server and ha-dns-backup-server addresses are set,  
    the cluster addresses will only be used for synchronization of the  
    server configuration. The referenced clusters must be configured  
    with appropriate connection credentials for the sync command to be 
    successful.
    
    Note: When running in local mode, the 'from-regional' sync
    option does not apply. Regardless of the synchronization option
    (from-regional, main-to-backup, backup-to-main), properties
    set on the ha-dns-pair will always replace values present on
    the DNS server object.
        
  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    cluster
 
  Attributes
 
 backup oid(CCMCluster)
 
The cluster reference for the backup server in this DNS HA
pair relationship.
 ha-dns bool default = enabled
 
This attribute enables/disables HA on the DNS server.
 ha-dns-backup-server ipaddr
 
The IP address to use for the HA DNS protocol on the backup server.
If this value is unset, the address specified for the backup cluster
will be used. In general, it should only be set if the server is
configured with different interfaces for configuration management
and update requests. The HA DNS protocol should always be
configured with the interface used to service updates.
 ha-dns-main-server ipaddr
 
The IP address to use for the HA DNS protocol on the main server.
If this value is unset, the address specified for the main cluster
will be used. In general, it should only be set if the server is
configured with different interfaces for configuration management
and update requests. The HA DNS protocol should always be
configured with the interface used to service updates.
 main oid(CCMCluster)
 
The cluster reference for the main server in this DNS HA
pair relationship.
 name string required,unique
 
The name of the DNS HA pair relationship.
help
 
    help - provides online help

  Synopsis
 
    help
    help <cmd> [<section> ...]

  Description
 
    The help command provides online help.
    
    If you type help without arguments, it displays a list of commands.
    If you type help with an argument, it displays the man page
    information for the command with that name.  
    
    You can select the sections of the man page output by specifying
    the section names after the 'help <cmd>' command.  The section names
    are:
    SYNOPSIS    the valid syntax for the command
    DESCRIPTION a textual description of the command behavior
    EXAMPLES    examples of using the command
    PROPERTIES  description of the attributes associated with the command
    STATUS      description of the status codes returned by this command

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> help 
    100 Ok
    ... displays the list of commands
    
    nrcmd> help dns
    100 Ok
    ... displays the contents of the dns page
    
    nrcmd> help dns synopsis
    100 Ok
    SYNOPSIS
    dns 
    help <cmd> [<section> ...]

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
import
 
    import - loads server configuration information from a file

  Synopsis
 

    import keys <file> 
    import leases <file> 
    import named.boot <file> 
    import named.conf <file> 
    import option-set <file> 

  Description
 
    The import command lets you import lease information into the
    DHCP server configuration or BIND configuration information 
    into the DNS server configuration.
    
    import leases <file>    
       Before you can import leases, you need to perform several
       configuration steps:
    
       1. Configure scopes in the DHCP server for the leases
       that are going to be imported.  (see the scope command.)
    
       2. If the host names for the leases are going to be dynamically 
       entered into DNS as part of the import, configure zones in the
       DNS server to allow dynamic updates. (see the zone command)
    
       3. Set the DHCP server to import mode so that it will not
       respond to other lease requests during the lease importing.
       (see the dhcp command)
    
       After the leases have been imported, take the DHCP server out of
       import mode so that it will respond to other lease requests.
    
    import named.boot <file>    
       Imports an existing BIND 4.x.x configuration into DNS by parsing
       the BIND named.boot file and reading the zone data from the
       associated BIND zone files.

    import named.conf <file> <protected | unprotected>
       Imports an existing BIND 8 or BIND 9 configuration into DNS 
       by parsing the BIND named.conf file and reading the zone data
       from the associated BIND zone files. If no name-protection 
       option is specified, the default is protected.

    import keys
       Imports TSIG keys into the Cluster configuration by reading 
       in key data from a file. This file can be generated by running
       the key generator utility (cnr_keygen). The keys are written in
       BIND syntax and therefore can also be copied from a valid BIND
       configuration.

    import option-set
       Imports an option-set from specified file. Compatible files can
       be generated using the 'export option-set' command.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
key
 
    key - Manage TSIG key objects

  Synopsis
 
    key list 
    key listnames
    key <name> show
    key <name> create <secret> [<attribute>=<value>...]
    key <name> delete
    key <name> get <attribute>
    key <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    key <name> unset <attribute> 
    
    
  Description
 
    The key command creates and manages transaction signature (TSIG)
    keys for DNS updates, zone transfers, queries, and recursions. 
    TSIG security, as defined in RFC 2845, enables both DNS and DHCP
    servers to authenticate DNS updates. TSIG security uses the 
    HMAC-MD5 (or keyed MD5) algorithm to generate a signature that 
    is used to authenticate the requests and responses. The DHCP 
    server uses TSIG keys to create TSIG resource records while 
    processing DNS updates.

    To configure TSIG security on a DHCP server, you must first 
    create a shared key, then enable DNS update for your scopes 
    by setting the dynamic-dns attribute to update-all). Also, 
    enable the dynamic-dns-tsig attribute for forward or reverse
    zones for the scope or on the server level. 

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 algorithm enumstr(hmac-md5=1) default = hmac-md5
 
The algorithm that this key is used with.  Currently we only
support hmac-md5.
 id int
 
Displays an integer id for the key.
 secret key required
 
A base64 encoded string used for transaction authentication.
 security-type enumstr(TSIG=1) default = TSIG
 
The type of security that this key is going to be used for.
Currently we only support TSIG keys.
 time-skew rangetime(1s-60m) default = 5m
 
The time stamp fudge factor (amount that the time values can
differ).
ldap
 
    ldap - Specifies the LDAP remote server's properties

  Synopsis
 
    ldap list 
    ldap listnames
    ldap <name> create <hostname> [<attribute>=<value>...]
    ldap <name> delete 
    ldap <name> get <attribute>
    ldap <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    ldap <name> unset <attribute> 
    
    ldap <name> disable <attribute>
    ldap <name> enable <attribute>
    ldap <name> show
    
    ldap <name> setEntry <dictionary> <key>=<value>
    ldap <name> getEntry <dictionary> <key>
    ldap <name> unsetEntry <dictionary> <key>

  Description
 
    The ldap command configures the  LDAP servers that the DHCP server
    should communicate with. The DHCP server can read client configuration
    information from or write lease information to an LDAP enabled directory.

    Use the setEntry, getEntry, and unsetEntry commands to set, query,
    and clear elements of the various dictionary properties in the LDAP server 
    configuration. These dictionary properties provide a convenient mapping 
    from strings keys to string values.

    The dictionary values for the setEntry command are:

    create-dictionary
    create-string-dictionary
    env-dictionary
    query-dictionary
    update-dictionary

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 can-create bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether a particular LDAP server can create new entries
to use to store lease state updates. See the create properties:
create-dictionary, create-string-dictionary, dn-create-format,
create-object-classes.
 can-query bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether a particular LDAP server can be used for client
queries. See the query properties: env-dictionary,
query-dictionary, search-attribute, search-filter, search-path,
and search-scope.
 can-update bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether a particular LDAP server can be used to store
lease state updates. See the update properties: update-dictionary,
update-search-attribute, update-search-filter, update-search-path
update-search-scope.
 connections int default = 1
 
Determines the number of connections that the server can make to an
LDAP object.
Network Registrar creates one thread for each connection configured
in an LDAP object, and each thread can have a maximum of LDAP
requests associated with its request queue.
This is primarily a performance-tuning attribute. In some cases,
having more than one connection can improve overall throughput.
 create-dictionary string
 
Maps LDAP attributes to DHCP lease attributes.  If an entry does
not exist and needs to be created, entries in this dictionary
are set to the value of its corresponding DHCP lease attribute.
 create-object-classes string
 
If can-create is enabled, specifies the object classes from
which a new entry inherits.
 create-string-dictionary string
 
Maps LDAP attributes to user specified strings. If an entry does not
exist and needs to be created, entries in this dictionary are set to
the matching string.
 default-attribute-value string default =
 
Provides a default attribute value (a string) to insert in any LDAP
attribute whose associated lease attribute values are not present in
the lease.
 dn-attribute string
 
Determines how the server constructs the distinguished name (DN)
of the LDAP entry to update or create.
If the server can use one of the lease attributes, it formats the
specified dn-attribute using the dn-format  string to construct
the object filter that specifies the LDAP server to modify.
 dn-create-format string
 
Provides the distinguished name (DN) for entry creation. A % is
required at the entry level and is replaced by the value of the
dn-attribute. If you can construct the DN of the LDAP object created
from one of the lease?s attributes,  the server formats the specified
dn-attribute using the dn-format string.
 dn-format string
 
If the DN of the ldap object that is to be updated can be
constructed from one of the lease's attributes, the specified
dn-attribute will be formatted using the dn-format string to
construct the query filter.
 enabled bool default = true
 
Enables or disables this LDAP remote server.
Prevents DHCP from attempting to use an LDAP server that is
known to be unavailable.
 env-dictionary string
 
Specifies the environment dictionary that allows the server to
retrieve additional LDAP attributes along with client-entry
attributes. If any of these are present in a query's results,
their values are made available to scripts through the request's
environment dictionary. The LDA{ value is keyed by the value in
the LDAP query env-dictionary.
 hostname string required
 
Sets the hostname of the server to connect to. LDAP servers require
hostnames.
 limit-requests bool default = enabled
 
Controls whether there should be a limit on the number of
outstanding queries on each LDAP client connection. See the limit
property: max-requests.
 max-referrals int default = 0
 
Limits the number of LDAP referrals the server follows when
querying. A value of zero prohibits following referrals.
 max-requests int default = 20
 
Controls the number of outstanding queries.
If you have set the 'limit-requests' feature to TRUE, any single
LDAP connection will limit the number of outstanding queries to
'max-requests.' You can improve performance by limiting the
number of outstanding queries.
 name string required,unique
 
An arbitrary name used to refer to an individual server.
 password string
 
Sets the password of a user with access to the parts of the directory
that DHCP uses. Because you can configure LDAP servers to allow
anonymous access, this is optional.
 port int
 
Specifies the port on the remote server to connect to.
 preference int default = 1
 
Specifies the preference order in which LDAP servers are used.
A positive integer greater than or equal to one. One (1) is the
highest preference value.
 query-dictionary string
 
Maps LDAP attributes and DHCP attribute names. The server attempts
to retrieve all LDAP attributes specified in the dictionary. When a
query succeeds, the values for any ldap attributes that it returns
are set in the corresponding client-entry attribute.
 query-timeout time default = 3s
 
Specifies the number of seconds the DHCP server waits for a response
to individual LDAP Query requests. After a query request times out,
the DHCP server will drop the request and not process it again on
another LDAP connection or LDAP Server. A query-timeout value of 3
seconds is a good value.
Note: The timeout attribute configures the timeout for LDAP
Update and Create requests.
 referral-attr string
 
Indicates whether an LDAP response is a referral. The referral may
or may not contain the DN for this query. If the DN is present (the
default), the server uses it as the search path, along with a
wildcard search-scope in the query that follows the referral. If not,
the server builds the search path by formatting the data in the
referral attribute with the referral-filter, using the existing
search scope.
 referral-filter string
 
In the absence of a distinguished name (DN), controls how a
server formats referral-attr data. In such cases, the server formats
the referral attribute's data with this filter expression to build a
search path that uses the existing search-scope for the LDAP server.
 search-filter string
 
Specifies the filter to apply in the client-entry query. The server
formats the client's MAC address using the filter to specify the
object that contains the client-entry data.
 search-path string
 
Designates an object in the directory to use as a query
starting-point. Together, the path and the search-scope control the
portion of the directory that the server will search.
 search-scope enumint(BASE=0, ONELEVEL=1, SUBTREE=2) default = SUBTREE
 
Controls the comprehensiveness of a search:
If you specify the  scope to be SUBTREE, the server searches all
the children of the searchpath.
If you specify the scope to be ONELEVEL, the server searches only
the immediate children of the base object.
If you specify the scope to be BASE, the server searches only the
base object itself.
 threadwaittime mstime default = 100
 
Sets the number of milliseconds that an LDAP client connection
polls for the results of outstanding queries or updates.
 timeout time default = 10s
 
Controls the number of seconds the DHCP server waits for a response
to an individual LDAP update or create request. If an LDAP request
times out, the DHCP server resubmits it to other LDAP connections.
Further, if the DHCP server receives no response (that is, a result
for an LDAP update or create) from an LDAP connection for the timeout
seconds, DHCP marks this LDAP connection as 'Inactive' and tears down
the connection, then reconnects.  A timeout value of 10 seconds is a
good value for LDAP create and update operations.
Note: You can configure a separate timeout for LDAP query operations
using the query-timeout attribute.
 update-dictionary string
 
Maps LDAP attributes to DHCP lease attributes.  When an LDAP object
is modified, each LDAP attribute that is present in this dictionary
is set to the value of its corresponding DHCP lease attribute.
 update-search-attribute string
 
If the DN of the object to be updated cannot be determined
directly, the DHCP server must issue a query to retrieve the DN.
In that case, the DHCP server uses data in the lease's
'search-attribute,' and formats it using the
'update-search-filter' expression.
 update-search-filter string
 
If the DN of the object to be updated cannot be determined
directly, the DHCP server must issue a query to retrieve the DN.
In that case, the DHCP server uses data in the lease's
'search-attribute,' and formats it using the
'update-search-filter' expression.
 update-search-path string
 
Determines the starting point for the portion of the directory
containing  LDAP objects for the server to update.
 update-search-scope enumint(BASE=0, ONELEVEL=1, SUBTREE=2)
 
With update-search-path, controls the portion of the directory
that contains the objects to be updated.
The scope can be SUBTREE (includes all children of the
searchpath), ONELEVEL (includes only the immediate children of the
base object), or BASE (includes only the base object itself).
 username string
 
Designates a user with access to the parts of the directory that DHCP
uses. Because you can configure LDAP servers to allow anonymous
access, this is optional.
lease
 
    lease - Manage DHCP lease objects

  Synopsis
 
    lease list [-vpn=<vpn-name>] [-count-only]
    lease list -macaddr <mac-address> [-vpn=<vpn-name>]
    lease list -subnet <ip-address> <mask>
    lease list -lansegment <ip-address> <mask>
    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> [show]

    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> get <attribute>

    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> activate 
    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> deactivate
    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> force-available
    
    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> macaddr
    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> get-scope-name

    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> send-reservation
    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> delete-reservation

  Description
 
    The lease command lets you view and manipulate current DHCP leases
    in the cluster.  
    
    When you specify the lease on which one of these commands is to
    operate, you may optionally specify a <vpn-name> in which the
    <ip-address> is to be found.  You may specify the name of a
    currently defined vpn as the <vpn-name>, or use the reserved vpn
    name "global" (without the quotes) to specify the operation on
    leases which are not in any explicitly defined vpn.  If you do
    not specify a <vpn-name>, then the session's current-vpn is used
    as a default.

    lease list [-vpn=<vpn-name>] [-count-only]
    lease list -macaddr <mac-address> [-vpn=<vpn-name>]
    lease list -subnet <ip-address> <mask>
    lease list -lansegment <ip-address> <mask>
    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> [show]
       The list command lists leases in the DHCP server. Only the
       leases in the current-vpn or specified vpn-name are listed.
       <vpn-name> may be "all" (without the quotes) to request leases
       in all vpns. If -count-only is specified, only the count of
       the number of leases is returned (no leases are displayed).

       The list -subnet command lists all leases in a subnet 
       (scopes whose address and mask match the query).

       The list -lansegment command lists all leases in a LAN
       segment, meaning all leases in scopes whose address and mask
       match the query, as well as leases in secondary scopes whose
       primary scope's address and mask match the query.

       The list -macaddr command lists all leases that are associated 
       with the specified MAC address.
       
       Note: The list -macaddr command for Network Registrar 6.3 
       and earlier clusters can be extremely slow. In release 7.0
	 and later, performance is improved. The recommended syntax 
       is -macaddr=<mac-address>.

    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> activate 
    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> deactivate
       The activate and deactivate commands tell the DHCP server 
       to make the specified lease active or inactive.  An inactive
       lease is not given out, even if it is in the available state. 
       Making a currently leased lease inactive does not affect its 
       behavior until it has expired and become available again.
    
    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> force-available
       The force-available command forces the specified lease into the
       available state.
    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> macaddr
       The macaddr command provides the MAC address associated with
       the specified lease.

     lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> get-scope-name
       The get-scope-name command provides the scope to which the 
       lease belongs.
   
    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> send-reservation
       The now-deprecated send-reservation command sends an existing
       reservation immediately to the DHCP server without requiring a
       server reload.  You must first run the scope <scope-name> 
       addReservation command for this reservation.  
       The recommended sequence is:

	   nrcmd> scope <scope-name> addReservation <ip-address> <mac-address>
	   nrcmd> save
	   nrcmd> lease <ip-address> send-reservation

       This sequence ensures that the configuration database contains
       the lease and reservation as well as the running server, since
       the send-reservation command directly affects only the running
       server's in-memory database, and does not itself persist past
       the next server reload.
    
    lease [<vpn-name>/]<ip-address> delete-reservation
       The now-deprecated delete-reservation command deletes an
       existing reservation immediately from the DHCP server without
       requiring a server reload.  It is important to ensure that 
       the configuration which the DHCP server uses for the next server 
       reload also has the reservation removed. The recommended sequence
       is:

          nrcmd> lease <ip-address> delete-reservation
          nrcmd> scope  <scope-name> removeReservation <ip-address>
          nrcmd> save

    Note: The send-reservation and delete-reservation commands are 
    deprecated. Use synchronous scope-edit-mode instead. These commands
    are provided for command-syntax compatibility with prior versions
    and only support mac-address based reservations.


  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    session current-vpn
 
  Attributes
 
 address ipaddr
 
Specifies the IP address of the lease.  The address is added at
creation.
 binding-end-time date
 
Within the DHCPlease database, holds the time at which a
lease binding ended.
 binding-start-time date
 
Within the DHCP lease database, shows the time at which a
lease binding began.
 client-binary-client-id blob
 
Displays the binary form of the client's client-identifier, if any.
 client-dns-name string
 
Displays the client DNS name, which the DHCP server attempted
(possibly successfully) to enter into the DNS server for
a specified client.
This attribute is related to the client-host-name, but may not be
identical due to name collisions in the DNS server database.
 client-domain-name string
 
Displays the domain (if any) to which the client's DNS name belongs.
 client-flags flags(client-valid=1, client-id-created-from-mac-address=2, client-dns-name-up-to-date=3, client-up-to-date-in-mcd=4, reverse-dns-up-to-date=5, dns-update-pending=9, client-fqdn-present=10, client-updates-name=11, clear-host-name=7, host-name-has-changed=6, domain-name-has-changed=8, use-test-before-update=12, avoid-dns-retry=13, dual-zone-dns-update=14, client-invalid-due-to-macaddress=15, in-limitation-list=16, used-over-limit-client-class=17, synthesized-dns-name=18, reservation-uses-client-id=19, client-id-from-override-id=20, client-id-from-string=21)
 
Displays any of the following values associated with the client
lease state:
   2  client-id-created-from-mac-address
      Indicates that the client-id was created for internal use
      from the client supplied MAC address.  It is never
      reported externally if this is true.
   3  client-dns-name-up-to-date
      Indicates that the client-dns-name (A) is actually current
      in the DNS server database.
   5  reverse-dns-up-to-date
      Indicates that the reverse (PTR) DNS entry is current in
      the DNS database.
   9  dns-update-pending
      Indicates that a DNS operation is pending for this client.
   16 in-limitation-list
      Indicates that this lease is presently in a limitation list
      using the limitation-id shown.
These are for internal use only:
  client-valid
  client-fqdn-present
  client-updates-name
  clear-host-name
  host-name-has-changed
  domain-name-has-changed
  use-test-before-update
  avoid-dns-retry
  dual-zone-dns-update
  client-invalid-due-to-macaddress
  used-over-limit-client-class
  synthesize-dns-name
  reservation-uses-client-id
  client-id-from-override-id
  client-id-from-string
 client-host-name string
 
Displays the DNS name that the client requested the DHCP server
to place in the DNS server.
 client-last-transaction-time date
 
Displays the time when the client most recently contacted the
DHCP server.
 client-mac-addr macaddr
 
Displays the MAC address which the client presented to the DHCP
server.
 client-os-type string
 
Indicates the operating system of the client. This attribute is used
only by the updateSms keyword and has no other purpose. If you
enable failover, the main server transmits this value to the backup
server. The syntax of this attribute?s value is OS-name major.minor.:
Operating system values are as follows:
   Microsoft Windows NT Server
   Microsoft Windows NT Advanced Server
   Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0
   Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 3.51
   Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
   Microsoft Windows 95
   Microsoft Windows 9x
   Microsoft Windows for Workgroups
   Microsoft Windows
   Dos
   Netware
   LANMAN Workstation
   LANMAN Server
   OS/2
   MAC OS
 client-override-client-id blob
 
The value of the override-client-id expression for this
client.  If it appears, it is used as the client-id for
this client.
 client-vendor-class option
 
The most recently received client vendor class option.
 client-vendor-info option
 
The most recently received vendor-specific information
option.
 data-source enumint(unknown=0, main-main=4, backup-main=5, main-backup=6, backup-backup=7)
 
Records the original source of the lease data
and the machine from which the data was retrieved.
   0   unknown
   4   main-main
       Indicates the data originated on the  main server and
       was retrieved from the main server.
   5   backup-main
       Indicates the data originated on the backup server and
       was retrieved from the main server.
   6   main-backup
       Indicates the data originated on the main server and
       was retrieved from the backup server.
   7   backup-backup
       Indicates the data originated on the backup server and
       was retrieved from the backup.
When viewing leases with the UI's, you will see all four
values routinely, especially if load-balancing is enabled.
When looking at lease history records, main-main and
backup-backup are the usual values, but in cases where the
lease history poller has determined that some data may be
missing, then main-backup and backup-main can appear as
well.
 expiration date
 
Displays the date and time the lease will expire.
 flags flags(reserved=1, valid=2, deactivated=3, initialized=4, failover-updated=5, not_in_ranges=6, dynamic=7, backup=8)
 
Displays flags that describe this lease:
   1  reserved
	  The lease is reserved for some MAC address.  The table
      that relates MAC addresses to leases is in the scope.
   3  deactivated
	  The lease is deactivated, which means that it should
      not be used.  Any client which is using a deactivated
      lease will be NAK'ed on their next renewal.
   7  dynamic
	  Last written by server which knew only about the lease
       because it was created by a send-reservation command.
   8  backup
	  Indicates that the state for this lease was recorded by
       a server whose role was backup with respect to this lease.
For internal use only:
    initialized
    valid
    failover-updated
 fwd-dns-update-config-name nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Names the Dns update configuration object  used
to perform dynamic DNS update on a forward zone.
 giaddr ipaddr
 
If present, the contents of the last received non-zero giaddr
field. This represents the relay agent through which the client
and server last communicated.
 lease-renewal-time date
 
Displays the earliest time the client is expected to issue
a renewal request.
 limitation-id blob
 
Displays the value set for a client-class or client limiting the
number of simultaneous active leases a DHCP server can give out
to devices on customer premises.
 relay-agent-auth blob
 
The contents of the 'authentication' suboption 8 of the relay-agent
information option 82 from this client.
 relay-agent-circuit-id blob
 
Displays the circuit-id sub-option of the DHCP relay-agent
information option 82 from this client.
 relay-agent-device-class int
 
The contents of the 'device-class' suboption 4 of the relay-agent
information option 82 from this client.
 relay-agent-option option
 
Displays the contents of the relay-agent information option 82
from the most recent client interaction.
 relay-agent-radius-class string
 
Displays the contents, if any, of the RADIUS class attribute
that was contained in the RADIUS Attributes suboption of the DHCP
relay-agent information option 82 from this client.
 relay-agent-radius-options blob
 
The contents of the 'radius' suboption 7 of the relay-agent
information option 82 from this client.
This suboption has additional structure that is available on
other attributes of this class.
 relay-agent-radius-pool-name string
 
Displays the contents, if any, of the RADIUS framed-pool attribute
88 contained in the RADIUS attributes suboption of the DHCP
relay-agent information option 82 from this client.
 relay-agent-radius-session-timeout int
 
If present, the contents of the RADIUS 'session-timeout' attribute
27 that was contained in the RADIUS Attributes suboption 7 of the
relay-agent information option 82 from this client.
 relay-agent-radius-user string
 
Displays the contents, if any, of the RADIUS user attribute
contained in the RADIUS attributes suboption of the DHCP relay-agent
information option 82 from this client.
 relay-agent-radius-v6-pool-name string
 
If present, the contents of the RADIUS 'v6-pool-name' attribute 100
that was contained in the RADIUS Attributes suboption 7 of the
relay-agent information option 82 from this client.
 relay-agent-radius-vendor-specific blob
 
If present, the contents of the RADIUS 'vendor-specific' attribute
26 that was contained in the RADIUS Attributes suboption 7 of the
relay-agent information option 82 from this client.
 relay-agent-remote-id blob
 
Displays the remote-id sub-option of the DHCP relay-agent
information option 82 from this client.
 relay-agent-server-id-override ipaddr
 
Displays the IP address in the server-id-override sub-option of the
DHCP relay-agent information option 82 from this client.
This value corresponds to one of two suboption numbers:
If the IANA assigned suboption 182 is present in the packet,
that value is returned; otherwise, if the Cisco suboption 152 is
present, that value is returned.
 relay-agent-subnet-selection ipaddr
 
Displays the IP address in the subnet selection sub-option
of the DHCP relay-agent information option 82 from this client.
This value corresponds to one of two suboption numbers:
If the IANA assigned suboption  is present in the packet,
that value is returned; otherwise, if  Cisco suboption 150 is
present, that value is returned.
 relay-agent-subscriber-id string
 
Displays the contents of the subscriber-id suboption of the
relay-agent information option 82 from this client.
 relay-agent-v-i-vendor-class blob
 
The contents of the 'v-i-vendor-class' suboption 9 of the
relay-agent information option 82 from this client.
 relay-agent-vpn-id blob
 
Displays the contents of the vpn-id sub-option of the DHCP
relay-agent information option 82 from this client.
This value corresponds to one of two suboption numbers:
If the IANA assigned suboption 181 is present in the packet,
that value is returned; otherwise, if Cisco suboption 151 is
present, that value is returned.
 reservation-lookup-key blob
 
The lookup key with which a reservation for this lease will be
retrieved.
 rev-dns-update-config-name nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Names the Dns update configuration object used
to perform dynamic DNS update on a reverse zone.
 scope-name nameref(Scope)
 
A reference to the scope that contains this lease.
 start-time-of-state date
 
Displays the time the state changed to its current value.
 state enumint(available=1, offered=2, leased=3, expired=4, unavailable=5, released=6, other-available=7, pending-available=8)
 
Displays the current state of the lease.
   1  available
      The lease is not currently leased by any client. Any
      client information is from the most recent client to
      lease or be offered this lease.
   2  offered
      The lease is offered to the associated client. In many
      cases, the database is not written with information
      concerning offering a lease to a client since there is
      no requirement to update stable storage with this
      information.
   3  leased
      The lease is currently leased to the client whose
      information appears in the lease.
   4  expired
      The client specified has not renewed the lease, and it
      expired. Upon expiration the DNS information for this
      client was scheduled for removal.
   5  unavailable
      The lease is unavailable.  It was made unavailable because
      of some conflict. A ping attempt might have shown that the
      another client using the, or the DHCP server might have
      detected another DHCP server handing out  this IP address,
      or a DHCP client might have declined the lease. Use
      start-time-of-state to determine when the lease became
      unavailable, and look in the log file around that time to
      determine exactly why the lease became unavailable.
   6  released
      The client specified has released the lease, but the
      server was configured to apply a 'release-grace-period'.
      The lease won't be made available until the
      grace-period expires.
   7  other-available
      Used only when failover is enabled.  A lease in the
      other-available state is available for allocation by the
      other server in the failover pair, but not available for
      allocation by this server.
   8  pending-available
      Used only when failover is enabled.  A lease in the
      pending-available state will be available as soon as
      this server can synchronize its available state with
      the other server.
 user-defined-data string
 
This string value is associated with the lease in order to allow
customer applications to relate the lease record to other
databases.  It is not used directly by the DHCP server, but may be
read and written by extensions and expressions.
 vendor-class-id string
 
Displays the vendor-class-id as offered in a DHCP request option 60.
 vpn-id int default = 0
 
Displays the identifier of the DHCP VPN that contains this lease.
lease-notification
 
    lease-notification - Reports scopes with few free leases

  Synopsis
 
    lease-notification available=<number>|<percentage>
                       [config=config file>]
                       [leasing-only]
                       [scopes=<scope name>|<address range>
                        [,<scope name>|<address range>,...]]
                       [[recipients=<recipient>[,<recipient>,...]]
                        [mail-host=<name> [errors-to=<recipient>]] ]
		       [vpn=<vpn-name>] 


  Description
 
    Use the lease-notification command to receive notification
    about the number of available addresses in a scope. This 
    command reports on the scopes for which the number of
    available addresses falls below or equals a set value. You
    can specify the notification limit either as the number of
    free addresses or the percentage of free addresses. You can
    also specify who should receive e-mail notification.    

    Although you can use the lease-notification command interactively,
    its primary use is as an automated command. 
    
       You can specify clusters in several ways:

       -  The default cluster (localhost)

       -  The AIC_CLUSTER environment variable or NT registry entry

       -  The -C flag on the command line

       -  The clusters property in the config file lets you specify
       a group of clusters. For example, to specify several clusters,
       enter the following in the config file:

          # Cluster information for summary reports
           [lease-notification]
          # Clustername Username Password
           clusters=host1 admin passwd1, host2 admin2,host3,
                 host4 admin4 passwd4

        Follow these guidelines for specifying clusters:
          - Separate cluster specifications from each other with commas.
          - Separate arguments for a particular cluster by whitespace.
          - For long lines use continuation lines; you do not continuation 
            escape indicators.  
          - Optionally, specify a user name and password for the cluster.
            If you do not provide a user name or password for a particular
            cluster, Network Registrar uses the last user name or
            password listed. If you do not provide user names or passwords,
            Network Registrar uses the information from the command line
            -N and -P arguments, and then the NT Registry or environment
            variables AIC_NAME and AIC_PASSWORD.  If Network Registrar
            cannot find a user name or password, or the supplied user name
            and password are incorrect, the lease-notification command
            issues a warning for that cluster.

    The lease-notification command output consists of an explanatory header, 
    a table containing a row for each scope in which the number of 
    free addresses is equal to or less than the threshold, and possible 
    warnings related to the scopes and clusters requested.  
  
    The lease-notification command reports the following information
    for each scope in the table:
    
    -  Cluster name
    -  Scope name
    -  Scope network address in the canonical dotted format
    -  Number of high-order bits in the scope subnet mask
    -  Number of addresses in the scope ranges
    -  Percentage of addresses available for lease
    -  Number of addresses available for lease (addresses that 
       are reserved or deactivated are not included as free)

  Lease Notification Keywords
 

    available 
        Specifies either a number or percentage of available addresses.
        If the number or percentage of available addresses is equal to
        or less than the specified value for the scopes being checked,
        Network Registrar generates a report listing information about
        the scopes that reach or exceed the available value.

    config
        Specifies a configuration file. If you don't specify a configur-
        ation file, Network Registrar searches for the default .nrconfig
        file. 

    errors-to
        If you specify a mail-host, you may also specify the email
        address of the sender of the email in order to provide a return
        path for bounced email.  The default value is "postmaster".

    leasing-only
        Specifies that only scopes that can currently offer leases
        are reported.

    mail-host
        On NT, you must specify a mail-host. On Solaris the mail
        host is generally already configured for the sendmail program.
        You can verify that your Solaris system is properly configured
        by issuing the command "date | mail <your-email-address>" and
        observing whether or not the date is emailed to you.

    recipients
        If you specify the email addresses of one or more recipients,
        Network Registrar sends an email report to those addresses.
        Otherwise, Network Registrar directs the report to standard
        output.

    scopes
        The scopes to check either by name or as a range or ranges of
        addresses. Network Registrar checks any scope containing any
        address that falls with in a range of address. If you don't
        list any scopes or addresses, Network Registrar checks all
        scopes managed by the specified cluster.

    vpn
	The VPN from which to select scopes to examine when executing
	this command.  If no VPN name is specified, then the
	current VPN of the session is used.  If the reserved VPN name
	"global" is used, then the global (or unnamed) VPN is used.
	If the reserved VPN name "all" is used, then all scopes from
	all vpns are examined.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    report, export addresses, session current-vpn
 
 

lease6
 
    lease6 - Manage DHCP lease6 objects

  Synopsis
 
    lease6 list [-duid=<client-id>]
                [-lookup-key=<lookup-key> [-blob|-string]]
                [-macaddr=<mac-addr>] [-cm-macaddr=<mac-addr>]
                [-vpn=<vpn-name>] [-count-only]
    lease6 [<vpn-name>/]<ipv6-address> [show]
    lease6 [<vpn-name>/]<ipv6-address> get <attribute>
    lease6 [<vpn-name>/]<ipv6-address> activate 
    lease6 [<vpn-name>/]<ipv6-address> deactivate
    lease6 [<vpn-name>/]<ipv6-address> force-available
    lease6 [<vpn-name>/]<ipv6-address> reconfigure
                   [renew|rebind|information-request] [-unicast|-via-relay]

  Description
 
    The lease6 command lets you view and manipulate the current DHCPv6
    leases in the cluster.  
    
    When you specify the lease on which one of these commands is to
    operate, you may optionally specify a <vpn-name> in which the
    <ipv6-address> is to be found.  Specify the name of a currently
    defined vpn as the <vpn-name>; or use the reserved vpn name
    "global" (without the quotation marks) to specify the operation
    on leases which are not in any explicitly defined VPN.  If you do not
    specify a vpn-name, the current VPN of the session is used.
    
    lease6 list [-duid=<client-id>]
                [-lookup-key=<lookup-key> [-blob|-string]]
                [-macaddr=<mac-addr>] [-cm-macaddr=<mac-addr>]
                [-vpn=<vpn-name>] [-count-only]
       The list command lists DHCPv6 leases in the DHCP server. Only
       the leases in the current VPN or specified vpn-name are listed.
       The vpn-name may be "all" (without the quotation marks) to 
       request leases in all VPNs. If -count-only is specified, only 
       the count of the number of leases is returned (no leases are 
       displayed). If a filter (-duid, -lookup-key, -macaddr, or 
       -cm-macaddr) is specified, only the leases matching the filter
       are displayed.

    lease6 [<vpn-name>/]<ipv6-address> activate 
    lease6 [<vpn-name>/]<ipv6-address> deactivate   
       The activate and deactivate commands tell the DHCP server to make
       the specified lease active or inactive. An inactive lease is not 
       given out, even if it is in the available state.  Making a currently 
       leased lease inactive will not affect its behavior until it has 
       expired and become available again.
    
    lease6 [<vpn-name>/]<ipv6-address> force-available    
       The force-available command forces the specified lease into the 
       available state.

    lease6 [<vpn-name>/]<ipv6-address> reconfigure
       The reconfigure command initiates sending the client a Reconfigure
       message (if the client and server negotiated to allow reconfigure).

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    session
 
 

license
 
    license - Views and updates license information

  Synopsis
 
    license <FLEXlm-filename> create 
    license <key> delete
    license list  
    license listnames
    license <key> [show]
    license <key> get <attribute>
    license showUtilization

  Description
 

    The license command allows you to view, create, or delete the
    FLEXlm licenses for the cluster.  The command (showUtilization)
    also allows you to view the number of utilized IP nodes against
    the RTU's (Right-to-Use).

    NOTE: The license command uses a different syntax when connected
    to releases prior to 7.0. See the documentation for the specific
    release.
    
  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    The "Network Registrar CLI Introduction" section describes how licenses are used in nrcmd.
 
link
 
    link - configures IPv6 network links for use in DHCPv6
    
    Note: dhcp-link is a synonym for compatibility with earlier
    versions.

  Synopsis
 
    link list  
    link listnames
    link <name> create [[template-root-prefix=<prefix>]
                        template=<template-name>]
                       [attribute>=<value> ...]
    link <name> delete
    link <name> set =<value> [<attribute>==<value> ...]
    link <name> get <attribute>
    link <name> unset <attribute>
    link <name> enable <attribute>
    link <name> disable <attribute>
    link <name> [show]

    link <name> listPrefixes
    link <name> listPrefixNames

    link <name> applyTemplate <template-name> [<template-root-prefix>]

  Description
 
    The link command configures IPv6 network links. Links
    group IPv6 prefixes (see the prefix command) together.
    Links are required if multiple prefixes share the same
    physical link.
    
    When creating a link using a template, specify - for the
    <name> to allow the link template's link-name-expr to name
    the link.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    link-template, prefix
 
  Attributes
 
 description string
 
Describes the link.
 embedded-policy obj(0)
 
Refers to a policy embedded within a single specific link object
used when replying to clients.
 free-address-config nameref(AddrTrapConfig)
 
Identifies which trap captures unexpected free address events
on this Link.
If this attribute is not configured, the server looks for
the v6-default-free-address-config on the DHCPServer object.
 local-cluster oid
 
Identifies the local DHCP cluster or failover pair
for this regional link.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
Provides user-assigned name for the link.
 policy nameref(Policy) default = default
 
Refers to a shared policy used when replying to clients.
 prefix-list obj(Prefix) transient
 
Lists the prefixes to be associated with the link. This
attribute is used to add or modify the link and its prefixes
in a single database action. All objects must be valid, or none will
be accepted. The associated prefixes will be stored separately,
and will not be returned in the parent link object.
 template-root-prefix prefix transient
 
Identifies the root prefix address for prefixes associated with
the link. This attribute is used when processing a link template
that defines associated prefixes.
 vpn-id int default = 0, immutable
 
Identifies the VPN that contains the link.
link-policy
 
    link-policy - Edits a DHCP policy embedded in a link.

    Note: dhcp-link-policy is a synonym for compatibility with earlier
    versions.

  Synopsis
 
    link-policy <name> delete
    link-policy <name> set <attribute>=<value>
                          [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    link-policy <name> get <attribute>
    link-policy <name> disable <attribute>
    link-policy <name> enable <attribute>
    link-policy <name> show

    link-policy <name> setV6Option <opt-name | id> <value>
    link-policy <name> getV6Option <opt-name | id>
    link-policy <name> unsetV6Option <opt-name | id> 
    link-policy <name> listV6Options

    link-policy <name> setV6VendorOption <opt-name | id>
                                         <opt-set-name> <value>
    link-policy <name> getV6VendorOption <opt-name | id>
                                         <opt-set-name>
    link-policy<name> unsetV6VendorOption <opt-name | id>
                                           <opt-set-name>
    link-policy <name> listV6VendorOptions

  Description
 
    The link-policy command lets you configure a DHCP policy embedded
    in a DHCP link.  An embedded policy is a collection of DHCP option
    values and settings that are associated with (and named by) another
    object -- in this case a link.  You create a link-policy when
    you first reference it, and you delete it when you delete the link.

    To set individual option values use the setV6Option command; to
    unset option values, the unsetV6Option command; and to view option
    values, the getV6Option and listV6Options commands.  When you set
    an option value, the DHCP server replaces any existing value or
    creates a new one as needed for the given option name.

    See the help file for the policy command for more information.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    policy, client-policy, client-class-policy, dhcp-address-block-policy, prefix-policy, scope-policy, scope-template-policy
 
  Attributes
 
 affinity-period time
 
Associates a lease in the AVAILABLE state with the client that
last held the lease. If the client requests a lease during the
affinity period, it is granted the same lease; that is, unless
renewals are prohibited, then it is explicitly not given the lease.
Because of the vast IPv6 address space and depending on the address
generation technique, it could be millions of years before an
address ever needs reassignment to a different client, and there
is no reason to hold on to this information for that long.
To prohibit renewals enable either the inhibit-all-renews attribute
or the inhibit-renews-at-reboot attribute.
 allow-client-a-record-update bool default = disabled
 
Determines if a client is allowed to update A records.
If the client sets the flags in the FQDN option to indicate that
it wants to do the A record update in the request, and if this
value is TRUE, the server allows the client to do the A record
update; otherwise, based on other server configurations, the server
does the A record update.
 allow-dual-zone-dns-update bool default = disabled
 
Enables DHCP clients to perform DNS updates into two DNS zones.
To support these clients, you can configure the DHCP server to
allow the client to perform an update, but also to perform a DNS
update on the client's behalf.
 allow-lease-time-override bool default = disabled
 
Gives the server control over the lease period.  Although a client
can request a specific lease time, the server need not honor the
request if this attribute is set to false (the default).
Even if set to true, clients can request only lease times that are
shorter than those configured for the server.
 allow-non-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request non-temporary
(IA_NA) addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request non-temporary addresses.
 allow-rapid-commit bool default = false
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can use a Solicit with the
Rapid Commit option to obtain configuration information with
fewer messages. To permit this, make sure that a single DHCP
server is servicing clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked:
  - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
    FALSE, Rapid Commit is not allowed.
  - If at least one has it set to TRUE, Rapid Commit is allowed.
  - Otherwise, the remaining policies in the hierarchy are
    checked.
The default is not to allow clients to use Rapid Commit.
 allow-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request temporary (IA_TA)
addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request temporary addresses.
 default-prefix-length rangeint(0-128) default = 64
 
For delegation, specifies the default length of the delegated prefix,
if a router (client) does not explicitly request it.
The default length must always be less than or equal to the prefix
length of the prefix range.
 forward-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which forward zones to include in updates.
 forward-zone-name dname
 
Designates an optional forward zone for DNS updates.
 giaddr-as-server-id bool default = false
 
Enables the DHCP server to set the server-id option on a DHCPOFFER
and a DHCPACK to the giaddr of the incoming packet, instead of the
IP address of the server (the default action).
This causes all unicast renews to be sent to the relay agent instead
of directly to the DHCP server, and so renews arrive at the DHCP
server with option-82 information appended to the packet.
Some relay agents may not support this capability and, in some
complex configurations, the giaddr might not actually be an address
to which the DHCP client can send A unicast packet. In these cases,
the DHCP client cannot renew a lease, and must always perform a
rebind operation (where the DHCP client broadcasts a request instead
of sending a unicast to what it believes is the DHCP server).
 grace-period time default = 5m
 
Defines the length of time between the expiration of a lease
and the time it is made available for reassignment.
 inhibit-all-renews bool default = false
 
Causes the server to reject all renewal requests, forcing the client
to obtain a different address any time it contacts the DHCP server.
 inhibit-renews-at-reboot bool default = false
 
Permits clients to renew their leases, but the server forces
them to obtain new addresses each time they reboot.
 limitation-count int
 
Specifies the maximum number of clients with the same limitation-id
that are allowed to have currently active and valid leases.
 offer-timeout time default = 2m
 
Instructs the server to wait a specified amount of time when it
has offered a lease to a client, but the offer is not yet accepted.
At the end of the specified time interval, the server makes the
lease available again.
 packet-file-name string
 
Identifies the boot-file to use in the boot process of a client.
The server returns this file name in the 'file' field of its replies.
The packet-file-name cannot be longer than 128 characters.
 packet-server-name string
 
Identifies the host-name of the server to use in a client's boot
process. The server returns this file name in the 'sname' field
of its replies. The packet-server-name field cannot be longer
than 64 characters.
 packet-siaddr ipaddr
 
Identifies the IP address of the next server in the client boot
process. For example, this might be the address of a TFTP server
used by BOOTP clients. The server returns this address in the
'siaddr' field of its replies.
 permanent-leases bool default = disabled
 
Indicates whether leases using this policy are permanently granted
to requesting clients. If leases are permanently granted, the server
ignores the configured dhcp-lease-time option value and uses the
maximum lease time.
 preferred-lifetime time default = 1w
 
Assigns the default and maximum preferred lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative to
the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets the
length of time that the address is preferred; that is, its use is
unrestricted. When the preferred lifetime expires, the address
becomes deprecated and its use is restricted.
 reconfigure enumint(allow=1, disallow=2, require=3) default = allow
 
Controls DHCPv6 client reconfiguration support:
   1  allow        Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server will honor the
                   request (default).
   2  disallow     Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support but the server will not honor
                   the clients' request.
   3  require      Requires clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server drops client
                   Solicit and Request messages that do not
                   include a Reconfigure-Accept option.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked
as follows:
   - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
   disallow or require, that setting is used.
   - Otherwise, if at least one has it set to allow, Reconfigure
   is allowed.
   - If no prefix policies have this attribute set, the remaining
   policies in the hierarchy are checked.
 reconfigure-via-relay bool default = false
 
Controls whether the server should prefer unicasting or
relaying DHCPv6 Reconfigure messages.
If false (the default), the server prefers to unicast
Reconfigure messages if the client has one or more valid
statefully assigned addresses.
If true, the server prefers to send Reconfigure messages
via the relay agent unless no relay agent information is
available.
Note: When you use this attribute, consider that:
    -  In networks where the DCHPv6 server cannot communicate
       directly with its client devices?for example, where
       firewalls are in place?set this value to true.
    -  The DHCPv6 server does not use embedded and named
       policies configured on a client when it evaluates
       this attribute.
    -  The relay agent cannot be used if the Relay-Forw message
       came from a link-local address.
 reverse-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which reverse zones to include in a DNS update.
 server-lease-time time
 
Tells the server how long a lease is valid.  For more frequent
communication with a client, you might have the server consider
leases as leased for a longer period than the client considers them.
This also provides more lease-time stability. This value is not used
unless it is longer than the lease time in the dhcp-lease-time option
found through the normal traversal of policies.
 split-lease-times bool default = disabled
 
Specifies a value that the DHCP server might use internally to
affect lease times.
If enabled, the DHCP server still offers clients lease times that
reflect the configured lease-time option from the appropriate
policy; but the server bases its decisions regarding expiration
on the 'server-lease-time' value.
 unavailable-timeout time default = 24h
 
Permits the server to make a lease unavailable for the time specified
and then to return the lease to available state. If there is no value
configured in the system_default_policy, then the default is
86400 seconds (or 24 hours).
 use-client-id-for-reservations bool default = off
 
Controls how the server database checks for reserved IP
addresses.
By default, the server uses the MAC address of the DHCP client as the
key for its database lookup.  If this attribute is set to true
(enabled), then the server does the check for reserved
addresses using the DHCP client-id, which the client usually sends.
In cases where the DHCP client does not supply the client-id, the
server synthesizes it, and uses that value.
 v4-bootp-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all BOOTP clients.
 v4-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all DHCPv4 clients, whether
or not the client specifically asks for the option data.
 v6-reply-options optionid6
 
Lists the options that should be returned in any
replies to DHCPv6 clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked.
 valid-lifetime time default = 2w
 
Assigns the default and maximum valid lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative
to the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets
the length of time that an address remains valid.  When this
period of time expires, the address becomes invalid and
unusable. The valid lifetime must be greater than or equal
to the preferred lifetime.
link-template
 
    link-template - Configures a link template

  Synopsis
 
    link-template <name> create [<attribute>=<value>...]
    link-template <name> delete
    link-template <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    link-template <name> get <attribute>
    link-template <name> unset <attribute>

    link-template <name> disable <attribute>
    link-template <name> enable <attribute>
    link-template <name> show

    link-template <name> create clone=<clone-name>
    link-template <name> apply-to < all | <link1>[,...] >
    link-template <name> apply-to <link> [<prefix>]

  Description
 
    The link-template command lets you configure a template to
    use when creating links.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    link
 
  Attributes
 
 description string
 
Describes the link template.
 free-address-config nameref(AddrTrapConfig)
 
Identifies which trap captures unexpected free address events
on this link.
If this attribute is not configured, the server looks for
the v6-default-free-address-config on the DHCPServer object.
 link-description-expr expr
 
An expression to define the description on the link object
 created when using the template.
 link-name-expr expr
 
An expression to define the name of the link object created
when using the template.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
Assigns a name to this link template.
 options-expr expr
 
An expression to define the list of embedded policy options
to be created.
 policy nameref(Policy) default = default
 
Refers to a shared policy used when replying to clients.
 prefix-expr expr
 
Defines an expression used to create the list of associated
prefixes.
option
 
    option - Configures option definitions

  Synopsis
 
    option <id> <option-setname> create <option-name> <type> [<attribute>=<value>] 
    option <name | id> <option-setname> delete
    option <name | id> <option-setname> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value>...]
    option <name | id> <option-setname> get <attribute>
    option <name | id> <option-setname> [show]
    option <name | id> <option-setname> unset <attribute>

    option <name | id> <option-setname> enable <attribute>
    option <name | id> <option-setname> disable <attribute>

    option <option-setname> list
    option <option-setname> listnames
    option <option-setname> show

    option listtypes

  Description
 
    The option command configures option definitions.

    Use reserved names as follows:

       dhcp-config and dhcp6-config to view currently configured
       option sets for DHCPv4 and DHCPv6 respectively.

       dhcp-custom and dhcp6-custom to view/add/modify/delete 
       custom option definitions.

    NOTE: you may also use dhcp-config and dhcp6-config to
    add/modify/delete custom option definitions. These names
    are used to operate on the respective custom set.

    Changes to the custom sets are merged with the built-in
    option definitions to form the config sets.

    Modifications to the custom sets are not visible in
    the config sets until after a SAVE is performed.

    You cannot use the reserved names when creating or deleting
    an option set. The custom sets are created when the first
    custom option definition is created.

    Use the listtypes command to view the list of option types
    available for use in creating custom option definitions.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 number int
 
The option number (the T part of the TLV)
 option-definition-set-name nameref(OptionDefinitionSet)
 
A reference to the option-definition-set used to create
this option instance.
 option-desc objref(AttrDesc)
 
The option description that provides the type and name
for this specific option.  This is a shortcut for a
lookup by id in the appropriate TLV desc table.
 sub-options obj(Option)
 
This attribute provides for the optional subdivision of
option data into nested sub-option objects.  This is
not used for storing DHCP server configuration, but may be
useful in other uses of TLV based values.
 value blob
 
The option value (the V part of the TLV)
option-set
 
    option-set - Configure option definition sets

  Synopsis
 
    option-set <name> create <8-bit | 16-bit> vendor-option-string=<string> [<attribute>=<value>] 
    option-set <name> create <8-bit | 16-bit> vendor-option-enterprise-id=<integer> [<attribute>=<value>] 
    option-set <name> delete
    option-set list  
    option-set listnames
    option-set <name> [show]
    option-set <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    option-set <name> get <attribute>
    option-set <name> unset <attribute>

    option-set <name> enable <attribute>
    option-set <name> disable <attribute>

    option-set dhcp-custom unset
    option-set dhcp6-custom unset

  Description
 
    The option-set command configures option definition sets.

    Use reserved names as follows:

       dhcp-config and dhcp6-config to view currently configured
       option sets for DHCPv4 and DHCPv6 respectively. These 
       reserved names show all built-in and custom option 
       definitions.

       dhcp-custom and dhcp6-custom to view only custom option 
       definitions.

    Changes to the custom sets are merged with the built-in
    option definitions to form  config sets.

    Modifications to the custom sets are not visible in
    the config sets until after you perform a  SAVE.

    You cannot use the reserved names when creating or deleting
    an option set. The custom sets are created when the first
    custom option definition is created. Use the command unset
    if you wish to clear all custom option definitions.

    Use 8-bit to create a dhcpv4 vendor option definition set.
    Use 16-bit to create a dhcpv6 vendor option definition set.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
owner
 
    owner - Configures owners

  Synopsis
 
    owner <tag> create <name> [<attribute>=<value>] 
    owner <tag> delete
    owner list  
    owner listnames
    owner <tag> show
    owner <tag> set =<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    owner <tag> get <attribute>
    owner <tag> unset <attribute>

    owner <tag> enable <attribute>
    owner <tag>  disable <attribute>

  Description
 
    The owner command configures a specified owner. You create owners
    and associate them with address blocks, subnets, and zones.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 contact string
 
Provides contact information for this owner.
 name string required
 
Displays the full name, or printable name, for this owner.
 organization nameref(CCMOrganization)
 
Specifies the organization name required for ARIN reporting purposes.
 tag string required,unique
 
Displays a unique tag name for this owner. Typically, it is a short
name referring to this owner.
prefix
 
    prefix - Configures IPv6 network prefixes for use in DHCPv6

    Note: dhcp-prefix is a synonym for compatibility with earlier
    versions of Network Registrar.

  Synopsis
 
    prefix list  
    prefix listnames
    prefix <name> create <address> [template=<template-name>]
                         [<attribute>=<value>] 
    prefix <name> delete
    prefix <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    prefix <name> get <attribute>
    prefix <name> unset <attribute>
    prefix <name> enable <attribute>
    prefix <name> disable <attribute>
    prefix <name> [show]

    prefix <name> listLeases

    prefix <name> addReservation <address> <lookup key>
    prefix <name> removeReservation <address>
    prefix <name> listReservations
    
    prefix <name> applyTemplate <template-name>

  Description
 
    The prefix command configures IPv6 network prefixes. Prefixes
    configure DHCPv6 address allocation and prefix delegation.

    When creating a prefix using a template, specify - for the
    <name> to allow the prefix template's prefix-name-expr to
    name the prefix.

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> prefix example-pref create ff00::/8 
    nrcmd> prefix example-pref set address=ff00::/10 


  Status
 

  See Also
    link, prefix-template
 
  Attributes
 
 address prefix required,immutable
 
Identifies a prefix (subnet) that an interface belongs to using the
high-order bits of an IPv6 address.
 allocation-algorithms flags(client-request=1, reservation=2, extension=3, interface-identifier=4, random=5, best-fit=6) default = reservation,extension,random,best-fit
 
Controls the algorithms used by the server to select a new address
or prefix to lease to a client. The available algorithms are:
  client-request
    This setting (off by default) controls whether the server
    uses a client requested lease.
  reservation
    This setting (on by default) controls whether the server
    uses an available reservation for the client.
  extension
    This setting (on by default) controls whether the server calls
    extensions attached at the generate-lease extension point
    to generate an address or prefix for the client.
  interface-identifier
    This setting (off by default) controls whether the server uses
    the interface-identifier from the client's (link-local)
    address to generate an address. It is ignored for temporary
    addresses and prefix delegation.
  random
    This setting (on by default) controls whether the server
    generates an address using an RFC 3041-like algorithm. It is
    is ignored for prefix delegation.
  best-fit
    This setting (on by default) controls whether the server will
    delegate the first, best-fit available prefix. It is ignored
    for addresses.
When the server needs an address to assign to a client, it
processes the flags in the following order: client-request,
reservation, extension, interface-identifier, and random.
Processing stops when a usable address is produced.
When the server needs to delegate a prefix to a client, it
processes the flags in the following order: client-request,
reservation, extension, best-fit. Processing stops when a
usable prefix is produced.
 deactivated bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether a prefix extends leases to clients. A deactivated
prefix does not extend leases to any clients. It treats all addresses
in its ranges as if they were individually deactivated.
Default, false (active).
 description string
 
Describes the prefix.
 dhcp-type enumint(stateless=0, dhcp=1, prefix-delegation=2, infrastructure=3, parent=4) default = dhcp
 
Defines how DHCP manages address assignment within a prefix:
  stateless         Prefix is used only for stateless
                    option configuration.
  dhcp              Prefix is used for stateful address
                    assignment.
  prefix-delegation Prefix is used for prefix-delegation.
  infrastructure    Prefix is used to map a client address to
                    a link, and does not have an address pool.
  parent            Prefix is not used by DHCP. It is used as
                    a container object, to group child prefixes.
 embedded-policy obj(0)
 
Specifies a policy embedded within an IPv6 prefix.
 expiration-time date
 
Sets the time and date on which a prefix expires. After this date
and time, the server neither grants new leases nor renews existing
leases from this prefix.
Once the expiration-time has passed, the prefix is no longer used
(though old leases and leases with grace or affinity periods
continue to exist until those periods elapse).
Enter this as a date in the format  "[weekday] mon day
hh:mm[:ss] year". For example, "Dec 31 23:59 2006".
 free-address-config nameref(AddrTrapConfig)
 
Identifies which trap captures unexpected free address events
on this prefix.
If this attribute is not configured, the server looks for
the free-address-config attribute on the parent Link object.
If that attribute is not configured, the server looks for
the v6-default-free-address-config on the DHCPServer object.
 ignore-declines bool default = false
 
Controls whether the DHCP server responds to a DHCPv6 DECLINE
message that refers to an IPv6 address or a delegated prefix
from this prefix.
If enabled, the DHCP server ignores all declines for leases
in this prefix.
If disabled or not set, the DHCP server sets to UNAVAILABLE
every address or delegated prefix requested in a DECLINE
message if it is leased to the client.
The default value is false, so that DECLINE messages are
processed normally.
 link nameref(Link)
 
Associates an IPv6 prefix (subnet) with a link. Use this attribute
to group prefixes that are on a single link.
 local-cluster oid
 
Identifies the local DHCP cluster or failover pair
for this regional prefix.
 max-leases rangeint(0-2000000) default = 65536
 
Sets the maximum number of non-reserved leases that the server
will allow to exist on this prefix. When a new lease needs to
be created, the server will only do so if the limit has not
been exceeded. When the limit is exceeded, no new leases can be
created and offered to clients.
This limit is not applied when existing leases are loaded from
the lease state database during server start-up.
This attribute is also used when calculating the free-address
level for address traps.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
Assigns a name to an IPv6 prefix (subnet).
 policy nameref(Policy)
 
Refers to a shared policy to use when replying to clients.
 range prefix
 
Specifies a subrange the server can use to configure prefixes
for address assignment.
The prefix used depends on the value set for the dhcp-type attribute.
If not set, the prefix address is used. This may specify a longer
prefix than the prefix address to limit the range of addresses
or prefixes available for assignment.
 reverse-zone-prefix-length rangeint(0-124)
 
Specifies the prefix length of the reverse zone for ip6.arpa
updates. You do not need to specify the full reverse zone, 
because you can synthesize it by using the ip6.arpa domain. 
    Use a multiple of 4 for the value, because ip6.arpa zones 
    are on 4-bit boundaries. If not a multiple of 4, the value
    is rounded up to the next multiple of 4. 
    The maximum value is 124, because specifying 128 would 
    create a zone name without any possible hostnames 
    contained within. 
    A value of 0 means none of the bits are used for the zone 
    name, hence ip6.arpa is used. 
    If you omit the value from the DNS update configuration, 
    the server uses the value from the prefix or, as a last 
    resort, the prefix length derived from the address value
    of the prefix.
 selection-tags string
 
Associates selection tags with an IPv6 prefix (subnet).
 vpn-id int default = 0, immutable
 
Identifies the VPN that contains an IPv6 prefix.
prefix-policy
 
    prefix-policy - Edits a DHCP policy embedded in a prefix

    Note: dhcp-prefix-policy is a synonym for compatibility with earlier
    versions of Network Registrar.

  Synopsis
 
    prefix-policy <name> delete
    prefix-policy <name> set <attribute>=<value>
                            [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    prefix-policy <name> get <attribute>
    prefix-policy <name> disable <feature>
    prefix-policy <name> enable <feature>
    prefix-policy <name> show
    
    prefix-policy <name> setV6Option <opt-name | id> <value>
    prefix-policy <name> getV6Option <opt-name | id>
    prefix-policy <name> unsetV6Option <opt-name | id> 
    prefix-policy <name> listV6Options

    prefix-policy <name> setV6VendorOption <opt-name | id>
                                           <opt-set-name> <value>
    prefix-policy <name> getV6VendorOption <opt-name | id>
                                           <opt-set-name>
    prefix-policy <name> unsetV6VendorOption <opt-name | id>
                                             <opt-set-name>
    prefix-policy <name> listV6VendorOptions

  Description
 
    The prefix-policy command lets you configure a DHCP policy that
    is embedded in a DHCP prefix.  An embedded policy is a collection
    of DHCP option values and settings associated with (and named by)
    another object -- in this case a prefix.  A prefix-policy is created
    implicitly when you first reference it, and is deleted when the
    prefix is deleted.

    You can set individual option values with the setV6Option command,
    unset option values with the unsetV6Option command, and view option
    values with the getV6Option and listV6Options commands.  When you set
    an option value the DHCP server will replace any existing value or
    create a new one as needed for the given option name.

    
  Examples
 
    


  Status
 

  See Also
    policy, client-policy, client-class-policy, dhcp-address-block-policy, link-policy, scope-policy, scope-template-policy
 
  Attributes
 
 affinity-period time
 
Associates a lease in the AVAILABLE state with the client that
last held the lease. If the client requests a lease during the
affinity period, it is granted the same lease; that is, unless
renewals are prohibited, then it is explicitly not given the lease.
Because of the vast IPv6 address space and depending on the address
generation technique, it could be millions of years before an
address ever needs reassignment to a different client, and there
is no reason to hold on to this information for that long.
To prohibit renewals enable either the inhibit-all-renews attribute
or the inhibit-renews-at-reboot attribute.
 allow-client-a-record-update bool default = disabled
 
Determines if a client is allowed to update A records.
If the client sets the flags in the FQDN option to indicate that
it wants to do the A record update in the request, and if this
value is TRUE, the server allows the client to do the A record
update; otherwise, based on other server configurations, the server
does the A record update.
 allow-dual-zone-dns-update bool default = disabled
 
Enables DHCP clients to perform DNS updates into two DNS zones.
To support these clients, you can configure the DHCP server to
allow the client to perform an update, but also to perform a DNS
update on the client's behalf.
 allow-lease-time-override bool default = disabled
 
Gives the server control over the lease period.  Although a client
can request a specific lease time, the server need not honor the
request if this attribute is set to false (the default).
Even if set to true, clients can request only lease times that are
shorter than those configured for the server.
 allow-non-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request non-temporary
(IA_NA) addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request non-temporary addresses.
 allow-rapid-commit bool default = false
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can use a Solicit with the
Rapid Commit option to obtain configuration information with
fewer messages. To permit this, make sure that a single DHCP
server is servicing clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked:
  - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
    FALSE, Rapid Commit is not allowed.
  - If at least one has it set to TRUE, Rapid Commit is allowed.
  - Otherwise, the remaining policies in the hierarchy are
    checked.
The default is not to allow clients to use Rapid Commit.
 allow-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request temporary (IA_TA)
addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request temporary addresses.
 default-prefix-length rangeint(0-128) default = 64
 
For delegation, specifies the default length of the delegated prefix,
if a router (client) does not explicitly request it.
The default length must always be less than or equal to the prefix
length of the prefix range.
 forward-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which forward zones to include in updates.
 forward-zone-name dname
 
Designates an optional forward zone for DNS updates.
 giaddr-as-server-id bool default = false
 
Enables the DHCP server to set the server-id option on a DHCPOFFER
and a DHCPACK to the giaddr of the incoming packet, instead of the
IP address of the server (the default action).
This causes all unicast renews to be sent to the relay agent instead
of directly to the DHCP server, and so renews arrive at the DHCP
server with option-82 information appended to the packet.
Some relay agents may not support this capability and, in some
complex configurations, the giaddr might not actually be an address
to which the DHCP client can send A unicast packet. In these cases,
the DHCP client cannot renew a lease, and must always perform a
rebind operation (where the DHCP client broadcasts a request instead
of sending a unicast to what it believes is the DHCP server).
 grace-period time default = 5m
 
Defines the length of time between the expiration of a lease
and the time it is made available for reassignment.
 inhibit-all-renews bool default = false
 
Causes the server to reject all renewal requests, forcing the client
to obtain a different address any time it contacts the DHCP server.
 inhibit-renews-at-reboot bool default = false
 
Permits clients to renew their leases, but the server forces
them to obtain new addresses each time they reboot.
 limitation-count int
 
Specifies the maximum number of clients with the same limitation-id
that are allowed to have currently active and valid leases.
 offer-timeout time default = 2m
 
Instructs the server to wait a specified amount of time when it
has offered a lease to a client, but the offer is not yet accepted.
At the end of the specified time interval, the server makes the
lease available again.
 packet-file-name string
 
Identifies the boot-file to use in the boot process of a client.
The server returns this file name in the 'file' field of its replies.
The packet-file-name cannot be longer than 128 characters.
 packet-server-name string
 
Identifies the host-name of the server to use in a client's boot
process. The server returns this file name in the 'sname' field
of its replies. The packet-server-name field cannot be longer
than 64 characters.
 packet-siaddr ipaddr
 
Identifies the IP address of the next server in the client boot
process. For example, this might be the address of a TFTP server
used by BOOTP clients. The server returns this address in the
'siaddr' field of its replies.
 permanent-leases bool default = disabled
 
Indicates whether leases using this policy are permanently granted
to requesting clients. If leases are permanently granted, the server
ignores the configured dhcp-lease-time option value and uses the
maximum lease time.
 preferred-lifetime time default = 1w
 
Assigns the default and maximum preferred lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative to
the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets the
length of time that the address is preferred; that is, its use is
unrestricted. When the preferred lifetime expires, the address
becomes deprecated and its use is restricted.
 reconfigure enumint(allow=1, disallow=2, require=3) default = allow
 
Controls DHCPv6 client reconfiguration support:
   1  allow        Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server will honor the
                   request (default).
   2  disallow     Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support but the server will not honor
                   the clients' request.
   3  require      Requires clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server drops client
                   Solicit and Request messages that do not
                   include a Reconfigure-Accept option.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked
as follows:
   - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
   disallow or require, that setting is used.
   - Otherwise, if at least one has it set to allow, Reconfigure
   is allowed.
   - If no prefix policies have this attribute set, the remaining
   policies in the hierarchy are checked.
 reconfigure-via-relay bool default = false
 
Controls whether the server should prefer unicasting or
relaying DHCPv6 Reconfigure messages.
If false (the default), the server prefers to unicast
Reconfigure messages if the client has one or more valid
statefully assigned addresses.
If true, the server prefers to send Reconfigure messages
via the relay agent unless no relay agent information is
available.
Note: When you use this attribute, consider that:
    -  In networks where the DCHPv6 server cannot communicate
       directly with its client devices?for example, where
       firewalls are in place?set this value to true.
    -  The DHCPv6 server does not use embedded and named
       policies configured on a client when it evaluates
       this attribute.
    -  The relay agent cannot be used if the Relay-Forw message
       came from a link-local address.
 reverse-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which reverse zones to include in a DNS update.
 server-lease-time time
 
Tells the server how long a lease is valid.  For more frequent
communication with a client, you might have the server consider
leases as leased for a longer period than the client considers them.
This also provides more lease-time stability. This value is not used
unless it is longer than the lease time in the dhcp-lease-time option
found through the normal traversal of policies.
 split-lease-times bool default = disabled
 
Specifies a value that the DHCP server might use internally to
affect lease times.
If enabled, the DHCP server still offers clients lease times that
reflect the configured lease-time option from the appropriate
policy; but the server bases its decisions regarding expiration
on the 'server-lease-time' value.
 unavailable-timeout time default = 24h
 
Permits the server to make a lease unavailable for the time specified
and then to return the lease to available state. If there is no value
configured in the system_default_policy, then the default is
86400 seconds (or 24 hours).
 use-client-id-for-reservations bool default = off
 
Controls how the server database checks for reserved IP
addresses.
By default, the server uses the MAC address of the DHCP client as the
key for its database lookup.  If this attribute is set to true
(enabled), then the server does the check for reserved
addresses using the DHCP client-id, which the client usually sends.
In cases where the DHCP client does not supply the client-id, the
server synthesizes it, and uses that value.
 v4-bootp-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all BOOTP clients.
 v4-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all DHCPv4 clients, whether
or not the client specifically asks for the option data.
 v6-reply-options optionid6
 
Lists the options that should be returned in any
replies to DHCPv6 clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked.
 valid-lifetime time default = 2w
 
Assigns the default and maximum valid lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative
to the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets
the length of time that an address remains valid.  When this
period of time expires, the address becomes invalid and
unusable. The valid lifetime must be greater than or equal
to the preferred lifetime.
prefix-template
 
    prefix-template - Configures a prefix template.

  Synopsis
 
    prefix-template <name> create [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    prefix-template <name> delete
    prefix-template <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    prefix-template <name> get <attribute>
    prefix-template <name> unset <attribute>

    prefix-template <name> disable <attribute>
    prefix-template <name> enable <attribute>
    prefix-template <name> show

    prefix-template <name> create clone=<clone-name>
    prefix-template <name> apply-to <<b>all | <prefix1>[,...]>

  Description
 
    The prefix-template command lets you configure a template to use
    when creating prefixes.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    prefix
 
  Attributes
 
 allocation-algorithms flags(client-request=1, reservation=2, extension=3, interface-identifier=4, random=5, best-fit=6) default = reservation,extension,random,best-fit
 
Controls the algorithms used by the server to select a new address
or prefix to lease to a client. The available algorithms are:
  client-request
    This setting (off by default) controls whether the server
    uses a client requested lease.
  reservation
    This setting (on by default) controls whether the server
    uses an available reservation for the client.
  extension
    This setting (on by default) controls whether the server calls
    extensions attached at the generate-lease extension point
    to generate an address or prefix for the client.
  interface-identifier
    This setting (off by default) controls whether the server uses
    the interface-identifier from the client's (link-local)
    address to generate an address. It is ignored for temporary
    addresses and prefix delegation.
  random
    This setting (on by default) controls whether the server
    generates an address using an RFC 3041-like algorithm. It is
    is ignored for prefix delegation.
  best-fit
    This setting (on by default) controls whether the server will
    delegate the first, best-fit available prefix. It is ignored
    for addresses.
When the server needs an address to assign to a client, it
processes the flags in the following order: client-request,
reservation, extension, interface-identifier, and random.
Processing stops when a usable address is produced.
When the server needs to delegate a prefix to a client, it
processes the flags in the following order: client-request,
reservation, extension, best-fit. Processing stops when a
usable prefix is produced.
 deactivated bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether a prefix extends leases to clients. A deactivated
prefix does not extend leases to any clients. It treats all addresses
in its ranges as if they were individually deactivated.
Default, false (active).
 description string
 
Describes the prefix template.
 dhcp-type enumint(stateless=0, dhcp=1, prefix-delegation=2, infrastructure=3, parent=4) default = dhcp
 
Defines how DHCP manages address assignment within a prefix:
  stateless         Prefix is used only for stateless
                    option configuration.
  dhcp              Prefix is used for stateful address
                    assignment.
  prefix-delegation Prefix is used for prefix-delegation.
  infrastructure    Prefix is used to map a client address to
                    a link, and does not have an address pool.
  parent            Prefix is not used by DHCP. It is used as
                    a container object, to group child prefixes.
 expiration-time date
 
Sets the time and date on which a prefix expires. After this date
and time, the server neither grants new leases nor renews existing
leases from this prefix.
Once the expiration-time has passed, the prefix is no longer used
(though old leases and leases with grace or affinity periods
continue to exist until those periods elapse).
Enter this as a date in the format  "[weekday] mon day
hh:mm[:ss] year". For example, "Dec 31 23:59 2006".
 free-address-config nameref(AddrTrapConfig)
 
Identifies which trap captures unexpected free address events
on this prefix.
If this attribute is not configured, the server looks for
the free-address-config attribute on the parent Link object.
If that attribute is not configured, the server looks for
the v6-default-free-address-config on the DHCPServer object.
 ignore-declines bool default = false
 
Controls whether the DHCP server responds to a DHCPv6 DECLINE
message that refers to an IPv6 address or a delegated prefix
from this prefix.
If enabled, the DHCP server ignores all declines for leases
in this prefix.
If disabled or not set, the DHCP server sets to UNAVAILABLE
every address or delegated prefix requested in a DECLINE
message if it is leased to the client.
The default value is false, so that DECLINE messages are
processed normally.
 max-leases rangeint(0-2000000) default = 65536
 
Sets the maximum number of non-reserved leases that the server
will allow to exist on the prefix. When a new lease needs to
be created, the server will only do so if the limit has not
been exceeded. When the limit is exceeded, no new leases can be
created and offered to clients.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
Assigns a name to this prefix template.
 options-expr expr
 
Defines an expression that evaluates to the list of
embedded policy options to be created.
 policy nameref(Policy)
 
Refers to a shared policy to use when replying to clients.
 prefix-description-expr expr
 
Defines an AT_STRING expression to apply to the description
on the prefix object created when using the template.
 prefix-name-expr expr
 
Defines an expression that evaluates to an AT_STRING value
to use for the name of the prefix object created when using
the template.
 range-expr expr
 
Defines an expression that evaluates to an AT_PREFIX value
for the prefix range to be created.
 reverse-zone-prefix-length rangeint(0-124)
 
Identifies the prefix length of the reverse zone for ip6.arpa
updates. The server forms the zone name using this value if
configured; otherwise the prefix length is determined from the
Prefix. This value must be a multiple of 4 as ip6.arpa zones are
on 4 bit (nibble) boundaries. If not a multiple of 4, it is
rounded up to the next higher multiple of 4.
 selection-tags string
 
Associates selection tags with an IPv6 prefix.
policy
 
    policy - Specifies DHCP policy information

  Synopsis
 
    policy <name> create [<attribute>=<value>] 
    policy <name> create clone=<clone-name>
    policy <name> delete
    policy list  
    policy listnames
    policy <name> set =<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    policy <name> get <attribute>
    policy <name> unset <attribute>
    
    policy <name> disable <attribute>
    policy <name> enable <attribute>
    policy <name> show
    
    policy <name> setLeaseTime <time-val>
    policy <name> getLeaseTime
    
    policy <name> setOption <opt-name | id> <value>
    policy <name> getOption <opt-name | id>
    policy <name> unsetOption <opt-name | id> 
    policy <name> listOptions

    policy <name> setV6Option <opt-name | id> <value>
    policy <name> getV6Option <opt-name | id>
    policy <name> unsetV6Option <opt-name | id> 
    policy <name> listV6Options

    policy <name> setVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name> <value>
    policy <name> getVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>
    policy <name> unsetVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>
    policy <name> listVendorOptions

    policy <name> setV6VendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name> <value>
    policy <name> getV6VendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>
    policy <name> unsetV6VendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>
    policy <name> listV6VendorOptions

  Description
 
    The policy command manages DHCP policy configurations. A policy
    is a collection of DHCP option values to associate with a range 
    of addresses in a scope, or with a specific client or client-class
    configuration. Network Registrar considers policy reply options in 
    a hierarchy of options. For details on these reply options, see 
    the User Guide for Cisco Network Registrar.

    The policy command by itself is for a named policy. You can 
    also manage the embedded policies for dhcp-address-block, 
    client, client-class and scope objects through the 
    dhcp-address-block-policy, client-policy, client-class-policy, 
    and scope-policy commands, respectively. 

    For embedded policies, name identifies the object that contains
    the embedded policy. For example, an attribute-setting command
    for a scope policy would be "scope-policy scope-name set 
    <attribute>"--using the name of the scope for the name value.

    The default policy is a special named policy that includes 
    default settings. You can manage the default policy just 
    like all the other named ones.   

    policy <name> setLeaseTime <time-val>
    policy <name> getLeaseTime
       Use the setLeaseTime command to set the values of lease
       times and the getLeaseTime command to display the value
       of a lease time.  

    policy <name> setV6Option <opt-name | id> <value>
    policy <name> getV6Option <opt-name | id>
    policy <name> unsetV6Option <opt-name | id> 
    policy <name> listV6Options
       To manage the DHCPv6 options on the policy, use the
       commands: setV6Option, getV6Option, unsetV6Option, 
       listV6Options.
 
    
    policy <name> setVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name> <value>
    policy <name> getVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>
    policy <name> unsetVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>
    policy <name> listVendorOptions
       The setVendorOption and getVendorOption commands are used to 
       set and  get vendor-specific option data on the policy. These 
       commands require an option name and the name of a 
       vendor-specific option definition set.

       The unsetVendorOption command removes the data for the 
       specific vendor option.

       The listVendorOptions command displays all vendor-option 
       data that is set in the policy. The listing includes the name 
       of the option-definition set that was used to define the data.

       You can manage the DHCPv6 vendor options on the policy 
       using the commands: setV6VendorOption, 
       getV6VendorOption, unsetV6VendorOption, listV6VendorOptions.

    NOTE: The vendor option commands use a different syntax when
    connected to releases prior to 6.2. See the documentation for
    the specific release.

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> policy default setOption dhcp-lease-time 608400
    nrcmd> policy default listOptions 
            (51)dhcp-lease-time: 604800 
    nrcmd> policy default set grace-period=3d 


  Status
 

  See Also
    option-set, option
 
  Attributes
 
 affinity-period time
 
Associates a lease in the AVAILABLE state with the client that
last held the lease. If the client requests a lease during the
affinity period, it is granted the same lease; that is, unless
renewals are prohibited, then it is explicitly not given the lease.
Because of the vast IPv6 address space and depending on the address
generation technique, it could be millions of years before an
address ever needs reassignment to a different client, and there
is no reason to hold on to this information for that long.
To prohibit renewals enable either the inhibit-all-renews attribute
or the inhibit-renews-at-reboot attribute.
 allow-client-a-record-update bool default = disabled
 
Determines if a client is allowed to update A records.
If the client sets the flags in the FQDN option to indicate that
it wants to do the A record update in the request, and if this
value is TRUE, the server allows the client to do the A record
update; otherwise, based on other server configurations, the server
does the A record update.
 allow-dual-zone-dns-update bool default = disabled
 
Enables DHCP clients to perform DNS updates into two DNS zones.
To support these clients, you can configure the DHCP server to
allow the client to perform an update, but also to perform a DNS
update on the client's behalf.
 allow-lease-time-override bool default = disabled
 
Gives the server control over the lease period.  Although a client
can request a specific lease time, the server need not honor the
request if this attribute is set to false (the default).
Even if set to true, clients can request only lease times that are
shorter than those configured for the server.
 allow-non-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request non-temporary
(IA_NA) addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request non-temporary addresses.
 allow-rapid-commit bool default = false
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can use a Solicit with the
Rapid Commit option to obtain configuration information with
fewer messages. To permit this, make sure that a single DHCP
server is servicing clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked:
  - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
    FALSE, Rapid Commit is not allowed.
  - If at least one has it set to TRUE, Rapid Commit is allowed.
  - Otherwise, the remaining policies in the hierarchy are
    checked.
The default is not to allow clients to use Rapid Commit.
 allow-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request temporary (IA_TA)
addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request temporary addresses.
 default-prefix-length rangeint(0-128) default = 64
 
For delegation, specifies the default length of the delegated prefix,
if a router (client) does not explicitly request it.
The default length must always be less than or equal to the prefix
length of the prefix range.
 forward-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which forward zones to include in updates.
 forward-zone-name dname
 
Designates an optional forward zone for DNS updates.
 giaddr-as-server-id bool default = false
 
Enables the DHCP server to set the server-id option on a DHCPOFFER
and a DHCPACK to the giaddr of the incoming packet, instead of the
IP address of the server (the default action).
This causes all unicast renews to be sent to the relay agent instead
of directly to the DHCP server, and so renews arrive at the DHCP
server with option-82 information appended to the packet.
Some relay agents may not support this capability and, in some
complex configurations, the giaddr might not actually be an address
to which the DHCP client can send A unicast packet. In these cases,
the DHCP client cannot renew a lease, and must always perform a
rebind operation (where the DHCP client broadcasts a request instead
of sending a unicast to what it believes is the DHCP server).
 grace-period time default = 5m
 
Defines the length of time between the expiration of a lease
and the time it is made available for reassignment.
 inhibit-all-renews bool default = false
 
Causes the server to reject all renewal requests, forcing the client
to obtain a different address any time it contacts the DHCP server.
 inhibit-renews-at-reboot bool default = false
 
Permits clients to renew their leases, but the server forces
them to obtain new addresses each time they reboot.
 limitation-count int
 
Specifies the maximum number of clients with the same limitation-id
that are allowed to have currently active and valid leases.
 offer-timeout time default = 2m
 
Instructs the server to wait a specified amount of time when it
has offered a lease to a client, but the offer is not yet accepted.
At the end of the specified time interval, the server makes the
lease available again.
 packet-file-name string
 
Identifies the boot-file to use in the boot process of a client.
The server returns this file name in the 'file' field of its replies.
The packet-file-name cannot be longer than 128 characters.
 packet-server-name string
 
Identifies the host-name of the server to use in a client's boot
process. The server returns this file name in the 'sname' field
of its replies. The packet-server-name field cannot be longer
than 64 characters.
 packet-siaddr ipaddr
 
Identifies the IP address of the next server in the client boot
process. For example, this might be the address of a TFTP server
used by BOOTP clients. The server returns this address in the
'siaddr' field of its replies.
 permanent-leases bool default = disabled
 
Indicates whether leases using this policy are permanently granted
to requesting clients. If leases are permanently granted, the server
ignores the configured dhcp-lease-time option value and uses the
maximum lease time.
 preferred-lifetime time default = 1w
 
Assigns the default and maximum preferred lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative to
the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets the
length of time that the address is preferred; that is, its use is
unrestricted. When the preferred lifetime expires, the address
becomes deprecated and its use is restricted.
 reconfigure enumint(allow=1, disallow=2, require=3) default = allow
 
Controls DHCPv6 client reconfiguration support:
   1  allow        Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server will honor the
                   request (default).
   2  disallow     Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support but the server will not honor
                   the clients' request.
   3  require      Requires clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server drops client
                   Solicit and Request messages that do not
                   include a Reconfigure-Accept option.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked
as follows:
   - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
   disallow or require, that setting is used.
   - Otherwise, if at least one has it set to allow, Reconfigure
   is allowed.
   - If no prefix policies have this attribute set, the remaining
   policies in the hierarchy are checked.
 reconfigure-via-relay bool default = false
 
Controls whether the server should prefer unicasting or
relaying DHCPv6 Reconfigure messages.
If false (the default), the server prefers to unicast
Reconfigure messages if the client has one or more valid
statefully assigned addresses.
If true, the server prefers to send Reconfigure messages
via the relay agent unless no relay agent information is
available.
Note: When you use this attribute, consider that:
    -  In networks where the DCHPv6 server cannot communicate
       directly with its client devices?for example, where
       firewalls are in place?set this value to true.
    -  The DHCPv6 server does not use embedded and named
       policies configured on a client when it evaluates
       this attribute.
    -  The relay agent cannot be used if the Relay-Forw message
       came from a link-local address.
 reverse-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which reverse zones to include in a DNS update.
 server-lease-time time
 
Tells the server how long a lease is valid.  For more frequent
communication with a client, you might have the server consider
leases as leased for a longer period than the client considers them.
This also provides more lease-time stability. This value is not used
unless it is longer than the lease time in the dhcp-lease-time option
found through the normal traversal of policies.
 split-lease-times bool default = disabled
 
Specifies a value that the DHCP server might use internally to
affect lease times.
If enabled, the DHCP server still offers clients lease times that
reflect the configured lease-time option from the appropriate
policy; but the server bases its decisions regarding expiration
on the 'server-lease-time' value.
 unavailable-timeout time default = 24h
 
Permits the server to make a lease unavailable for the time specified
and then to return the lease to available state. If there is no value
configured in the system_default_policy, then the default is
86400 seconds (or 24 hours).
 use-client-id-for-reservations bool default = off
 
Controls how the server database checks for reserved IP
addresses.
By default, the server uses the MAC address of the DHCP client as the
key for its database lookup.  If this attribute is set to true
(enabled), then the server does the check for reserved
addresses using the DHCP client-id, which the client usually sends.
In cases where the DHCP client does not supply the client-id, the
server synthesizes it, and uses that value.
 v4-bootp-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all BOOTP clients.
 v4-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all DHCPv4 clients, whether
or not the client specifically asks for the option data.
 v6-reply-options optionid6
 
Lists the options that should be returned in any
replies to DHCPv6 clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked.
 valid-lifetime time default = 2w
 
Assigns the default and maximum valid lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative
to the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets
the length of time that an address remains valid.  When this
period of time expires, the address becomes invalid and
unusable. The valid lifetime must be greater than or equal
to the preferred lifetime.
region
 
    region - Configures a named geographic region

  Synopsis
 
    region <tag> create <name> [<attribute>=<value>] 
    region <tag> delete
    region list  
    region listnames
    region <tag> show
    region <tag> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    region <tag> get <attribute>
    region <tag> unset <attribute>

    region <tag> enable <attribute>
    region <tag> disable <attribute>

  Description
 
    The region command configures objects representing a geographic
    region containing other objects, such as address blocks, subnets
    and zones.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 contact string
 
The contact information for this region.
 name string required
 
The full name or printable name for this region.
 tag string required,unique
 
The unique tag name for this region. Typically a short name
referring to this region.
remote-dns
 
    remote-dns - Specifies information about remote DNS servers for IXFR

  Synopsis
 
    remote-dns list
    remote-dns listnames  
    remote-dns <addr>[/<mask>] create [<attribute>=<value>...]
    remote-dns <name> delete 
    remote-dns <name> disable <attribute>
    remote-dns <name> enable <attribute>

  Description
 
    The remote-dns command lets you control the behavior of the DNS
    server when it is querying other DNS servers. Currently, the
    only configuration properties are controls on incremental transfer
    (ixfr) and the sending of multiple records per TCP "packet" (multirec).
    
    The names of the remote-dns configurations provide the address and
    netmask to use when matching addresses to configurations. In the
    case of multiple possible matches, the DNS server uses the address
    with the largest bitmask.

  Examples
 
    To enable anyone on the 192.168.0.0 network to perform 
    incremental transfers except 192.168.1.1:

    nrcmd> remote-dns create 192.168.0.0/16 ixfr=true
    nrcmd> remote-dns create 192.168.1.1/32 ixfr=false

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 ixfr bool default = disabled, required
 
Indicates whether or not a foreign server supports incremental
transfer and should be queried for incremental (IXFR) before full
(AXFR) when asking for zone transfers. Although unwittingly setting
this to true is generally harmless, doing so may result in
additional transactions to accomplish a zone transfer.
 key dname
 
Specifies which key to use when communicating with the remote DNS
server.
 multirec bool default = disabled, required
 
Indicates whether or not a foreign server can be sent zone
transfers (AXFR) with multiple records in one TCP "packet." Older
DNS servers will crash when receiving such transfers, despite
being allowed by the protocol specification.
report
 
    report - Creates a summary report of address usage

  Synopsis
 
    report [column-separator=<string>]
           [dhcp-only]
           [dhcpv4]
           [dhcpv6]
           [file=<output file>]
           [vpn=<vpn-name>] 

  Description
 
    The report command provides address utilization reporting 
    for all subnets containing addresses that are handled by the
    DHCP server. The DHCP server must be running to obtain
    the report or a "Connection Failure" error message 
    will be returned.

    The report command provides v4 and v6 utilization.  The option
    'dhcp-only' will be kept as a synonym for 'dhcpv4', to provide
    backwards compatibility.

    The output for the report dhcpv4 command is a table consisting of 
    column-aligned data for each defined scope, subnet, and
    CCM address block. Subtotals are listed for subnets and address
    blocks that contain multiple scopes or subnets. A grand total row  
    summarizes the data from all the subnets.
     
    Each row lists the following information:

    o  Subnet/Mask
    o  Scope Name 
    o  %Free - percentage of dynamic addresses available to be leased 
    o  Total Dynamic - total number of addresses configured,   
       excluding reservations
    o  Total Reserved - total reserved addresses
    o  Leased - addresses actively leased by clients
    o  Avail - addresses available to be leased
    o  Other Avail - addresses set aside to be leased by this server's
       failover partner
    o  Pending Avail - leases not available to be leased because the
       server is in the communications-interrupted failover state.
    o  In Transition - leases offered to clients or waiting for the 
       configured grace period before again becoming available 
    o  Reserved Active - reserved addresses actively leased by clients
    o  Unavail - addresses marked unavailable 
    o  Active Deactivated - addresses that have been administratively
       deactivated
          

    The output for the report dhcpv6 command is a table consisting of 
    column-aligned data for each defined prefix.  If requested, totals 
    will be computed for each parent prefix defined in the address tree. 
    Separate total lines will be shown for child prefixes classified 
    for prefix delegation or dhcp allocation. No counters apply for 
    stateless configuration or infrstructure entries. The only attribute
    that may be reported is whether the prefix has been deactivated.
    Total lines will be skipped if the prefix-count for a given type 
    is 0.
     
    Each row lists the following information:

    o  Prefix/Mask
    o  Prefix Name 
    o  Total Reserved - total number of reserved leases configured 
       in this prefix
    o  Leased - addresses actively leased by clients
    o  Revoked - dynamic leases (leases that are not reserved) that 
       are no longer usable by the client, but that may still be in use
    o  In Transition - leases offered to clients or waiting for the 
       configured grace period before again becoming available 
    o  Reserved Active - reserved addresses actively leased by clients
    o  Reserved Inactive - reserved addresses not used by their assigned 
       DHCP clients
    o  Reserved Unavail -  reserved addresses marked unavailable
    o  Unavail - addresses marked unavailable 
    o  Active Dynamic - total number of dynamic leases actively in 
       use
    o  Active Deactivated - number of dynamic and reserved leases
       currently leased by DHCP clients, but have also been 
       administratively deactivated 
    o  Deactivated -  addresses that have been administratively
       deactivated
          
  Examples
 

   report 
   report file=myreport.txt 

  Status
 

  See Also
    export addresses, lease-notification, session current-vpn
 
 

  Report Keywords
 

    column-separator
        Specifies the character string you want used between the
        columns in the report. The default is a single space. If
        you specify more than one space, you must use a backslash
        (\) to allow the extra spaces, and if you enter the spaces
        on the command line, use quotation marks.

    dhcp-only
        Provided for command-syntax compatibility with prior versions,
        specifies a summary of the DHCP server information. 
        This is the only option available for the report command, 
        and is no longer required to run the command.

    dhcpv4
        Displays ipv4 utilization.

    dhcpv6
        Display ipv6 utilization.

    file
        Specifies the filename to which the report command writes
        the output. If you do not specify a filename, the report
        command writes to 'standard out'.

    vpn
        The VPN address space from which to select scopes to examine 
        when executing this command. If no vpn-name is specified,
        then the session's current-vpn is used. If the reserved
        vpn-name "global" is used, then the global (or unnamed)
        VPN address space is used. The reserved vpn-name "all" is not
        allowed for this command, because the report command has no
        mechanism to distinguish identical IP addresses in different
        VPNs.

reservation
 
    reservation - Configures DHCP reservations

  Synopsis
 
    reservation [<vpn-name>/]<ipaddr> create (<macaddr>|<lookup-key>)
                       [-mac|--blob|-string] [attribute=<value>...]
    reservation [<vpn-name>/]<ipaddr> delete 
    reservation [<vpn-name>/]<ipaddr> get <attribute>
    reservation [<vpn-name>/]<ipaddr> show
    reservation list [[<vpn-name>/]<ipaddr>|-mac|-key]

  Description
 
    The reservation command lets you manipulate Network Registrar's
    global list of reservations. Changes to reservations also modify
    the reservations listed with each scope (and vice versa). Thus,
    these commands are an alternative to the scope's addReservation,
    removeReservation, and listReservation commands.

    A matching scope must exist for each reservation in the global
    list. When you create or delete reservations, they are added or
    removed from the appropriate scope. When multiple scopes exist
    for the same subnet, you must specify the include-tags attribute
    to match the reservation to the appropriate scope. If no matching
    scope is found, the edit is rejected as invalid.

    The reservation list command displays the reservations in
    address order unless -mac or -key is specified to change the
    sort order.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 client-class nameref(ClientClass)
 
Identifies the client-class to use when selecting from among
scopes that might contain a specified reservation.
 description string
 
Describes the device that this reservation object represents.
 device-name string
 
Displays the name of the device represented by this
reservation object.
 include-tags string
 
Displays the selection criteria for this reservation.
 ip6address ip6net
 
Specifies the IPv6 address for the reservation.
 ipaddr ipaddr
 
Displays an IP address within the network that the scope specifies
and that contains the reservation.
 lookup-key blob
 
Displays the  sequence of bytes which is the key for this reservation
object.  If this attribute appears in the reservation object, its
value overrides any value in the mac attribute.  The type of this
object is found in the attribute lookup-key-type.
 mac macaddr
 
Displays the MAC address of the client for whom the specified
IP address is to be reserved.
 relay-info option
 
Sets the contents of DHCP option-82 (relay-agent-info) to insert
in a synthesized lease. For leasequery to work with reservations
for static addresses in a cable environment, the relay-agent option
information needs to be configured with the reservation.  If set,
the attribute should contain all the contents of the relay-agent-info
(option-82) to be provided in a synthesized leasequery response for
this reservation.
 vpn-id int default = 0
 
Displays the identifier of the VPN that contains this reservation.
role
 
    role - Configures a role

  Synopsis
 
    role <name> create <base-role> [<attribute>=<value>] 
    role <name> delete
    role list  
    role listnames
    role <name> show
    role <name> set =<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    role <name> get <attribute>

    role <name> enable <attribute>
    role <name> disable <attribute>

  Description
 
    The role command configures the specified role. A role describes
    the operations that an administrator can perform and any data
    constraints that should be applied. A role must be assigned to
    an administrator group to be associated with an administrator.

    The constaint property should be manipulated using the web UI.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    group, admin
 
  Attributes
 
 all-sub-roles bool default = true
 
Controls whether to ignore the sub-role attribute for this attribute.
If this attribute is unset, or if it is set to true, then the server
ignores the value of the sub-roles attribute and this subrole is
authorized for all sub-roles.  If this attribute is false, then the
sub-roles attribute provides the list of subroles for which this
role instance is authorized.  If the unconstrained attribute
is set to true, then the values of this attribute and the
of the sub-roles attribute are ignored, and the sub-role
authorization for the role is for all sub-roles.
 constraints obj(0)
 
The list of constraints for the role.
 groups string
 
Lists the groups with which this role is associated.  Any member of
a listed group can perform the operations that the role allows.
 name string required,unique
 
Identifies the name of this role.
 read-only bool default = false
 
Indicates that all constraints associated with this role are
limited to read-only access.
 role string
 
Specifies the base role for this object.  The base role defines
operations, such as modifying a zone, that are allowed and
the further constraints on these operations. For example,
a constrained role could limit the list of zones to a specific
list of Owners.
 sub-roles string
 
Lists subroles associated with this role instance. If the
all-sub-roles attribute is unset, or if it is set to true,
then this attribute is ignored.  If the all-sub-roles
attribute is set to false, then this attribute specifies
the list of subroles for this role instance, and an administrator
associated with this role has authorization limited to the
 specified subroles.  If the admininistrator has multiple roles
in which the role attribute is the same, then subrole authorization
for that role should be taken to be the union of all the sets of
subroles from the individual role instances; and, if any of these
role instances has the all-sub-roles attribute set to true,
then subrole authorization for that role is for all sub-roles.
Also, if any role instance for a matching role has the unconstrained
attribute set to true, then subrole authorization for that role is
for all subroles.
 unconstrained bool default = false
 
Indicates that this role has no other constraints beyond
the list of operations it can perform.
router
 
    router - Configures a router

  Synopsis
 
    router <name>  create <address> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    router <name>  delete
    router list
    router listnames
    router <name>  show
    router <name> get  <attribute>
    router <name> set => [<attribute>= ...]
    router <name> unset <attribute>

  Description
 
    The router command lets you configure a router.

    Be aware that while the type attribute is optional, it is
    needed to synchronize router-interface changes to the router.
        
  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    router-type, router-interface
 
  Attributes
 
 address ipaddr required,unique
 
Sets the management interface address for this router.
 description string
 
Describes this router.
 device-timeout int default = 60
 
Indicates the timeout in seconds. The maximum timeout RIC
server's communication handler will wait for data from the router.
 enable clrtxt transient
 
Sets the enable password, in clear-text form. Avoid
this field in normal use and never send the password
over insecure links.  Use this field to provide the
clear-text password to the RIC server which intentionally
does not have access to the secret storage module.
 enable-secret secret
 
Identifies the secret containing the clear-text password
for enabling super-user access to the router.
 interfaces obj(CCMRouterInterface) transient
 
Lists objects describing the interfaces associated with
this router.  This is used when the RIC server is returning
information about a router and its interfaces, or when the
CCM server is returning a list of routers and interfaces for
the UI to display a tree of routers and interfaces.
 login-temp-obj obj(CCMRouterLoginTemplate) transient
 
Specifies the actual login template object.  This attribute
is used so that the CCM server can provide the login template
to the stateless RIC server.
 login-template nameref(CCMRouterLoginTemplate)
 
Names an optional login template that to use
to further customize the RIC server's login and enable
interaction sessions.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
Names this router.
 owner oid
 
Controls the owner of this object.  This owner field
is used to group similarly owned routers and can be used
to limit administrative access.
 password clrtxt transient
 
Determines the password that authenticates the username.
Avoid this field in normal use and never send the password
over insecure links.  Use this field to provide the
clear-text password to the RIC server which intentionally
does not have access to the secret storage module.
 password-secret secret
 
Identifies the secret containing the clear-text password for
authenticating the username.
 region oid
 
Controls the region associated with this object.  This
region field is used to group similarly located routers
and can be used to limit administrative access.
 type nameref(CCMRouterType)
 
Specifies the type of the router.  This is needed so that
the RIC server can use the correct implementation of the
router-specific interface.
 use-ssh enumint(disabled=0, optional=1, required=2) default = 1
 
Specifies whether the RIC server should (or must) use SSH
when communicating with the router.
 username string
 
Identifies the username to log in to this router.
 virtual-router bool default = false, transient
 
Indicates that the Router object is not managed by the
RIC server. This feature may be used when there is no network
connectivity to the router, or when synchronization with the
network configuration is not desired. A virtual router
configuration is stored in the CCM database, but no attempt is
made to push the configuration to the router, or to synchronize
any configuration changes from the router.
router-interface
 
    router-interface - Configures an interface on a router

  Synopsis
 
    router-interface <router> <name> create [<attribute>=...]

    router-interface <router> <name> delete
    router-interface <router> list
    router-interface <router> listnames
    router-interface <router> <name> show

    router-interface <router> <name> get <attribute>
    router-interface <router> <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    router-interface <router> <name> unset <attribute>

  Description
 
    The router-interface command lets you configure an interface on a
    router.
        
  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    router, router-interface-type
 
  Attributes
 
 bundle-id int
 
The id of the bundle for grouping bundled interfaces.
 cable-dhcp-giaddr enumint(policy=2, primary=1, not-present=0) default = 0
 
The setting for giaddr selection in cable interfaces.
 cable-helper ipaddr
 
The list of ip addresses stored as the cable-helper value
on the interface.
 description string
 
The description of this interface.
 ip-helper ipaddr
 
The list of ip addresses stored as the ip-helper value on
the interface.
 is-master bool default = false
 
Indication that this is the master interface in a bundle of
interfaces.
 is-virtual bool default = false
 
Indication if this interface is a virtual sub-interface.
 mac-address macaddr immutable
 
The MAC address of this interface.
 name string required,immutable
 
The name of the router interface.
 parent oid(CCMRouterInterface)
 
The parent interface if we have sub-interfaces or bundled
interfaces configured on the router.
 primary-subnet net
 
The primary subnet (and interface address) for this
interface.
 router oid required
 
A reference by OID to the router that this interface is
part of.
 secondary-subnets net
 
The list of secondary subnets (and interface addresses)
for this interface.
 state bool
 
The enabled/disabled state of this interface.
router-type
 
    router-type - Displays the available router types

  Synopsis
 
    router-type list  
    router-type listnames  


  Description
 
    The router-type command displays the available router types.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    router
 
  Attributes
 
 description string
 
The description of this router type.
 java-class-name string required
 
The java class name for an implementation of
com.cisco.cnr.ricsrv.IRouter that can communicate
with this type of router.
 manufacturer string
 
The name of the manufacturer of this type of router.
 name string required,unique
 
The name of this router type.
 router-os-version string
 
The OS version, as a string for this type of router.
save
 
    save - Saves the current changes to the cluster

  Synopsis
 
    save 

  Description
 
    The save command saves the current configuration changes to the database.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
scope
 
    scope - Specifies the scope's properties

  Synopsis
 
    scope list
    scope listnames  
    scope <name> create <address> <mask> [template=<template-name>]
                        [<attribute>=<value>...]
    scope <name> delete 
    scope <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    scope <name> get <attribute>
    scope <name> unset <attribute>
    scope <name> disable <attribute>
    scope <name> enable <attribute>
    scope <name> show

    scope <name> listLeases 

    scope <name> addRange <start> <end>
    scope <name> removeRange <start> <end>
    scope <name> listRanges

    scope <name> addReservation <ipaddr> (<macaddr>|<lookup-key>)
                                [-mac|-blob|-string]
    scope <name> removeReservation (<ipaddr>|<macaddr>|<lookup-key>)
                                   [-mac|-blob|-string]
    scope <name> listReservations 

    scope <name> changeMask  <mask>
    scope <name> clearUnavailable

    scope <name> applyTemplate <template-name>

  Description
 
    The scope command lets you manipulate address ranges in the 
    DHCP server.
    
    When creating a scope using a template, specify - for the
    <name> to allow the scope template's scope-name to name 
    the scope.

    scope <name> listLeases     
       The listLeases command lists the leases associated
       with this scope.  
    
    scope <name> addRange <start> <end>
    scope <name> removeRange <start> <end>
    scope <name> listRanges
       The addRange command adds a range of available addresses 
       to the scope. The <start> and <end> values can either be
       full IP addresses or host numbers within the scope's 
       subnet.  It is an error if either <start> or <end> is 
       an IP address outside the scope's subnet or is a host
       number that exceeds the bits allocated to host numbers
       by the scope's netmask.
    
       The removeRange command removes a range of addresses from the
       scope's control.  
    
       The listRanges command lists the current ranges of addresses
       available for allocation.  
    
    scope <name> addReservation <ipaddr> (<macaddr>|<lookup-key>)
                                [-mac|-blob|-string]
    scope <name> removeReservation (<ipaddr>|<macaddr>|<lookup-key>)
                                   [-mac|-blob|-string]
    scope <name> listReservations
       The addReservation command adds a reservation for a 
       specific IP address to a specific MAC address or lookup 
       key.
    
       The removeReservation command removes the reservation for
       an IP address, MAC address, or lookup key.
    
       The listReservations command lists the available 
       reservations.
    
    scope <name> changeMask  <mask>  
       The changeMask command changes the scope's netmask.  It 
       also changes the primary-mask properties of any secondary 
       scopes. Warnings are issued if the netmask is "narrowed" 
       and any reservations or ranges fall outside the network 
       defined by the new mask and existing address.

    scope <name> clearUnavailable
       The clearUnavailable command moves all unavailable leases 
       in the specified scope to available.

    scope applyTemplate
       The applyTemplate command applies the specified 
       scope-template to the scope. All properties configured
       on the scope-template are applied to the scope.

    Note: The scope command manages a VPN through a virtual attribute:

       vpn [] (AT_STRING, Optional, default: <none>)
	
    Use this attribute to set or get the VPN ID by VPN name 
    instead of by ID.


  Examples
 
    nrcmd> scope scope-example create 192.168.0.0 255.255.255.224 
    nrcmd> scope scope-example addRange 192.168.0.33 192.168.0.62 
    nrcmd> scope scope-example addReservation 192.168.0.40 00:d0:ba:d3:bd:3b 
    nrcmd> scope scope-example changeMask 255.255.255.192  

  Status
 

  See Also
    scope-template
 
 
    
  Attributes
 
 allocate-first-available bool default = false
 
Enables you to force the allocation of new IP addresses
from this scope to be the first available IP address;
otherwise, the default of the 'least recently used' IP address is
used.
If this attribute is not set, or is unset, then the DHCP server
attribute priority-address-allocation controls whether
to allocate the first available IP address.
If priority-address-allocation is set, and allocate-first-available
for the scope is unset, then the scope allocates addresses as if
allocate-first-available was set.
If allocate-first-available is enabled or disabled for a scope, then
for that scope the setting of priority-address-allocation has no
meaning.
 allocation-priority int default = 0
 
Assigns an order to scopes for allocating IP addresses. Acceptable
scopes, with the highest allocation priority, grant IP addresses
until the addresses are exhausted.
You can mix scopes with an allocation-priority along with those
without a priority in the same network.  In this case, scopes with
allocation priorities are examined for acceptability before those
scopes with no allocation-priority. Lower numeric values have
higher priorities, but an allocation-priority of 0 (the default) has
no priority.
If this attribute is not set, or is unset or 0, then the
DHCP priority-address-allocation attribute controls the priority
of the scope. If the DHCP priority-address-allocation attribute is
set, and allocation-priority for the scope is unset, then the
allocation-priority for the scope is the network number of the
scope.
If you explicitly set allocation-priority, then, for that scope,
the DHCP setting of priority-address-allocation has no meaning.
 backup-pct percent
 
Determines the percentage of available addresses that the main server
sends to the backup server. If you define this value using the
scope command, make sure you define it on the main server. If you
define it on a backup server, it is ignored.
Used with the scope command, the backup-pct attribute overrides
the defined values on the failover pair for backup-pct and
dynamic-bootp-backup-pct. The attribute value defined with the scope
command becomes the value used for this scope, whether or not this
scope supports dynamic-bootp.
If you set the value to zero (0), the backup server receives no
addresses. Since 0 is a significant value, once you set this value,
you must unset it for the scope to use the failover pair's values for
backup-pct or dynamic-bootp-backup-pct.
Note: If the failover pair is configured to use load balancing, the
backup-pct is ignored and 50% is used.
 bootp bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether the server accepts BOOTP requests. If you want
clients to always receive the same addresses, you must reserve
IP addresses for all your BOOTP clients.
 deactivated bool
 
Controls whether a scope extends leases to any clients. A deactivated
scope does not extend leases to any clients. It treats all addresses
in its ranges as if they were individually deactivated.
 description string
 
Describes the scope.
 dhcp bool default = enabled
 
Controls whether the DHCP server accepts DHCP requests for this
scope. Disable DHCP if you want a scope to use BOOTP exclusively
or you want to deactivate the scope temporarily.
 dns-host-bytes rangeint(1-4)
 
Tells DHCP how many bytes in a lease IP address to use when forming
in-addr.arpa names. The server forms names in the in-addr zone by
prepending dns-host-bytes of IP address (in reverse order) to the
reverse zone name. If unset, the server synthesizes an appropriate
value based on the scope's subnet size.
 dynamic-bootp bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether the server will accept dynamic BOOTP
requests for this scope.  Dynamic BOOTP requests are BOOTP requests
that do not match a reservation, but could be satisfied from the
available lease pool. To use this feature you must also enable
bootp.
 embedded-policy obj(0)
 
Displays the embedded policy for a scope.
 failover-backup-allocation-boundary ipaddr
 
Sets the IP address allocation boundary for a backup server in a
failover relationship.
If the allocate-first-available attribute is set, the backup
server allocates IP addresses in descending order from this
boundary.
If the allocate-first available attribute is unset or set to 0,
the boundary used for allocating addresses is half the
distance between the first and last IP address configured in the
ranges for this scope.  If no IP addresses are available
below this boundary, the first IP address available above this
boundary is used.
 free-address-config nameref(AddrTrapConfig)
 
Identifies which trap captures unexpected free address events
on this scope.
 ignore-declines bool default = false
 
Determines whether the server reacts to server DHCPDECLINE
messages that refer to one of the scope's IP addresses.
If enabled (true), the DHCP server ignores all declines that
refer to an IP address in this scope.  If disabled, the DHCP server
sets to UNAVAILABLE every IP address referred to in this scope.
Default is false (disabled).
 ping-clients bool default = disabled
 
Controls whether the server should attempt to ping an address
before offering a lease. If enabled (true), this attribute also
indicates a ping timeout.
 ping-timeout int default = 300
 
Sets the number of milliseconds the DHCP server waits for ping
responses.  If you make this value too large, you  slow down
the lease offering processes. If you make this value too small,
you reduce the effectiveness of pinging addresses before
offering them. Three hundred milliseconds (the default value) is
often the best choice.
 policy nameref(Policy) default = default, required
 
Identifies the name of the policy associated with this scope. Default
is the default policy.  This means that the scope uses all the
properties set in the default policy (including the lease time),
unless you specifically reset a property.
 primary-subnet subnet
 
Determines the subnet address and mask of the primary scope.
Use this attribute when multiple logical IP subnets are present
on the same physical network.
 renew-only bool
 
Controls whether to allow existing clients to reacquire their
leases, but not offer any leases to new clients.  Note that a
renew-only scope does not change the client associated with any
of its leases (other than to allow a client, currently using what
the server believes is an available IP address, to continue using
the address).
 selection-tag-list string
 
Associates a comma-separated list of selection tags with a
scope. The scope compares a client's selection criteria to this
list in order to determine whether the client can obtain a lease
from the scope.
 subnet subnet required
 
The network address of the IP subnet that this scope represents.
 vpn-id int default = 0, immutable
 
Displays the identifier of the DHCP VPN that contains the addresses
in this scope.  Define this value with  the vpn vpn-name create id
command. Once set, you cannot change this value.
scope-policy
 
    scope-policy - Adds DHCP policy information to a scope

  Synopsis
 
    scope-policy <scope-name> delete
    scope-policy <scope-name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    scope-policy <scope-name> get <attribute>
    scope-policy <scope-name> unset <attribute>
    
    scope-policy <scope-name> disable <attribute>
    scope-policy <scope-name> enable <attribute>
    scope-policy <scope-name> show
    
    scope-policy <scope-name> setLeaseTime <time-val>
    scope-policy <scope-name> getLeaseTime
    
    scope-policy <scope-name> setOption <opt-name | id> <value>
    scope-policy <scope-name> getOption <opt-name | id>
    scope-policy <scope-name> unsetOption <opt-name | id> 
    scope-policy <scope-name> listOptions

    scope-policy <scope-name> 
        setVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name> <value>
    scope-policy <scope-name> 
        getVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>
    scope-policy <scope-name> 
        unsetVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>
    scope-policy <scope-name> listVendorOptions

  Description
 
    The scope-policy command lets you configure embedded DHCP policy
    information for a DHCP scope.  An embedded policy is a collection of
    DHCP option values and settings associated with (and named by)
    another object -- in this case a scope.  A scope policy is created
    implicitly when you first reference it, and is deleted when the
    scope is deleted.
    
    You can set individual option values with the setOption command,
    unset option values with the unsetOption command, and view option
    values with the getOption and listOptions commands.  When you set an
    option value the DHCP server replaces any existing value or
    creates a new one as needed for the given option name.
    
    You can use the setLeaseTime command to set the values of lease
    times and the getLeaseTime command to display the value of a lease
    time.

    
  Examples
 
    nrcmd> scope-policy scope-example set backup-pct=30
    nrcmd> scope-policy scope-example enable allocate-first-available


  Status
 

  See Also
    policy, client-policy, client-class-policy
 
  Attributes
 
 affinity-period time
 
Associates a lease in the AVAILABLE state with the client that
last held the lease. If the client requests a lease during the
affinity period, it is granted the same lease; that is, unless
renewals are prohibited, then it is explicitly not given the lease.
Because of the vast IPv6 address space and depending on the address
generation technique, it could be millions of years before an
address ever needs reassignment to a different client, and there
is no reason to hold on to this information for that long.
To prohibit renewals enable either the inhibit-all-renews attribute
or the inhibit-renews-at-reboot attribute.
 allow-client-a-record-update bool default = disabled
 
Determines if a client is allowed to update A records.
If the client sets the flags in the FQDN option to indicate that
it wants to do the A record update in the request, and if this
value is TRUE, the server allows the client to do the A record
update; otherwise, based on other server configurations, the server
does the A record update.
 allow-dual-zone-dns-update bool default = disabled
 
Enables DHCP clients to perform DNS updates into two DNS zones.
To support these clients, you can configure the DHCP server to
allow the client to perform an update, but also to perform a DNS
update on the client's behalf.
 allow-lease-time-override bool default = disabled
 
Gives the server control over the lease period.  Although a client
can request a specific lease time, the server need not honor the
request if this attribute is set to false (the default).
Even if set to true, clients can request only lease times that are
shorter than those configured for the server.
 allow-non-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request non-temporary
(IA_NA) addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request non-temporary addresses.
 allow-rapid-commit bool default = false
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can use a Solicit with the
Rapid Commit option to obtain configuration information with
fewer messages. To permit this, make sure that a single DHCP
server is servicing clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked:
  - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
    FALSE, Rapid Commit is not allowed.
  - If at least one has it set to TRUE, Rapid Commit is allowed.
  - Otherwise, the remaining policies in the hierarchy are
    checked.
The default is not to allow clients to use Rapid Commit.
 allow-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request temporary (IA_TA)
addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request temporary addresses.
 default-prefix-length rangeint(0-128) default = 64
 
For delegation, specifies the default length of the delegated prefix,
if a router (client) does not explicitly request it.
The default length must always be less than or equal to the prefix
length of the prefix range.
 forward-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which forward zones to include in updates.
 forward-zone-name dname
 
Designates an optional forward zone for DNS updates.
 giaddr-as-server-id bool default = false
 
Enables the DHCP server to set the server-id option on a DHCPOFFER
and a DHCPACK to the giaddr of the incoming packet, instead of the
IP address of the server (the default action).
This causes all unicast renews to be sent to the relay agent instead
of directly to the DHCP server, and so renews arrive at the DHCP
server with option-82 information appended to the packet.
Some relay agents may not support this capability and, in some
complex configurations, the giaddr might not actually be an address
to which the DHCP client can send A unicast packet. In these cases,
the DHCP client cannot renew a lease, and must always perform a
rebind operation (where the DHCP client broadcasts a request instead
of sending a unicast to what it believes is the DHCP server).
 grace-period time default = 5m
 
Defines the length of time between the expiration of a lease
and the time it is made available for reassignment.
 inhibit-all-renews bool default = false
 
Causes the server to reject all renewal requests, forcing the client
to obtain a different address any time it contacts the DHCP server.
 inhibit-renews-at-reboot bool default = false
 
Permits clients to renew their leases, but the server forces
them to obtain new addresses each time they reboot.
 limitation-count int
 
Specifies the maximum number of clients with the same limitation-id
that are allowed to have currently active and valid leases.
 offer-timeout time default = 2m
 
Instructs the server to wait a specified amount of time when it
has offered a lease to a client, but the offer is not yet accepted.
At the end of the specified time interval, the server makes the
lease available again.
 packet-file-name string
 
Identifies the boot-file to use in the boot process of a client.
The server returns this file name in the 'file' field of its replies.
The packet-file-name cannot be longer than 128 characters.
 packet-server-name string
 
Identifies the host-name of the server to use in a client's boot
process. The server returns this file name in the 'sname' field
of its replies. The packet-server-name field cannot be longer
than 64 characters.
 packet-siaddr ipaddr
 
Identifies the IP address of the next server in the client boot
process. For example, this might be the address of a TFTP server
used by BOOTP clients. The server returns this address in the
'siaddr' field of its replies.
 permanent-leases bool default = disabled
 
Indicates whether leases using this policy are permanently granted
to requesting clients. If leases are permanently granted, the server
ignores the configured dhcp-lease-time option value and uses the
maximum lease time.
 preferred-lifetime time default = 1w
 
Assigns the default and maximum preferred lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative to
the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets the
length of time that the address is preferred; that is, its use is
unrestricted. When the preferred lifetime expires, the address
becomes deprecated and its use is restricted.
 reconfigure enumint(allow=1, disallow=2, require=3) default = allow
 
Controls DHCPv6 client reconfiguration support:
   1  allow        Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server will honor the
                   request (default).
   2  disallow     Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support but the server will not honor
                   the clients' request.
   3  require      Requires clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server drops client
                   Solicit and Request messages that do not
                   include a Reconfigure-Accept option.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked
as follows:
   - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
   disallow or require, that setting is used.
   - Otherwise, if at least one has it set to allow, Reconfigure
   is allowed.
   - If no prefix policies have this attribute set, the remaining
   policies in the hierarchy are checked.
 reconfigure-via-relay bool default = false
 
Controls whether the server should prefer unicasting or
relaying DHCPv6 Reconfigure messages.
If false (the default), the server prefers to unicast
Reconfigure messages if the client has one or more valid
statefully assigned addresses.
If true, the server prefers to send Reconfigure messages
via the relay agent unless no relay agent information is
available.
Note: When you use this attribute, consider that:
    -  In networks where the DCHPv6 server cannot communicate
       directly with its client devices?for example, where
       firewalls are in place?set this value to true.
    -  The DHCPv6 server does not use embedded and named
       policies configured on a client when it evaluates
       this attribute.
    -  The relay agent cannot be used if the Relay-Forw message
       came from a link-local address.
 reverse-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which reverse zones to include in a DNS update.
 server-lease-time time
 
Tells the server how long a lease is valid.  For more frequent
communication with a client, you might have the server consider
leases as leased for a longer period than the client considers them.
This also provides more lease-time stability. This value is not used
unless it is longer than the lease time in the dhcp-lease-time option
found through the normal traversal of policies.
 split-lease-times bool default = disabled
 
Specifies a value that the DHCP server might use internally to
affect lease times.
If enabled, the DHCP server still offers clients lease times that
reflect the configured lease-time option from the appropriate
policy; but the server bases its decisions regarding expiration
on the 'server-lease-time' value.
 unavailable-timeout time default = 24h
 
Permits the server to make a lease unavailable for the time specified
and then to return the lease to available state. If there is no value
configured in the system_default_policy, then the default is
86400 seconds (or 24 hours).
 use-client-id-for-reservations bool default = off
 
Controls how the server database checks for reserved IP
addresses.
By default, the server uses the MAC address of the DHCP client as the
key for its database lookup.  If this attribute is set to true
(enabled), then the server does the check for reserved
addresses using the DHCP client-id, which the client usually sends.
In cases where the DHCP client does not supply the client-id, the
server synthesizes it, and uses that value.
 v4-bootp-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all BOOTP clients.
 v4-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all DHCPv4 clients, whether
or not the client specifically asks for the option data.
 v6-reply-options optionid6
 
Lists the options that should be returned in any
replies to DHCPv6 clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked.
 valid-lifetime time default = 2w
 
Assigns the default and maximum valid lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative
to the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets
the length of time that an address remains valid.  When this
period of time expires, the address becomes invalid and
unusable. The valid lifetime must be greater than or equal
to the preferred lifetime.
scope-template
 
    scope-template - Configures a scope template

  Synopsis
 
    scope-template <name> create [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    scope-template <name> delete
    scope-template <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    scope-template <name> get <attribute>
    scope-template <name> unset <attribute>

    scope-template <name> disable <attribute>
    scope-template <name> enable <attribute>
    scope-template <name> show

    scope-template <name> create clone=<clone-name>
    scope-template <name> apply-to <all | <scope1>[,...]>

  Description
 
    The scope-template command lets you configure a template to use
    when creating scopes.

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> scope-template scope-example createscope-template scope-example set backup-pct=30scope-template scope-example enable allocate-first-available

  Status
 

  See Also
    scope
 
  Attributes
 
 allocate-first-available bool
 
This boolean attribute forces all allocation of new IP addresses from
this scope to be made from the first available IP address, rather than
the default of the "least recently used" IP address.
If this attribute is not set (unset), then the decision on whether to
allocate the first available IP address in the scope will be
controlled by the DHCP server attribute priority-address-allocation.
If priority-address-allocation is set (and allocate-first-available
for the scope is not set (unset)), then the scope will allocate
addresses as if allocate-first-available was set.  If
allocate-first-available has been explicitly configured (either
enabled or disabled) for a scope, then for that scope the setting of
priority-address-allocation has no meaning.
 allocation-priority int
 
You can use the allocation-priority to assign an ordering to scopes,
such that allocation of IP addresses will take place from acceptable
scopes with a higher priority until the IP addresses in all those
scopes are exhausted.  An allocation-priority of 0 is treated as not
having an allocation-proiority.  You can mix scopes with an
allocation-priority along with those without an allocation-priority
(or with an allocation-priority of 0, which is the same thing) in the
same network.  In this case, the scopes with an allocation priority
will be examined for acceptability prior to those scopes with no
allocation-priority (or an allocation-priority of 0).
If this attribute is not set (unset), then the allocation-priority of
the scope will be controlled by the DHCP server attribute
priority-address-allocation.  If priority-address-allocation is set
(and allocation-priority for the scope is not set (unset)), then the
allocation-priority for the scope will be the network number of the
scope.  If allocation-priority has been explicitly configured for a
scope, then for that scope the setting of priority-address-allocation
has no meaning.
 backup-pct percent
 
The percentage of available addresses that the main server
should send to the backup server.  If defined for a scope, it
must be defined for the scope in the main server.  If it is
defined in a backup server, it is ignored (to enable copying
of configurations).  If it is defined, the defined value will
override the failover pair's defined values for backup-pct
and dynamic-bootp-backup-pct, and the value defined here is
the value that will be used for this scope, whether or not
this scope supports dynamic-bootp.  If it is set to zero (0),
no addresses will be sent to the backup server.  Since zero
is a significant value, once set, this parameter must be
unset in order for this scope to utilize the failover pair's
values for backup-pct or dynamic-bootp-backup-pct.
Note: If the failover pair is configured to use load balancing,
the percentage is ignored and 50% is used.
 bootp bool
 
Controls whether the server will accept BOOTP requests
for this scope. If you want clients to always receive the
same addresses, you need to reserve IP addresses for all your
BOOTP clients.
 deactivated bool
 
A deactivated scope will not extend leases to any clients. It treats
all of the addresses in its ranges as if they were individually
deactivated.
 description string
 
Describes the scope template.
 dhcp bool
 
Controls whether the server will accept DHCP requests
for this scope. Typically, this is only disabled when
bootp is enabled for that scope, to allow only a scope
to be used exclusively for BOOTP.
 dns-host-bytes rangeint(1-4)
 
This value tells DHCP how many of the bytes in a lease's IP address to
use when forming in-addr.arpa names. The server forms names in the
in-addr zone by prepending dns-host-bytes of IP address (in reverse
order) to the reverse zone name.
If this is unset, the server will synthesize an appropriate value
based on the scope's subnet size.
 dynamic-bootp bool
 
Controls whether the server will accept dynamic BOOTP
requests for this scope.  Dynamic BOOTP requests are BOOTP requests
that do not match a reservation, but could be satisfied from the
available lease pool. To use this feature you must also enable bootp.
 embedded-policy obj(0)
 
The embedded policy object for this scope.
 free-address-config nameref(AddrTrapConfig)
 
The free-address trap configuration to use for this individual scope.
 grace-period time
 
The length of time between the expiration of a lease and the time it
is made available for re-assignment.
 ignore-declines bool
 
This attribute controls whether the DHCP server will process a
DHCPDECLINE request referencing an IP address in this scope.  If
this attribute is enabled, then the DHCP server will ignore all
declines which reference an IP address in this scope.  If this
attribute is not set, the DHCP server will set to UNAVAILABLE
every IP address which is referenced in a DHCPDECLINE message.
The default value is false, so that DHCPDECLINE messages are
processed normally, and the IP addresses referenced in these
DHCPDECLINE messages are set to UNAVAILABLE.
 name string required,unique
 
The name of this scope template.
 offer-timeout time
 
If the server offers a lease to a client, but the offer is not
accepted, the server will wait the specified number of seconds before
making the lease 'available' again.
 options-expr expr
 
An expression to define the list of embedded policy options
to be created for a scope object.
 ping-clients bool
 
Controls whether the server should attempt to ping
addresses before offering leases.
 ping-timeout int
 
The number of milliseconds the DHCP server should wait for ping
responses.  If you make this value too large, you will slow down the
lease offering processes. If you make this value too small, you will
reduce the effectiveness of pinging addresses before offering them.
 policy nameref(Policy) default = default
 
The name of the policy associated with this scope.
 ranges-expr expr
 
An expression to define the list of scope ranges to be created
for a scope object.
 renew-only bool
 
Controls whether to allow existing clients to reacquire their leases,
but not offer any leases to new clients.  Note that a 'renew-only'
scope will not change the client associated with any of its leases
(other than to allow a client currently using what the server believes
is an available IP address to continue using it).
 router-host int
 
This is use to create the ip address from the subnet to put it on the
router interface because router interface does not take network id.
It takes ipaddress and mask
 scope-description-expr expr
 
Defines an AT_STRING expression to apply to the description
on the scope object created when using the template.
 scope-name expr
 
An expression to define the name of the scope object created
when using the scope template.
 selection-tag-list string
 
The list of selection tags to associate with a scope.
 update-dns-for-bootp bool
 
If the server is replying to a BOOTP request, and is offering a lease
from a Scope which is configured to perform DNS updates, it will check
this property before beginning the DNS update. This feature allows
an administrator to prevent DNS updates for BOOTP clients, while
allowing updates for DHCP clients.
'Update-dns-for-bootp' can be controlled globally with the 'server'
command; that global command can be overridden by individual Scopes
as necessary.
 vpn-id int default = 0
 
The id of the dhcp vpn that contains this scope.  The
vpn-id of a scope must be initialized when the scope
is created, and cannot be edited once it is set.
scope-template-policy
 
    scope-template-policy - Edits a DHCP policy embedded in a scope-
                            template

  Synopsis
 
    scope-template-policy <name> delete
    scope-template-policy <name> set
             <attribute>=<value> 
             [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    scope-template-policy <name> get <attribute>
    scope-template-policy <name> disable <attribute>
    scope-template-policy <name> enable <attribute>
    scope-template-policy <name> show
    
    scope-template-policy <name> setLeaseTime <time-val>
    scope-template-policy <name> getLeaseTime
    
    scope-template-policy <name> setOption <opt-name | id> <value>
    scope-template-policy <name> getOption <opt-name | id>
    scope-template-policy <name> unsetOption <opt-name | id> 
    scope-template-policy <name> listOptions

    scope-template-policy <name>
        setVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name> <value>
    scope-template-policy <name> 
        getVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>
    scope-template-policy <name> 
        unsetVendorOption <opt-name | id> <opt-set-name>
    scope-template-policy <name> listVendorOptions

  Description
 
    The scope-template-policy command lets you configure a DHCP
    policy embedded in a DHCP scope template.  An embedded policy is a
    collection of DHCP option values and settings associated with (and
    named by) another object -- in this case a scope template.  A
    scope-template-policy is created implicitly when you first
    reference it, and is deleted when the scope-template is deleted.

    You can set individual option values with the setOption command,
    unset option values with the unsetOption command, and view option
    values with the getOption and listOptions commands.  When you set
    an option value the DHCP server will replace any existing value or
    create a new one as needed for the given option name.

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> scope-template-policy exampleScope set default-prefix-
length=32
    nrcmd> scope-template-policy exampleScope enable allow-rapid-
commit

  Status
 

  See Also
    policy, client-policy, client-class-policy, dhcp-address-block-policy, link-policy, prefix-policy, scope-policy
 
  Attributes
 
 affinity-period time
 
Associates a lease in the AVAILABLE state with the client that
last held the lease. If the client requests a lease during the
affinity period, it is granted the same lease; that is, unless
renewals are prohibited, then it is explicitly not given the lease.
Because of the vast IPv6 address space and depending on the address
generation technique, it could be millions of years before an
address ever needs reassignment to a different client, and there
is no reason to hold on to this information for that long.
To prohibit renewals enable either the inhibit-all-renews attribute
or the inhibit-renews-at-reboot attribute.
 allow-client-a-record-update bool default = disabled
 
Determines if a client is allowed to update A records.
If the client sets the flags in the FQDN option to indicate that
it wants to do the A record update in the request, and if this
value is TRUE, the server allows the client to do the A record
update; otherwise, based on other server configurations, the server
does the A record update.
 allow-dual-zone-dns-update bool default = disabled
 
Enables DHCP clients to perform DNS updates into two DNS zones.
To support these clients, you can configure the DHCP server to
allow the client to perform an update, but also to perform a DNS
update on the client's behalf.
 allow-lease-time-override bool default = disabled
 
Gives the server control over the lease period.  Although a client
can request a specific lease time, the server need not honor the
request if this attribute is set to false (the default).
Even if set to true, clients can request only lease times that are
shorter than those configured for the server.
 allow-non-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request non-temporary
(IA_NA) addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request non-temporary addresses.
 allow-rapid-commit bool default = false
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can use a Solicit with the
Rapid Commit option to obtain configuration information with
fewer messages. To permit this, make sure that a single DHCP
server is servicing clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked:
  - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
    FALSE, Rapid Commit is not allowed.
  - If at least one has it set to TRUE, Rapid Commit is allowed.
  - Otherwise, the remaining policies in the hierarchy are
    checked.
The default is not to allow clients to use Rapid Commit.
 allow-temporary-addresses bool default = true
 
Determines whether DHCPv6 clients can request temporary (IA_TA)
addresses.
The default is to allow clients to request temporary addresses.
 default-prefix-length rangeint(0-128) default = 64
 
For delegation, specifies the default length of the delegated prefix,
if a router (client) does not explicitly request it.
The default length must always be less than or equal to the prefix
length of the prefix range.
 forward-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which forward zones to include in updates.
 forward-zone-name dname
 
Designates an optional forward zone for DNS updates.
 giaddr-as-server-id bool default = false
 
Enables the DHCP server to set the server-id option on a DHCPOFFER
and a DHCPACK to the giaddr of the incoming packet, instead of the
IP address of the server (the default action).
This causes all unicast renews to be sent to the relay agent instead
of directly to the DHCP server, and so renews arrive at the DHCP
server with option-82 information appended to the packet.
Some relay agents may not support this capability and, in some
complex configurations, the giaddr might not actually be an address
to which the DHCP client can send A unicast packet. In these cases,
the DHCP client cannot renew a lease, and must always perform a
rebind operation (where the DHCP client broadcasts a request instead
of sending a unicast to what it believes is the DHCP server).
 grace-period time default = 5m
 
Defines the length of time between the expiration of a lease
and the time it is made available for reassignment.
 inhibit-all-renews bool default = false
 
Causes the server to reject all renewal requests, forcing the client
to obtain a different address any time it contacts the DHCP server.
 inhibit-renews-at-reboot bool default = false
 
Permits clients to renew their leases, but the server forces
them to obtain new addresses each time they reboot.
 limitation-count int
 
Specifies the maximum number of clients with the same limitation-id
that are allowed to have currently active and valid leases.
 offer-timeout time default = 2m
 
Instructs the server to wait a specified amount of time when it
has offered a lease to a client, but the offer is not yet accepted.
At the end of the specified time interval, the server makes the
lease available again.
 packet-file-name string
 
Identifies the boot-file to use in the boot process of a client.
The server returns this file name in the 'file' field of its replies.
The packet-file-name cannot be longer than 128 characters.
 packet-server-name string
 
Identifies the host-name of the server to use in a client's boot
process. The server returns this file name in the 'sname' field
of its replies. The packet-server-name field cannot be longer
than 64 characters.
 packet-siaddr ipaddr
 
Identifies the IP address of the next server in the client boot
process. For example, this might be the address of a TFTP server
used by BOOTP clients. The server returns this address in the
'siaddr' field of its replies.
 permanent-leases bool default = disabled
 
Indicates whether leases using this policy are permanently granted
to requesting clients. If leases are permanently granted, the server
ignores the configured dhcp-lease-time option value and uses the
maximum lease time.
 preferred-lifetime time default = 1w
 
Assigns the default and maximum preferred lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative to
the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets the
length of time that the address is preferred; that is, its use is
unrestricted. When the preferred lifetime expires, the address
becomes deprecated and its use is restricted.
 reconfigure enumint(allow=1, disallow=2, require=3) default = allow
 
Controls DHCPv6 client reconfiguration support:
   1  allow        Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server will honor the
                   request (default).
   2  disallow     Allows clients to request reconfiguration
                   support but the server will not honor
                   the clients' request.
   3  require      Requires clients to request reconfiguration
                   support and the server drops client
                   Solicit and Request messages that do not
                   include a Reconfigure-Accept option.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked
as follows:
   - If any of the prefix policies has this attribute set to
   disallow or require, that setting is used.
   - Otherwise, if at least one has it set to allow, Reconfigure
   is allowed.
   - If no prefix policies have this attribute set, the remaining
   policies in the hierarchy are checked.
 reconfigure-via-relay bool default = false
 
Controls whether the server should prefer unicasting or
relaying DHCPv6 Reconfigure messages.
If false (the default), the server prefers to unicast
Reconfigure messages if the client has one or more valid
statefully assigned addresses.
If true, the server prefers to send Reconfigure messages
via the relay agent unless no relay agent information is
available.
Note: When you use this attribute, consider that:
    -  In networks where the DCHPv6 server cannot communicate
       directly with its client devices?for example, where
       firewalls are in place?set this value to true.
    -  The DHCPv6 server does not use embedded and named
       policies configured on a client when it evaluates
       this attribute.
    -  The relay agent cannot be used if the Relay-Forw message
       came from a link-local address.
 reverse-dnsupdate nameref(DnsUpdateConfig)
 
Specifies the name of the update configuration that determines
which reverse zones to include in a DNS update.
 server-lease-time time
 
Tells the server how long a lease is valid.  For more frequent
communication with a client, you might have the server consider
leases as leased for a longer period than the client considers them.
This also provides more lease-time stability. This value is not used
unless it is longer than the lease time in the dhcp-lease-time option
found through the normal traversal of policies.
 split-lease-times bool default = disabled
 
Specifies a value that the DHCP server might use internally to
affect lease times.
If enabled, the DHCP server still offers clients lease times that
reflect the configured lease-time option from the appropriate
policy; but the server bases its decisions regarding expiration
on the 'server-lease-time' value.
 unavailable-timeout time default = 24h
 
Permits the server to make a lease unavailable for the time specified
and then to return the lease to available state. If there is no value
configured in the system_default_policy, then the default is
86400 seconds (or 24 hours).
 use-client-id-for-reservations bool default = off
 
Controls how the server database checks for reserved IP
addresses.
By default, the server uses the MAC address of the DHCP client as the
key for its database lookup.  If this attribute is set to true
(enabled), then the server does the check for reserved
addresses using the DHCP client-id, which the client usually sends.
In cases where the DHCP client does not supply the client-id, the
server synthesizes it, and uses that value.
 v4-bootp-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all BOOTP clients.
 v4-reply-options optionid4
 
Lists the options the server returns to all DHCPv4 clients, whether
or not the client specifically asks for the option data.
 v6-reply-options optionid6
 
Lists the options that should be returned in any
replies to DHCPv6 clients.
This attribute has special handling during the policy hierarchy
processing when checking the Prefix policies (embedded or named)
for the Prefixes on a Link. The Prefixes for the Link are
processed in alphabetic (case blind) order. For each Prefix, the
embedded and then named policy are checked. Only Prefixes to which
the client has access (based on selection tags, etc.) are checked.
 valid-lifetime time default = 2w
 
Assigns the default and maximum valid lifetime for leases to
DHCPv6 client interfaces. Expressed in seconds and relative
to the time the server sent the packet, this attribute sets
the length of time that an address remains valid.  When this
period of time expires, the address becomes invalid and
unusable. The valid lifetime must be greater than or equal
to the preferred lifetime.
server
 
    server - Configures and controls the server objects

  Synopsis
 
    The server keyword is optional. You can enter all commands starting
    with just the server type (<server>).
    
    server <server> disable <attribute>
    server <server> enable <attribute>

    server <server> get <attribute>

    server <server> start
    server <server> stop
    server <server> reload

    server <server> getHealth
    server <server> getStats

    server <server> setDebug < category-list>=<value> [<output>]
    server <server> unsetDebug
    server <server> getDebug

    server <server> serverLogs show
    server <server> serverLogs nlogs=<nlogs> logsize=<logsize>
    
  Description
 
    The server command is used to send general control messages and
    queries to the servers in the cluster. <server> may be ccm, dhcp,
    dns, snmp, or tftp.
    
    Not all servers support all commands.

    The stop command stops the specified server.

    The start command starts the specified server.

    The reload command reloads the specified server, possibly with new
    configuration information.

    The getHealth command gets the specified server's current health value.

    The getStats command gets the specified server's current statistics.

    The setDebug command sets the debugging level and debug message output
    location.  The valid values for <output> are: MLOG, FILE, and WINDOW.
    The default value is MLOG.

    The unsetDebug command turns off debugging output.
    
    The serverLogs show command displays the number of log files and the 
    maximum size for each file.
    
    The serverLogs command allows setting the two server logging parameters,
    nlogs and logsize.  Either or both may be specified in the command, and
    changes occur only to the one(s) specified.  When setting logsize,
    the value may be suffixed with K or M to signify units of thousands or
    millions.  Note that in order for these changes to take effect you must
    save the changes and restart the server Agent. 
    
       server dhcp serverLogs nlogs=6 logsize=500K
       server dns serverLogs logsize=5M

    The features that can be enabled or disabled are:
       start-on-reboot
	    For any server, controls whether this server is started by
	    the Network Registrar server agent.  Disabling this feature
          for a server is useful for clusters that want to provide a 
          single protocol service.  By default both the DNS and DHCP
	    services are enabled.

    The properties that can be read with the get command are:
       version
           The version string for this server.

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> server DNS stop
    nrcmd>  server DNS start
    nrcmd> server DHCP getHealth
    nrcmd> server DNS disable start-on-reboot   

  See Also
    ccm(nrcmd), dns(nrcmd), dhcp(nrcmd), snmp(nrcmd), tftp(nrcmd), nrcmd documentation
session
 
    session - Configures nrcmd program session parameters

  Synopsis
 
    session set <attribute>=<value>
    session get <attribute>
    session enable <attribute>
    session disable <attribute>
    session show

    session cache <refresh | clear>

    session listNetInterfaces
    
    session log [<filename>]

  Description
 
    The session command lets you view and set session parameters,
    such as the session visibility and the default output
    format of your nrcmd program session.

    The listNetInterfaces command returns a list of the network
    interfaces that are present on the machine running 
    Network Registrar. Both IPv4 and IPv6 interfaces are included.
    
    The log command closes the currently open log file, if any,
    and opens a new log file to which subsequent output is written
    if a filename is specified.

 

  Features
 
	
    cache
       The CLI caches many configuration objects that it reads. If
	 multiple users are making changes simultaneously, one CLI
	 instance may have cached an out-of-date version of an object.
	 The cache refresh command causes the CLI to clear its local
	 cache of all unmodified objects, forcing the CLI to re-read
	 objects from the configuration database. The cache clear 
       command forces the CLI to clear all cached data, whether or
       not unsaved changes have been made.

    cluster
       The name of the current cluster.  This is a read-only property.
 
    current-vpn (or current-namespace)
	 The name of the current VPN presently in effect.  This is a
	 read/write property.  This is the VPN used in commands which
	 need a VPN (e.g., lease, report, export) and no VPN is
	 explicitly specified when the command is issued. The reserved
	 vpn-name "global" is the VPN which contains all of the IP
	 addresses not in any explicitly named VPN, and is the default
	 current-vpn for the session.
	
	 Note: If the session is interactive, the nrcmd> prompt
	 is changed to nrcmd [VPN=<vpn-name>]> except when the
	 current-vpn is global.

    default-format
       The default-format is an enumerated string that can have
       the following settings.  If not set, it is interpreted as
       script.

          user - Show objects in user-friendly form: one property
          per line.
    
          script - Show objects in script friendly form: one object
          per line.
          
    error
       The error detail for the last request to the CCM server that 
       failed. This report is often used to get more detailed information
       about why a nrcmd command failed to complete successfully.
        
       Note: The error detail may not reflect the final result of the 
       nrcmd command because some commands result in multiple requests
       to CCM, one or more of which may have failed and the error detail
       reports only on the last failed operation (which may not be the
       last operation).

    groups
       Displays the list of groups associated with the current user.

    roles
       Displays the list of roles associated with the current user.

    scope-edit-mode
       The edit mode currently in effect when editing DHCP scopes. The
	 valid values are 'staged' and 'synchronous' (or 'sync'). The value
	 'default' will use the value configured at the CCM server.
	 This feature only appears in Network Registrar 6.2 and later releases.

    user-name
       The name of the current user.  This is a read-only property.

    version
       Retrieves the version associated with the Network Registrar
       cluster.
        
    visibility
       The session visibility setting. The default level is 5, which is
       the normal operating mode. Visibility level 3 can be set to view
       'expert' level properties. These additional, reserved properties 
       should be modified with caution. Incorrect settings for these 
       properties can result in network outages. The default settings 
       are the best choice in virtually all cases and should not be 
       changed, except to address a specific network issue. Changes 
       should not be attempted without assistance from the Cisco TAC.

    zone-edit-mode
       The edit mode currently in effect when editing CNR zones. The
	 valid values are 'staged' and 'synchronous' (or 'sync'). The value
	 'default' will use the value configured at the CCM server.
	 This only appears for CNR 6.2 and later releases.

    
  Examples
 
    
  Status
 

  See Also
   
snmp
 
    snmp - Configures and controls the SNMP server

  Synopsis
 
    snmp disable <attribute>
    snmp enable <attribute>
    
    snmp get <attribute>
    snmp set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    snmp unset <attribute>
    snmp [show]

  Description
 
    The snmp command configures the Network Registrar SNMP server.
    The SNMP server makes some Network Registrar statistics 
    available to SNMP clients, and generates SNMP traps based on 
    the status of the other Network Registrar servers.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    server
 
  Attributes
 
 cache-ttl time default = 60s
 
Controls how long CNR data can be cached by the SNMP server as it
responds to SNMP GETs.
 community string default = public
 
SNMP requests must present a matching community-string in order to
be processed by the SNMP server.
 log-settings flags(default=1, no-success-messages=2, incoming-packet-detail=3, outgoing-packet-detail=5, scp-detail=6, snmp-detail=7) default = default
 
Configures log messages. The server logs more or fewer messages 
depending on this parameter.
 name string default = CNRSNMP
 
The name of the server (constant for now).
 server-active bool default = true
 
If 'true', the server will run when it is started. If 'false', the
server will not run when it is started.
 trap-source-addr ipaddr
 
An optional address to use as the sender address in outgoing SNMP
trap packets.
snmp-interface
 
    snmp-interface - Configures the SNMP server's network interfaces

  Synopsis
 
    snmp-interface <name> create [<attribute>=<value>] [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    snmp-interface <name> delete
    snmp-interface list  
    snmp-interface listnames
    snmp-interface <name> show
    snmp-interface <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    snmp-interface <name> get <attribute>
    snmp-interface <name> unset <attribute>

    snmp-interface <name> enable <attribute>
    snmp-interface <name> disable <attribute>

  Description
 
    The snmp-interface command configures network interfaces for use
    by the NetworkRegistrar SNMP server. If there are no defined interfaces, the
    server discovers and uses all available interfaces on the
    system. When this list is present, the server only uses
    available interfaces, if any, that match this list.

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> snmp-interface example1 create 
    nrcmd> snmp-interface example1 set address=192.168.0.58 

    
  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 address subnet
 
The IP address and subnet mask of an interface that the SNMP server
should use.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
subnet
 
    subnet - Describes a contiguous range of IP address space
    in the address-space model

  Synopsis
 
    subnet <address/mask> create
    subnet <address> delete 
    subnet list
    subnet listnames
    subnet <address> show
    
    subnet <address> get <attribute>
    subnet <address> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    subnet <address> unset <attribute>

  Description
 

    A subnet is a correctly aligned, power-of-2 sized sequence of IP
    addresses.  In the address space model, subnets are leaf nodes
    while address-blocks are root, internal or leaf nodes of a tree
    describing the address space.

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> subnet 192.168.0.0 create 
    nrcmd> subnet 192.168.0.64 set primary-subnet=192.168.0.0
    nrcmd> subnet 192.168.0.64 show primary-subnet
  Status
 

  See Also
    address-block
 
  Attributes
 
 address subnet required,immutable
 
Sets the subnet address for this subnet. Stored as a network
address and a mask determining how large the range is.
 description string
 
Provides a description of this subnet.
 dns-host-bytes rangeint(1-4)
 
Determines the correct in-addr.arpa name to create, when
creating reverse zones from a subnet.  Based on this value
and the subnet size, either a new reverse zone is created,
or delegation records are put into the parent reverse zone.
If unset, the server synthesizes an appropriate value based on
the subnet size. This value parallels the dns-host-bytes
attribute in the Scope class.
 failoverpair oid
 
For DHCP allocation, assigns a subnet to a CCMFailoverPair
or to a single CCMCluster object.
 forward-zone-name dname
 
Names the forward zone associated with this subnet.
 interface oid
 
Assigns a subnet to a router interface.
 owner oid
 
Identifies the owner of this object, referenced by OID.  Use the
owner field to group similarly owned objects and to limit access
to objects by their owner.
If this attribute is unset, the object is assumed to have the
same owner as its parent.
 parent oid
 
Identifies the parent address block for this subnet.
 primary-subnet subnet
 
Contains the subnet number of a subnet's primary subnet. Use
this attribute when multiple logical IP subnets are present
on the same physical network.
 region oid
 
Associates an object with a region. The object is referenced by
OID.  Use the region field to group similarly located objects
to limit access to objects by their region.
If this attribute is unset, the object is assumed to have the
same region as its parent.
 reverse-zone-name dname
 
Names the reverse zone associated with this subnet.
 subnet-state flags(ric-allocated=1, dhcp-allocated=2, reclaiming=3) default =
 
Shows the current state of this subnet.
 type nameref(CCMAddrSpaceType)
 
Identifies the type of this subnet.  This attribute contains the
name of a CCMAddrSpaceType object that contains more information
about the type.
If this attribute is unset, the object is assumed to have the
same type as its parent.
 vpn-id int default = 0, immutable
 
Specifies the  VPN that contains the subnet address for this
subnet.
sync-from-dns
 
    sync-from-dns - Synchronizes CCM from DNS

  Synopsis
 
    sync-from-dns

  Description
 
    The sync-from-dns command rebuilds CCM management databases from
    the DNS server. Live server RR data may have the potential, over time,
    to go out of synchronization with the managed host data, particularly
    if live RRs are managed both locally and regionally. The sync-from-dns
    command can be used to perform synchronization of DNS data from the
    DNS server(s) to the CCM management database(s). 

    It is only available when NRCMD is at visibility 3.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    session
 
tftp
 
    tftp - Configures and controls the TFTP server

  Synopsis
 
    tftp disable <attribute>
    tftp enable <attribute>
    
    tftp get <attribute>
    tftp set <attribute>=<value> [=<value> ...]
    tftp unset <attribute>
    tftp show

    tftp serverLogs show
    tftp serverLogs nlogs=<nlogs> logsize=<logsize>
    
  Description
 
    The tftp command lets you configure the TFTP server in the cluster. 

    The serverLogs show command displays the number of log files and the 
    maximum size for each file.
    
    The serverLogs command allows you to set the two server logging
    parameters,nlogs and logsize.  You can set one parameter or both.
    Changes occur only to the one or ones specified.  When setting 
    logsize, you can add the suffix K or M signify units of thousands or
    millions.  Note that in order for these changes to take effect you must
    save the changes and restart the server Agent. 
    
        tftp serverLogs nlogs=6 logsize=500K
        tftp serverLogs logsize=5M

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> tftp enable docsis-access
    nrcmd> tftp set file-cache-directory="CacheDir"
    nrcmd> tftp reload 

  Status
 

  See Also
    server(nrcmd)
 
  Attributes
 
 active-directory-domain string required
 
Specifies the name of an Active Directory Domain the TFTP server
will use to provide dynamic configuration file support.
 csrc-configuration-file string required
 
Specifies the path to a configuration file the TFTP server will use
when loading the CSRC library.  The CSRC library enables the TFTP
server to generate DOCSIS modem configuration files.  The location
of the CSRC configuration file is typically
/CSRC_INSTALL_DIR/conf/csrc.cfg.
 default-device string required
 
Specifies the name of the default disk device the TFTP server will
use when none is specified in the pathname contained in the TFTP
request.  This property is specifically to be used on NT to
specify a default drive letter.
 file-cache bool default = disabled
 
Specifies whether the TFTP server should perform file caching on
files located in the file-cache-directory.
 file-cache-directory string
 
Specifies a path to a cache directory the TFTP server will use to
find the files to put into cache.  Upon start up the TFTP server
will load all the files located in this directory into cache.
 file-cache-max-memory-size rangeint(0-2147483647) default = 32000
 
Specifies the maximum number of bytes available to the server
for file-caching.
Valid range: 0-2147483647
 home-directory string required
 
Specifies a path to a home directory the TFTP server will use to
resolve TFTP requests.  If use-home-directory-as-root is disabled,
the home directory is used in conjunction with the paths specified
in the search-list to resolve TFTP requests.
 initial-packet-timeout rangeint(1-2147483647) default = 5, required
 
Specifies the initial length of time the TFTP server will wait
after sending a response to a client before declaring that response
timed-out and sending a retransmission to the client.
 ldap-host-name string default = localhost, required
 
Specifies the hostname or IP address of an LDAP server the TFTP
server will use to provide dynamic configuration file support.
 ldap-initial-timeout rangeint(1-2147483647) default = 10, required
 
Specifies the initial length of time the TFTP server will wait
after sending a request to an LDAP server before declaring that
request timed-out and sending a retransmission to the server.
 ldap-maximum-timeout rangeint(1-2147483647) default = 60, required
 
Specifies the maximum length of time the TFTP server will wait
after transmitting the initial LDAP request before giving up
retrying on that request.
 ldap-password string required
 
Specifies the password the TFTP server will use when connecting to
an LDAP server.
 ldap-port-number rangeint(1-65535) default = 389, required
 
Specifies the port number the TFTP server will use when
communicating with an LDAP server.
 ldap-root-dn string required
 
Specifies the root distinguished name the TFTP server will use to
locate the root of the directory tree for dynamic configuration
file support.
 ldap-use-ssl bool default = disabled, required
 
Specifies whether or not the TFTP server will use SSL when
communicating with an LDAP server.  If this feature is disabled, the
TFTP server will not use SSL when communicating with LDAP.
 ldap-user-name string required
 
Specifies the user name the TFTP server will use when connecting
to an LDAP server.
 log-level rangeint(0-4) default = 3, required
 
Specifies the level of verbosity the TFTP server will employ when
writing log messages to the TFTP server log file.  Each integer
value from 0 through 4 enables the following log levels: None,
Error, Warning, Information and Activity.
 log-settings flags(verbose=1, no-success-messages=2) default = verbose
 
Enables the TFTP server to allow control over additional details
about the events listed in the log-settings. These details can 
help analyze a problem, but can also cause the log files
to fill up quickly if left enabled for a long period of time.
When log files fill up quickly, they also turn over frequently.
So you might lose important information.
By default, the TFTP server's logging is verbose.
The possible flags are:
   1  verbose
      Causes all the logging in the server to be active.
      A success message is printed to the log for
      each successful transfer.
   2  no-success-messages
      Causes the single line message that is normally logged
      for every successful read from or write to the TFTP server
      to not appear.  It affects logging only for successful 
      file reads from the TFTP server.
 max-inbound-file-size string default = 1024k, required
 
Specifies the maximum file size limit that the TFTP server will
enforce for a file written to the TFTP server.  Default units is in
kilobytes.  Use k, m or g to indicate kilobytes, megabytes or
gigabytes.
 min-socket-buffer-size rangeint(1-2147483647) default = 65536, required
 
Specifies the minimum socket buffer size the TFTP server will use
for the well known port on which it is listening for TFTP requests.
 packet-trace-level rangeint(0-4) default = 0, required
 
Specifies the level of verbosity the TFTP server will employ when
writing messages to the server trace file.  Each integer value
from 1 through 4 enables increasing levels of tracing.  Setting
packet trace level to 0 disables tracing.
 port-number rangeint(1-65535) default = 69, required
 
Specifies the UDP port number the TFTP server will use to listen
for TFTP requests.
 read-access bool default = enabled, required
 
Specifies how the TFTP server should respond to file read requests
from TFTP clients.  If this feature is disabled, the TFTP server
will refuse file read requests.
 search-list string required
 
Specifies a comma separated list of paths the TFTP server will use
to resolve TFTP requests.  If use-home-directory-as-root is
enabled, the paths in the search list are ignored and the home
directory is used to resolve all TFTP requests.
 session-timeout rangeint(1-2147483647) default = 20, required
 
Specifies the maximum length of time the TFTP server will wait
after transmitting the initial response before giving up retrying
on that response.  If no response is received from the client
within this timeout period, the TFTP session is terminated.
 use-home-directory-as-root bool default = disabled, required
 
Specifies whether or not the TFTP server will treat pathnames
contained within TFTP requests as if the paths were rooted at the
specified home directory.  If this feature is enabled, the TFTP
server will attempt to resolve both absolute and relative
pathnames to paths located beneath the specified home directory.
 write-access bool default = disabled, required
 
Specifies how the TFTP server should respond to file write requests
from TFTP clients.  If this feature is disabled, the TFTP server
will refuse file write requests.
 write-allow-file-create bool default = disabled
 
Specifies whether to allow file creates on a PUT.  If false and
write-access equals true, the file must exist on the server for the
PUT to succeed.  If true and write-access is true, then the file
does not need to exist on the server first and will be created on
a PUT.  max-inbound-file-size will apply a limit to the size of
the file.
tftp-interface
 
    tftp-interface - Configures the network interfaces of the TFTP 
    server

  Synopsis
 
    tftp-interface <name> create [<attribute>=<value>] 
    tftp-interface <name> delete
    tftp-interface list  
    tftp-interface listnames
    tftp-interface <name> show
    tftp-interface <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    tftp-interface <name> get <attribute>
    tftp-interface <name> unset <attribute>

    tftp-interface <name> enable <attribute>
    tftp-interface <name> disable <attribute>

  Description
 
    The tftp-interface command configures network interfaces for use
    by the Network Registrar TFTP server. The TFTP interface logically
    represents the hardware interface (for example, an Ethernet or 
    Token Ring network interface card) that the TFTP server uses. 
    The TFTP server uses the configured address 
    information to determine which interface to use to send and 
    receive packets.

    If there are no defined interfaces, the server discovers
    and uses all available interfaces on the system. When this list
    is present, the server only uses the available interfaces, if 
    any, that match this list.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 address subnet
 
The IP address and subnet mask of an interface that the TFTP server
should use.
 ip6address prefix
 
Specifies the IPv6 address and prefix length of one or more
interfaces that the TFTP server should use.
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
A user-assigned name for the interface.
trap-recipient
 
    trap-recipient - Configures destinations for SNMP trap messages

  Synopsis
 
    trap-recipient <name> create
    trap-recipient <name> delete
    trap-recipient <name> enable <attribute>
    trap-recipient <name> disable <attribute>
    trap-recipient <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    trap-recipient <name> unset <attribute>
    trap-recipient <name> get <attribute>
    trap-recipient <name> [show]
    trap-recipient list

  Description
 
    The trap-recipient command configures management stations
    to which the Network Registrar SNMP server sends trap messages.
    The traps to be generated are set on the DNS and DHCP server
    traps-enabled attribute.

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> trap-recipient example-recipient createtrap-recipient example-recipient set ip-addr=192.168.0.34 

  Status
 

  See Also
    dhcp, dns, addr-trap
 
  Attributes
 
 agent-addr ipaddr
 
An IP address to use as the source agent-address in traps sent to
this recipient.
 community string
 
The SNMP community string of this trap recipient
 ip-addr ipaddr
 
Specifies the IP address of this trap recipient.
 port-number int default = 162
 
The optional IP port number of this trap recipient
update-policy
 
    update-policy - Configures DNS update policies.

  Synopsis
 
    update-policy <name> create 
    update-policy <name> delete
    update-policy list  
    update-policy listnames
    update-policy <name> show
    update-policy<name> get <attribute>
    update-policy <name> unset <attribute>
    
    update-policy <name> rules add "<value>" [<index>]
    update-policy <name> rules remove <index>

  Description
 
    The update-policy command lets you configure DNS update-policies.
    The most significant property of an update policy is an ordered
    list of rules. The rules are used to restrict or permit updates to
    DNS names. When adding a new rule, enclose the complete string
    in quotation marks. Use the backslash (\) to allow square 
    brackets ([ ]) in the rule.
    
    Note: If an update ACL  has been configured on the zone, 
    any update-policy configuration is ignored.

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> update-policy test create 
    nrcmd> update-policy test rules add  "grant any wildcard example* SRV"
    nrcmd> update-policy test rules add  "deny 1.1.1.1 wildcard \[a-z\]* A"

  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 name string required,unique,immutable
 
Specifies the name of the Update Policy.
 rules rule
 
Lists rules that make up the update policy. Each rule has the
following syntax:
	    
action:   Can be grant or deny.
	      grant - will allow an update if the rest of the rule
                  matches.
          deny  - will deny an update if the rest of the rule
                  matches.
acl-list: A list of one or more ip addresses, network addresses,
          keys and/or named acl references. Note key names must be
          prefixed with "key " (i.e. "key key.example" ).
keyword:  Can be name, subdomain or wildcard.
 	      name - used to specify a specific RR.
	      subdomain - used to specify a subdomain name.
	      wildcard - used to specify a name with wildcard
          characters.
value:    The name, sudomain or wildcard value associated with the
          specified keyword. Note that all values specified are
          relative to the zone in which they are applied.
          Therefore it is not necessary to add the zone name to
          the end of the value.
          The supported wildcard characters are:
          *     Will match zero or more characters. For example,
                the pattern dhcp-* matches all strings with the
                dhcp- prefix including the string dhcp-.
          ?     Will match a single character. For example, the
                pattern zone?.com matches zone1.com, zone2.com,
                etc but does not match zone.com
          [...] Will match any characters listed within the
                brackets. For example, you can provide a range
                such as 0-9 or a-z. If the pattern also includes
                the - character, make it the first character in
                the list (i.e. dhcp[-a-z]*)
rr-types: A comma delimited list of RR types for this rule. Each RR
	  type can also be negated using the exclamation point
          (i.e. !A,!TXT). You can also specify all types the an
          asterisk (*).
vpn
 
    vpn - Defines a logical VPN within which other DHCP objects
    may be configured

    Note: The namespace command is a synonym for compatibility
    with earlier versions of Network Registrar.

  Synopsis
 
    vpn <name> create <id-value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    vpn <name> delete 
    vpn list
    vpn listnames
    vpn <name> show

    vpn <name> get <attribute>
    vpn <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    vpn <name> unset <attribute>
    
  Description
 
    The vpn commands manipulate VPN objects in the DHCP server
    configuration. Each VPN must have a unique ID value.
    Other objects are associated with (or placed into) a VPN by
    VPN id. 

    Note: The reserved names "global" and "all" cannot be used
    as VPN names. These reserved names are used by other commands that
    take vpn names as arguments.

    In contrast to most other CLI configuration objects, you can
    change the name of a VPN.  The ID of the VPN, however, cannot
    be changed.  Both the name and ID of the VPN must be unique
    upon creation.

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> vpn red show

    nrcmd> vpn red set vpn-id=23:456 
 
  Status
 

  See Also
   
 
  Attributes
 
 addr-blocks-default-selection-tags string
 
Specifies the default selection tag (or list of tags) that will
be associated with incoming subnet-allocation requests in this
vpn that do not contain any subnet name data. No
default.
 addr-blocks-use-client-affinity bool
 
Determines whether the DHCP server attempts to allocate
subnets to clients using address-blocks that the clients
have already used. Default is true (enable).
If you disable this attribute, the server then supplies
subnets from any block that is suitable, based on other
selection data in the clients' messages.
 addr-blocks-use-lan-segments bool
 
Controls whether DHCP subnet-allocation uses the
lan-segment attribute when configured on address-blocks.
 addr-blocks-use-selection-tags bool
 
Controls whether the server compares the subnet name data in
incoming subnet-allocation requests with each address-block's
selection tags. A block will only be considered if the
two match. No default.
 description string
 
Describes the VPN that this  object represents.
 id int required,unique,immutable
 
The VPN's unique id.  This is a 32 bit value that is associated
with every VPN-qualified IP address, subnet or address block.
It is different than and unrelated to the standard 7-byte VPN-ID.
 name string required,unique
 
The VPN's name within the CNR management system. Independent from,
but could be the same as the vrf-name.
 vpn-id vpnid
 
The vpn-id in RFC 2685 format (i.e, 7 octets),
using a syntax similar to that used by IOS to enter the
same information.  The syntax is 3 hex octets, a colon,
and 4 hex octets.  For example 010203:04050607 would
be the way to enter the following hex octets:
01:02:03:04:05:06:07 into this property.
 vrf-name string
 
The VPN's VRF name.
zone
 
    zone - configures a DNS zone

  Synopsis
 
    zone <name> create primary file=<hostfile> [template=<template-name>]
    zone <name> create primary <name server> <person>
                               [template=<template-name] [<attribute>=<value>...]
    zone <name> create secondary <address> [<attribute>=<value>...]
    zone <name> delete
    zone list
    zone listnames  
    zone <name> set =<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    zone <name> get <attribute>
    zone <name> unset <attribute>
    zone <name> disable <attribute>
    zone <name> enable <attribute>
    zone <name> show
    
    zone <name> addHost <host name> <address> [<alias> ...]
    zone <name> removeHost <host name> 
    zone <name> listHosts  
    
    zone <name> addRR [-staged|-sync] <name> [<ttl>] [<class>] <type> <data>
    zone <name> addDNSRR <name> [<ttl>] <type> <data>
    zone <name> removeRR <name> [<type> [<data>]]
    zone <name> removeDNSRR <name> [<type>] [<data>]
    zone <name> listRR [all|ccm|dns]
    zone <name> findRR [-namePrefix <namePrefix>] 
          [-rrTypes <rrTypeList>]  [-protected | -unprotected]

    zone <name> < protect-name|unprotect-name > <name>
    zone <name> forceXfer secondary
    zone <name> syncToDns
    zone <secondary-zone-name> promote-to-primary

    zone <name> chkpt
    zone <name> dumpchkpt

    zone <name> scavenge

    zone <name> getScavengeStartTime 

    zone <name> applyTemplate <template-name>

  Description
 
    The zone command lets you create and edit DNS zones.
    
    The name of the zone may be an IPv4 subnet (<address>/<length>),
    IPv6 prefix (<address>/<length>), prefix name (the prefix
    address is used), or DNS name.

    zone <name> addHost <host name> <address> [<alias> ...]
    zone <name> removeHost <host name> 
    zone <name> listHosts 
       The addHost command adds a host with a given name, address 
       and optional aliases to the zone. 

       The removeHost command removes a host from the zone.

       The listHosts command lists the hosts in the zone.

    zone <name> addRR [-staged|-sync] <name> [<ttl>] [<class>] <type> <data>
    zone <name> addDNSRR <name> [<ttl>] <type> <data>
    zone <name> removeRR <name> [<type> [<data>]]
    zone <name> removeDNSRR <name> [<type>] [<data>]
    zone <name> listRR [all|ccm|dns]
    zone <name> findRR [-namePrefix <namePrefix>]
          [-rrTypes <rrTypeList>]  [-protected | -unprotected]

       The addRR command adds a protected resource record to a zone.
       The arguments to addRR are in the same format as BIND files. 
       An attempt to add a protected record to an unprotected name 
       will fail.

       The removeRR command removes all specified protected resource
       records.  Resource records may be specified by name, by name 
       and type, or by name, type, and data (the data is specified in
       BIND-style format.)
    
       The addDNSRR command adds an unprotected resource record. The 
       name, type, and data must be specified. An attempt to add an 
       unprotected record to a protected name will fail.

       The removeDNSRR command removes all specified unprotected 
       resource records.  Resource records may be specified by name,
       by name+type, or name+type+data. The changes take effect 
       immediately; no serverreload is necessary.  If the DNS server
       is not running, the command will fail.

       The listRR command lists the resource records in the zone. 
       CCM records are the records being managed by the CCM server,
       and stored in its database. DNS records are the records that
       the running DNS server is serving to clients.

       The findRR command displays the resource records matching a 
       name prefix, a list of resource record types, and whether 
       protected or not (or either).

       The cleanRR command removes obsolete resource records.  It is
       particularly useful for removing records remaining from zone
       deletion followed by recreation of the same zone. This command 
       is valid only for pre-6.2 clusters.

    zone <name> protect-name|unprotect-name> <name>
       The protect-name/unprotect-name command sets the protection 
       status of the resource records for the name. Protected names
       cannot be updated using DNS update requests.

    zone <name> forceXfer secondary
       The forceXfer command forces a full zone transfer of a 
       secondary zone, regardless of the zone serial number, to
       synchronize DNS data store. If a normal zone transfer is 
       already in progress, the forceXfer command is scheduled 
       immediately after the normal zone transfer finishes. An 
       option for primary zones has not been implemented yet.

    zone <name> chkpt
    zone <name> dumpchkpt
       The chkpt command forces the specified zone name to be the next
       one checkpointed.  If none are currently being checkpointed 
       it is done immediately.  Otherwise, it is done upon completion
       of the current checkpoint.

       The dumpchkpt command interprets an existing checkpoint file 
       and writes its contents to a file in human-readable format.

    zone <name> scavenge
    zone <name> getScavengeStartTime 
       The scavenge command schedules zone scavenging immediately 
       for the given zone regardless of the scavenging interval.

       The getScavengeStartTime command returns the date and time 
       of the next check for stale records, when records might 
       be scavenged.
   
    zone <secondary-zone-name> promote-to-primary
       The promote-to-primary command can be used to promote a 
       secondary zone to a primary zone (for example, if the primary 
       DNS server has had a hardware failure).

    zone <name> applyTemplate <template-name>
       The applyTemplate command applies the specified zone template
       to the zone. All properties configured on the zone template 
       are applied to the zone.

  Examples
 
    nrcmd> zone example.com. create primary file=host.local
    nrcmd> zone example.com. create primary ns ns-server 

  Status
 

  See Also
    zone-template
 
  Attributes
 
 checkpoint-interval rangetime(60m-1w) default = 3h
 
Sets the number of seconds that elapse between saves of zone data.
When the interval expires, Network Registrar takes a snapshot of
the zone data and records it in the zone checkpoint database.
 checkpoint-min-interval rangetime(60s-45m)
 
Specifies the minimum amount of time required (in seconds)
between the time the first checkpoint occurs and the second
checkpoint starts. This attribute applies only to zones with
dynamic resource records.
 defttl rangetime(0-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 24h, required
 
Controls the default TTL value used for resource records in this
zone that do not specify a TTL.
 dist-map objref(CCMZoneDistribution)
 
Identifies the zone distribution map associated with the
specified zone. The zone distribution map describes which
primary and secondary DNS servers should provide DNS service
for this zone.
 dynamic bool default = true
 
Enables RFC 2136 dynamic updates to the zone. The most typical source
of these updates is a DHCP server.
 expire rangetime(1s-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 1w
 
Sets the number of seconds that a secondary server can continue
providing zone data without confirming that the data remains current.
The expire interval must be greater than the refresh interval.
 minttl rangetime(0-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 10m
 
Sets the minimum TTL value displayed in resource records for this
zone. Records with TTL values lower than the minttl are published
with this value.
 nameservers dname required
 
Lists the  nameservers for this zone.
 notify bool
 
Enables notification of other authoritative servers when this
zone changes.  When set, to either true or false, it overrides the
global "notify" value for this zone.
 notify-set ipaddr
 
Lists additional servers to notify of changes to this zone.  All
servers listed in NS records for the zone, with the exception of
the server described by the "ns" property of the zone (the mname
field of the SOA record), receive notifications.
Servers listed in "notify-list" are also notified.
 ns dname required
 
Displays the fully-qualified domain name of the primary name server
for this zone. This host is the original, or primary source, of data
for this zone.
 nsttl dnsttl
 
Displays the ttl value applied to the NS resource records of
the zone.
 origin dname required,immutable
 
Displays the fully-qualified name of the zone's root.  The zone name.
 owner objref(CCMOwner)
 
Names the owner of this zone. Use the owner field to group
similarly owned zones and to limit administrative access.
 person dname required
 
Displays a domain name specifying the mailbox of the person
responsible for this zone.  The first label is a user or mail
alias, the rest of the labels are a mail destination.  A mailbox
of hostmaster@test.com would be represented as hostmaster.test.com.
 refresh rangetime(1s-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 3h
 
Sets the number of seconds that a secondary server waits before
polling for zone changes and refreshing its zone data.
 region objref(CCMRegion)
 
Associates a region with the specified object.  Use
the region field to group similarly located zones and
to limit administrative access.
 restrict-query-acl amelist
 
Specifies the zone access control list (ACL) used to restrict
the queries that the DNS server for this zone accepts. This list
can contain host IPs, network addresses, TSIG keys, and (global)
ACLs.  Only queries from clients defined in the ACL are accepted.
If unset, the zone inherits the value of the server's
restrict-query-acl attribute.
 restrict-xfer bool default = false
 
Limits sending zone transfers to a specific set of hosts. If
you restrict zone transfers, use the restrict-xfer-acl attribute
to specify the access control list that defines which servers
can perform zone transfers.
 restrict-xfer-acl amelist
 
Identifies the access control list designating who can receive
zone transfers from this zone.
 retry rangetime(1s-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 60m
 
Sets the number of seconds that a secondary server waits before
it retries polling for changes to zone data or it retries a zone
transfer that has encountered errors. The retry interval must be
less than (expire - refresh).
 scvg-enabled bool default = false
 
Enables dynamic resource-record scavenging for the zone. This
attribute removes stale records when clients are
configured to perform DNS updates but do not delete their
entries when they're no longer valid. If the DHCP server is used
to perform updates, it will also delete records when client
leases expire. Scavenging should not be enabled on these zones.
 scvg-ignore-restart-interval rangetime(2h-24h)
 
Ensures that the server does not reset the scavenging time
whenever a server restarts. With this attribute set,
Network Registrar ignores the time between when a server went
down and the time it restarts. This interval is normally short.
The value can range from two hours to one day.
With any time longer than the set time, Network Registrar
recalculates the scavenging period to allow for record updates
that cannot take place while the server is stopped. You can also
set this attribute on a zone, and the value set on the zone
overrides the server setting. Default is 2h.
 scvg-interval rangetime(60m-1y)
 
Sets the period of time that must elapse before a DNS server
can remove an out-of-date address (A) record. An A record becomes
out-of-date once it ages past its initial creation date plus its
scvg-refresh-interval and scvg-no-refresh-interval. Default is 1w.
 scvg-max-records rangeint(1-10000)
 
Sets the maximum number of records to remove from a zone during
its scavenging interval.
 scvg-max-records-searched int
 
Sets the maximum number of records to search for out-of-date
A records. These records are candidates for scavenging.
 scvg-no-refresh-interval rangetime(60m-1y)
 
With scavenging enabled, sets the interval during which DNS
updates cannot increment an A record timestamp. After both
the no-refresh and refresh intervals expire, the record becomes a
candidate for scavenging. The value can range from one hour to
365 days. You can also set this attribute on a zone, and the
value set on the zone overrides the server setting. Default is 1w.
 scvg-pause-interval rangetime(1s-24h)
 
Sets the number of seconds the server waits after scavenging
one set of records before going to the next set.
 scvg-refresh-interval rangetime(60m-1y)
 
With scavenging enabled, sets the interval during which DNS
updates can increment the A record timestamp. After both the
no-refresh and refresh intervals expire, the record is a
candidate for scavenging. The value can range from one hour
to 365 days. You can also set this  attribute on a zone, and
the value set on the zone overrides the server setting.
Default is 1w.
 serial int required
 
Displays an administratively specified serial number. The serial
number value must always increase; therefore, this serial number is
only applied to the zone if it is greater than the actual (dynamic)
serial number.
 soattl dnsttl
 
Displays the time-to-live (ttl) value applied to the SOA
resource record of the zone.
 subzone-forward enumint(normal=0, no-forward=1) default = normal
 
Specifies whether subzones use forwarders or not. When no-forward is
set, any query for the zone is not sent to the forwarder. This
is an extended resolution exception.
 update-acl amelist
 
Specifies the access control list for DNS updates to the zone,
given as an address match element list. The access control list
is not applied to administrative edits managed through the CCM server.
 update-policy-list string
 
Lists the DNS update policies used to authorize or deny DNS
updates. This attribute is ignored if the update-acl attribute
is also set.
zone-dist
 
    zone-dist - Configures zone distributions

  Synopsis
 
    zone-dist <name> create <primary-cluster> [<attribute>=<value> ...]                                
    zone-dist <name> delete 
    zone-dist list
    zone-dist listnames
    zone-dist <name> show

    zone-dist <name> get <attribute>
    zone-dist <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    zone-dist <name> unset <attribute>

    zone-dist <name> addSecondary <secondary-cluster>
                  [<master-server-ipkeys>]
    zone-dist <name> removeSecondary <secondary-cluster>
                  [<master-server-ipkeys>]
    zone-dist <name> listSecondaries

    zone-dist <name> sync < update | complete | exact >
                  [no-rrs] [no-secondaries]

  Description
 
    The zone-dist command lets you define and manage zone distribution
    configurations.

    On local clusters, the zone-dist sync command synchronizes staged
    edits to the DNS server and synchronizes primary zones to
    secondaries. Regardless of the mode selected, the exact list of
    authoritative zones (primary and secondary) is synchronized with 
    the DNS server. 
    
    On the regional cluster, the zone-dist sync command synchronizes
    primary zones from the regional configuration to the primary 
    local cluster, and synchronizes primary zones to secondaries. 
    Primary zones on the local cluster are replaced in Update or 
    Complete mode. In Exact mode, extra primary zones found on the
    local cluster are deleted. 
    
    Secondary servers use the same synchronization logic at both 
    local and regional clusters. In Update mode, synchronization
    ensures only that corresponding secondary zones exist on the 
    server. In Complete mode, any existing zones are updated to 
    use the master servers list specified by the distribution map. 
    In Exact mode, any zones not matching the distribution map 
    are deleted.
    
    Use the [no-rrs] and [no-secondaries] flags to skip portions 
    of the synchronization logic. While using these flags might
    improve the performance of the command, use them only when you
    are certain there are no changes pending. For example, if 
    primary zones are current with the DNS server, you can use 
    the [no-rrs] flag to synchronize your secondary zones.
    
    On local clusters, RRs are always synchronized to the local DNS server
    if changes are pending, and thus the [no-rrs] flag is ignored.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    cluster
 
  Attributes
 
 ixfr enumint(enable=1, disable=2, use-server-settings=3) default = use-server-settings
 
Configures secondary zones to enable incremental transfer
requests. When set, this attribute overrides the dns server
global ixfr-enable value. Using the server global value
(not setting this value per-zone) enables you to easily globally
turn incremental transfers on or off or to set a set a general
policy for your zones and specific exceptions to the server
global value.
    1  enable
       Permits incremental transfers for this zone.
    2  disable
       Prohibits incremental transfers for this zone.
    3  use-server-settings
       Uses the server settings. Unset the value set on
       secondary zones.
If you set incremental transfers, then this zone acts
differently than zones inheriting the server global value.
If you unset incremental transfers, Network Registrar uses the
server global ixfr value (and the operation of the GUI
specifically depends on this, since it has no way of setting
this per-zone feature).
 master-servers ipkey
 
Lists the master-servers to set when creating secondary
zone on secondary server.
Validation: A list of one or more ip addresses with an optional
key name (format [-]).
 name string required,unique
 
Names this zone distribution map.
 notify enumint(enable=1, disable=2, use-server-settings=3, use-primary-zone-settings=4) default = use-server-settings
 
Configures secondary zones to notify other authoritative servers when
there are zone changes.
    1  enable
       Allows notification of other authoritative servers when
       this zone changes. Overrides the global notify value
       for this zone.
    2  disable
       Disallows notification of other authoritative servers
       when this zone changes. Overrides the global notify value
       for this zone.
    3  use-server-settings
       Uses the server setting. Unset the value set on secondary
       zones.
    4  use-primary-zone-settings
       Uses the value set at the primary zone to configure the
       secondary zone.
 notify-set ipaddr
 
Provides an optional list of servers to notify when a secondary
zone changes. Use with the notify attribute to configure
secondary zones. All servers listed in NS records for the zone,
with the exception of the server described by the NS property
of the zone (the mname field of the SOA record) receive
notifications. Servers listed in the notify-set attribute are
also notified.
 primary oid(CCMCluster)
 
Identifies the cluster or HA DNS pair serving the primary zones
associated with this zone distribution map.
 restrict-query enumint(use-map-settings=1, use-server-settings=2, use-primary-zone-settings=3) default = use-primary-zone-settings
 
Determines how to restrict zone queries.
    1  use-map-settings
       Uses the restrict-query-acl attribute to configure
       secondary zones.
    2  use-server-settings
       Uses the server settings. Unset the value on secondary
       zones.
    3  use-primary-zone-settings
       Uses the primary zone value to configure secondary zones.
 restrict-query-acl amelist
 
Configures the ACL that the zone uses to restrict queries.
The DNS server honors the restriction set on the zone. If the
restrict-query attribute is set to use-map-settings, use this
value to configure secondary zones. You can configure the ACL
to include any of the following:
    host IPs
    network addresses
    TSIG keys
    global ACLs
Those clients defined in this ACL list are given access; others
are refused. If missing, the zone inherits the value of the
server's restrict-query-acl attribute.
 restrict-xfer enumint(enable=1, disable=2, use-server-settings=3, use-primary-zone-settings=4) default = use-primary-zone-settings
 
Determines what settings to use to restrict zone transfers.
    1  enable
       Limits zone transfers to a specific set of hosts.
       If you limit zone transfer, you must then use the
       restrict-xfer-acl attribute to list the servers
       allowed to perform zone transfers.
    2  disable
       Places no restrictions on zone transfers.
    3  use-server-settings
       Use the server settings and unsets the value on
       secondary zones.
    4  use-primary-zone-settings
       Configures a secondary zone with the primary zone
       value.
 restrict-xfer-acl amelist
 
Configures the access control list that designates which devices
receive zone transfers from the specified zone. Use with the
restrict-xfer attribute if use-server-settings is set.
zone-template
 
    zone-template - Configures a zone template

  Synopsis
 
    zone-template <name> create [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    zone-template <name> delete
    zone-template <name> set <attribute>=<value> [<attribute>=<value> ...]
    zone-template <name> get <attribute>
    zone-template <name> unset <attribute>

    zone-template <name> disable <attribute>
    zone-template <name> enable <attribute>
    zone-template <name> show

    zone-template <name> create clone=<clone-name>
    zone-template <name> apply-to [all | <zone1>[,...]

  Description
 
    The zone-template command lets you configure templates to use
    when creating zones.

  Examples
 

  Status
 

  See Also
    zone
 
  Attributes
 
 checkpoint-interval rangetime(60m-1w) default = 3h
 
Sets the number of seconds that elapse between saves of zone data.
When the interval expires, Network Registrar takes a snapshot of
the zone data and records it in the zone checkpoint database.
 checkpoint-min-interval rangetime(60s-45m)
 
Controls the minimum time required (in seconds) between the
time the first zone checkpoint occurs and the second zone
checkpoint starts.  This attribute applies only to zones with
dynamic rrs.
 defttl rangetime(0-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 24h, required
 
Controls the default TTL value used for resource records in a
zone that do not specify a TTL.
 dist-map oid
 
Associates a zone distribution map with a zone. The map
describes the primary and secondary DNS servers that provide
DNS service for this zone.
 dynamic bool
 
Enables RFC 2136 dynamic updates to the zone.  The most typical source
of these updates is a DHCP server.
 expire rangetime(1s-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 1w
 
Sets the number of seconds that a secondary server can continue
providing zone data without confirming that the data remains
current. The expire interval must be greater than the refresh
interval.
 minttl rangetime(0-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 10m
 
Sets the minimum TTL value displayed in resource records for a
zone. Records with TTL values lower than the minttl are published
with this value.
 name string required,unique
 
Names this zone template.
 nameservers string
 
Lists the nameservers for a zone.
 notify bool
 
Enables notification of other authoritative servers when this
zone changes.  When set, to either true or false, it overrides
the global "notify" value for a zone.
 notify-set ipaddr
 
Lists additional servers to notify of changes to a zone.  All
servers listed in NS records for the zone, with the exception of
the server described by the "ns" property of the zone (the mname
field of the SOA record), receive notifications.
Servers listed in "notify-list" are also notified.
 ns string
 
Specifies the fully-qualified domain name (FQDN) of the
primary name server for the zone. This host is the original
or primary source of data for this zone.
Note: Network Registrar treats the value set here as a string
rather than a dnsname to enable encoding relative or absolute
names in this attribute.
 nsttl dnsttl
 
Controls the ttl value applied to the zone's NS resource records.
 owner objref(CCMOwner)
 
Identifies the owner of this zone. Use the owner field to group
similarly owned zones and to limit administrative access.
 person string
 
Specifies the mailbox for the hostmaster (person) in domain name
form. The first label is a user or mail alias, the rest of the
labels are a mail destination.  A mailbox of hostmaster@test.com
would be represented as:
    hostmaster.test.com.
Note: Network Registrar treats the value set here as a string
rather than a dnsname to enable encoding relative or absolute
names in this attribute.
 refresh rangetime(1s-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 3h
 
Sets the interval at which a secondary server contacts its
master server for changes to zone data. The interval is
defined in the server?s SOA record and is also known as the
secondary refresh time.
 region objref(CCMRegion)
 
The region associated with this object.  This region field is used
to group similarly located zones and can be
used to limit administrative access.
 restrict-query-acl amelist
 
Zone Address Control List (ACL) used to restrict queries to be
honored by the DNS server on this zone. This list can contain host
IPs, network addresses, TSIG keys and/or (global) ACLs.  Those
clients defined in this ACL  list shall be honored; others shall be
refused. If unset, the zone inherits the value of the server's
restrict-query-acl attribute.
 restrict-xfer bool
 
Restricts sending zone transfers to a specific set of hosts. If you
restrict zone transfers, you need to use the restrict-xfer-acl
property to specify the access control list of who is allowed to
perform zone transfers.
 restrict-xfer-acl amelist
 
The access control list that designates who is allowed to receive
zone transfers from this zone.
 retry rangetime(1s-68y5w3h14m7s) default = 60m
 
Sets the amount of time that a secondary server waits before
it retries polling for changes to zone data or it retries a zone
transfer that has encountered errors. The retry interval must be
less than the expire and refresh intervals. A good value is
between one-third and one-tenth of the refresh time.
 scvg-enabled bool
 
Enables dynamic resource-record scavenging for the zone. Use
this feature to remove stale records that arise when clients are
configured to perform DNS updates, but do not delete their
entries when they are no longer valid. If the DHCP server
performs updates, it also delete records when client leases
expire. Scavenging should not be enabled on these zones.
 scvg-ignore-restart-interval rangetime(2h-24h)
 
Ensures that the server does not reset the scavenging time
whenever a server restarts. Within this attribute set,
Network Registrar ignores the time between when a server went
down and the time it restarts. This interval is normally short.
The value can range from two hours to one day.
With any time longer than the set time, Network Registrar
recalculates the scavenging period to allow for record updates
that cannot take place while the server is stopped. You can also
set this attribute on a zone, and the value set on the zone
overrides the server setting.
 scvg-interval rangetime(60m-1y)
 
Sets the seconds that DNS waits before removing (scavenging)
out-of-date resource records.
 scvg-max-records rangeint(1-10000)
 
Controls the maximum number of records to search at one time for
candidates to be scavenged.
 scvg-max-records-searched int
 
Sets the maximum number of records to be scavenged from the zone
during a scavenging interval.
 scvg-no-refresh-interval rangetime(60m-1y)
 
Sets the number of seconds during which DNS updates cannot increment
the zone timestamp.
 scvg-pause-interval rangetime(1s-24h)
 
Controls the interval (in seconds) that scavenging will wait
after scavenging a set of records, before going onto the next
set.
 scvg-refresh-interval rangetime(60m-1y)
 
Sets the number of seconds during which DNS updates can increment
the zone timestamp. After both the no-refresh and refresh intervals
expire, the record is a candidate for scavenging. The value
can range from one hour to 365 days. The zone setting overrides
the server setting of 604800s (1w).
 serial int
 
Sets the starting serial number of the zone. A DNS server uses
a serial number to indicate database changes. Increments to this
number trigger zone transfers to a secondary server.
 soattl dnsttl
 
Controls the ttl value applied to a zone's SOA resource record.
 subzone-forward enumint(normal=0, no-forward=1) default = normal
 
Specifies whether subzones use forwarders or not. When no-forward is
set, any query for the zone will not be sent to the forwarder. This
is an extended resolution exception.
 update-acl amelist
 
Specifies the access control list for DNS updates to a zone,
defined as an address match element list. The access control
list is not applied to dynamic updates coming from the UIs. Updates
from them UIs are always allowed as long as the zone attribute
dynamic is enabled. The access control list is not applied
to administrative edits managed through the CCM server.
 update-policy-list string
 
An ordered list of DNS update policies that can be used to authorize
or deny DNS updates. This attribute will be ignored if update-acl
is also set.